‫ﺗَ ْﺴ ِﻬ ْﻴ ُﻞ اﻟﻨﱠ ْﺤ ِﻮ‬

TASHEEL AL-NAHW

based on
‘Ilm  al-Nahw of Mawlana Mushtaq Ahmad Charthawali
 Copyright © DÉr al-Sa‘Édah Publications 2011
First Online Edition July 2011

“General  and  unrestricted  permission  is  granted  for  the  unaltered  

duplication,  distribution,  and  transmission  of  this  text.”

In Plain English: Make as many copies as you want.

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents i
List of Tables vii
Introduction to the Text & Translation ix
ُ‫ﺎت اﻟْ َﻌَﺮﺑِﻴﱠﺔ‬ ِ ‫ – اَِْﻻ‬Arabic Terms
ُ ‫ﺻﻄ َﻼ َﺣ‬
ْ xi

CHAPTER 1 1
1.1. ‫ﺤ ُﻮ‬
ْ ‫ – اَﻟﻨﱠ‬Arabic Grammar 1
1.2 ُ‫ – اَﻟْ َﻜﻠِ َﻤﺔ‬The Word 2
‫ – اِ ْﺳ ٌﻢ‬Noun 2
‫ – ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬Verb 2
‫ف‬ٌ ‫ – َﺣ ْﺮ‬Particle 3
1.3 4
ِ ‫ – أَﻗْﺴﺎم‬Types of Noun
‫اﻻ ْﺳ ِﻢ‬ 4
َُ
ِ
‫ – أَﻗْ َﺴ ُﺎم اﻟْﻔ ْﻌ ِﻞ‬Types of Verb 4
‫ف‬ِ ‫اﳊﺮ‬
َْْ ‫ – أَﻗْ َﺴ ُﺎم‬Types of Particle 4

ُ َ‫ – اَ ْﳉُ َﻤ ُﻞ َو اﻟْ ُﻤَﺮﱠﻛﺒ‬Sentences and Phrases

1.4 ‫ﺎت‬ 6
1.4.1 ‫ﱪﻳﱠِﺔ‬ ََِ‫اﳋ‬ْ ‫اﳉُ ْﻤﻠَ ِﺔ‬ْ ‫أَﻗْ َﺴ ُﺎم‬ 6

ٌ‫ – ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ اِ ِْﲰﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬Nominal Sentence 6

ٌ‫ – ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬Verbal Sentence 7

1.4.2 ‫ﺸﺎﺋِﻴﱠ ِﺔ‬ َ ْ‫اﳉُ ْﻤﻠَ ِﺔ ا ِﻹﻧ‬
ْ ‫أَﻗْ َﺴ ُﺎم‬ 8
1.4.3 ‫ﺺ‬ ِ ِ‫ﺐ اﻟﻨﱠﺎﻗ‬ ِ ‫ – أَﻗْﺴ ُﺎم اﻟْﻤﺮﱠﻛ‬Types of Phrases 9
َُ َ
ِ ِ
1. ‫ﻰ‬ ‫ﺐ ﺗَـ ْﻮﺻْﻴﻔ ﱞ‬ ٌ ‫ – ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ‬Descriptive Phrase 9
2. ‫ﺎﰱﱞ‬ ِ‫ﺿ‬ َ ِ‫ﺐ إ‬ ٌ ‫ – ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ‬Possessive Phrase 9
3. ‫ى‬ ‫ﺐ إِ َﺷﺎ ِر ﱞ‬ ٌ ‫ – ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ‬Demonstrative Phrase 10
4. ‫ى‬ ‫ َﻋ َﺪ ِد ﱞ‬/‫ﺐ ﺑِﻨَﺎﺋِ ﱞﻲ‬ ٌ ‫ – ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ‬Numerical Phrase 10
ِ ‫ﺼﺮ‬
5. ‫ف‬ ْ ‫ﺐ َﻣْﻨ ُﻊ اﻟ ﱠ‬ ٌ ‫ – ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ‬Indeclinable Phrase 11
1.4.4 Additional Notes About ٌ‫ﲰﻴﱠﺔ‬ ِْ ِ‫ﲨﻠَﺔٌ ا‬
ُْ 13
Summary 14

i
1.5 15
‫اﻻ ْﺳ ِﻢ‬ِْ ‫ – ﻋ َﻼﻣﺎت‬Signs of a Noun
ُ َ َ 15
‫ﺎت اﻟْ ِﻔ ْﻌ ِﻞ‬
ُ ‫ – َﻋ َﻼ َﻣ‬Signs of a Verb 15
‫ف‬ِ ‫اﳊﺮ‬
َْْ ُ‫ – َﻋ َﻼ َﻣﺔ‬Sign of a Particle 15
1.5.1 General Notes 16
1.6 ‫ﻀ َﻤﺎﺋُِﺮ‬ ‫ – اَﻟ ﱠ‬Personal Pronouns 17
1.7 ُ‫اﳉَﺎ ﱠرة‬
ْ ‫وف‬ ُ ‫ – اَ ْﳊُْﺮ‬Prepositions 18
1.8 ‫ﺸﺒﱠـ َﻬﺔُ ﺑِﺎﻟْ ِﻔ ْﻌ ِﻞ‬
َ ‫وف اﻟْ ُﻤ‬
ُ ‫ – اَ ْﳊُُﺮ‬Those Particles That Resemble the Verb 20
1.9 ُ‫ﺼﺔ‬ ِ ُ ‫ – اَْﻷَﻓْـﻌ‬Auxiliary (Defective) Verbs
َ ‫ﺎل اﻟﻨﱠﺎﻗ‬ َ 22

CHAPTER 2
25
‫ب َو اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺒﻨِ ﱡﻰ‬
ُ ‫ – اَﻟْ ُﻤ ْﻌ َﺮ‬Declinable and Indeclinable Nouns
2.1 25
‫اب‬ِ ‫اﻹ ْﻋﺮ‬ ِ ُ ‫ – َﻋ َﻼ َﻣ‬Signs of I‘raab
َ ْ ‫ﺎت‬ 25
‫ب‬ ِ ‫ت اﻟْﻤ ْﻌﺮ‬
َ ُ ُ ‫ – َﺣ َﺎﻻ‬Conditions of Mu‘rab 25
Difference Between ٌ‫ﺿ ﱠﻤﺔ‬ َ – ٌ‫ َﻛ ْﺴَﺮةٌ – ﻓَـْﺘ َﺤﺔ‬and ‫ﺿ ﱞﻢ‬
َ – ‫َﻛ ْﺴٌﺮ – ﻓَـْﺘ ٌﺢ‬ 26
2.2 ‫ﲎ‬‫ – اَﻟْ َﻤْﺒ ِ ﱡ‬Indeclinable Noun 27
2.3 ‫ب‬ ُ ‫ – اَﻟْ ُﻤ ْﻌَﺮ‬Declinable Noun 28
ِ ‫ – أَﻗْﺴﺎم ْاﻷَ ْﲰ‬Types of Indeclinable Nouns
2.4 ‫ﺎء اﻟْ َﻤْﺒﻨِﻴﱠ ِﺔ‬ َ َُ 29
2.4.1 ‫ﻀ َﻤﺎﺋُِﺮ‬ ‫ – اَﻟ ﱠ‬Personal Pronouns 30
2.4.2 ُ‫ﻮﺻﻮﻟَﺔ‬ ُ ‫ اَْﻷَ ْﲰَﺎءُ اﻟْ َﻤ‬- Relative Pronouns 36
2.4.3 ِ‫ﺎرة‬ َ ‫ – أَ ْﲰَﺎءُ ْاﻹ َﺷ‬Demonstrative Pronouns 39
2.4.4 ‫ﺎل‬ ِ ‫ – أَ ْﲰَﺎء ْاﻷَﻓْـﻌ‬Those Nouns Which Have the Meaning of Verbs 41
َ ُ
2.4.5 ‫ﺻ َﻮات‬ ِ
ْ َ‫ – أَ ْﲰَﺎءُ ْاﻷ‬Those Nouns Which Denote a Sound 42
2.4.6 ‫وف‬ ِ ‫ – أَ ْﲰﺎء اﻟْﻈُﺮ‬Adverbs
ُ َُ 43
ِ‫ف اﻟﱠﺰﻣﺎن‬
َ ُ ‫ – ﻇَْﺮ‬Adverb of Time 43
ِ ‫ف اﻟْﻤ َﻜ‬
‫ﺎن‬ َ ُ ‫ – ﻇَْﺮ‬Adverb of Place 45
2.4.7 ‫ﺎت‬ ِ ‫ – أَ ْﲰﺎء اﻟْ ِﻜﻨَﺎﻳ‬Those Nouns Which Indicate an Unspecified 47
َ َُ
Quantity
2.4.8 ‫ﺐ اﻟْﺒِﻨَﺎﺋِ ﱡﻲ‬ ُ ‫ – اَﻟْ ُﻤَﺮﱠﻛ‬Numerical phrase 47
2.5 ُ‫ – اَْﻷَ ْﲰَﺎءُ اﻟْ ُﻤ ْﻌَﺮﺑَﺔ‬Types of Declinable Nouns 48

ٌ ‫ﺼ ِﺮ‬
‫ف‬ َ ‫ُﻣْﻨ‬ 48

ii
 ‫ف‬ٍ ‫َﻏﻴـﺮ ﻣْﻨﺼ ِﺮ‬ 48
َ ُ ُْ
ِ‫ﺼﺮف‬
ْ ‫ﺎب َﻣْﻨ ِﻊ اﻟ ﱠ‬
ُ َ‫أَ ْﺳﺒ‬ 48
ِ ‫َﲰ ِﺎء اﻟْﻤﻌﺮﺑ‬
2.6 ‫ﺎت‬ ِ ِ
ََ ْ ُ َْ ‫اب أَﻗْ َﺴﺎم ْاﻷ‬
ُ ‫ – إ ْﻋَﺮ‬I‘raab of the Various Types of Mu‘rab Nouns 52

CHAPTER 3
55
Further Discussion of Nouns
‫ب‬ ِ
3.1 ُ ‫ – اَْﻻ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ َﻤْﻨ ُﺴ ْﻮ‬Relative Adjective 55
ِ ‫ – اَِْﻻﺳﻢ اﻟْﺘ‬Diminutive Noun
3.2 ُ‫ﺼﻐﲑ‬ ْ َ ُْ 57
3.3 ُ‫ – اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔُ َو اﻟﻨﱠﻜَِﺮة‬Definite and Common Nouns 58
3.4 ُ ‫ – اَِْﻻ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺬ ﱠﻛُﺮ َو اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺆﻧ‬Masculine and Feminine Nouns
‫ﱠﺚ‬ 59
3.5 ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ َو ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔٌ َو ﲨَْ ٌﻊ‬ ِ ‫ – و‬Singular, Dual and Plural
َ 61
3.6 ‫اﳉَ ْﻤ ِﻊ‬
ْ ‫ – أَﻗْ َﺴ ُﺎم‬Types of Plural 62
3.7 ‫ﺎت‬
ٌ ‫ﻮﻋ‬ َ ُ‫ َﻣ ْﺮﻓ‬- Words Which Are Always Marfoo‘ 66
3.7.1 ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ – ﻓَﺎﻋ‬Subject/Doer 66
3.7.2 ‫ﺐ اﻟْ َﻔﺎﻋِ ِﻞ‬ ِ ِ ِ ِ
ُ ‫ ﻧَﺎﺋ‬/ ُ‫ – ﻓ ْﻌ ُﻞ َﻣﺎ َﱂْ ﻳُ َﺴ ﱠﻢ ﻓَﺎﻋﻠُﻪ‬Substitute of ‫ﻓَﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ 68
3.7.3 ‫ﲔ ﺑِﻠَْﻴﺲ‬ ِ ْ ‫ – اِ ْﺳﻢ َﻣﺎ و َﻻ اَﻟْﻤ َﺸﺒﱠـ َﻬﺘَـ‬The Noun of ‫ َﻣﺎ‬and ‫َﻻ‬, Which Is Similar 69
َ ُ َ ُ
to ‫ﻟَْﻴﺲ‬
َ
3.7.4 ‫ﺧﺒَـ ُﺮ َﻻ اَﻟﱠِﱴ ﻟِﻨَـ ْﻔ ِﻲ ا ْﳉْﻨﺲ‬
ِ ِ
َ – The ‫ َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬of That ‫ َﻻ‬Which Negates an Entire 69
ْ
‫ﺲ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫( ﺟْﻨ‬Class)
3.8 ‫ﺎت‬
ٌ َ‫ﺼ ْﻮﺑ‬ ُ ‫ – َﻣْﻨ‬Words Which Are Always Mansoob 71
3.8.1 ‫ – َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل ﺑِِﻪ‬Object 71
3.8.2 ‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل ُﻣﻄْﻠَ ٌﻖ‬ 73
3.8.3 ُ‫ﻮل ﻟَﻪ‬ ٌ ‫ َﻣ ْﻔ ُﻌ‬/ ‫َﺟﻠِ ِﻪ‬ ِ ٌ ‫ﻣ ْﻔﻌ‬
ْ ‫ﻮل ﻷ‬ ُ َ 73
3.8.4 ُ‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل َﻣ َﻌﻪ‬ 73
ِ ِ‫ ﻣ ْﻔﻌﻮٌل ﻓ‬/ ‫ف‬
3.8.4 ‫ﻴﻪ‬ ْ ُ َ ُ ‫اَﻟﻈﱠْﺮ‬ 74
3.8.5 ‫ﺎل‬ ُ َ‫ – اَ ْﳊ‬State / Condition 76
3.8.6 ‫ﱠﻤْﻴـ ُﺰ‬ ِ ‫ اَﻟﺘ‬/ ‫اَﻟﺘﱠﻤﻴِﻴـﺰ‬ 79
ُْ ْ
Rules for ‫( أَ ْﲰَﺎءُ اﻟْ َﻌ َﺪ ِد‬Numerals) 80
3.8.7 ‫ﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﲎ‬ ْ ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ‬ 84
3.9 ‫ات‬
ُ ‫ – اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﺠُﺮْوَر‬Words Which Are Always Majroor 87
3.10 ‫اَﻟﺘﱠـ َﻮاﺑِ ُﻊ‬ 88

iii
 ‫ﺼ َﻔﺔُ ‪3.10.1‬‬
‫ﺖ أَْو اَﻟ ﱢ‬
‫‪ – Adjective‬اَﻟﻨـ ْﱠﻌ ُ‬ ‫‪88‬‬
‫‪ – Emphasis‬اَﻟﺘﱠﺄْﻛِْﻴ ُﺪ ‪3.10.2‬‬ ‫‪91‬‬
‫‪ – Substitute‬اَﻟْﺒَ َﺪ ُل ‪3.10.3‬‬ ‫‪94‬‬
‫ﺴ ِﻖ ‪3.10.4‬‬ ‫‪ – Conjunction‬ﻋﻄْ ِ ٍ‬
‫ﻒ اﻟﻨﱠ َ‬
‫ﻒ ﲝَْﺮف‪َ /‬ﻋﻄْ ُ‬
‫َ ٌ‬ ‫‪95‬‬
‫ﻋﻄْﻒ اﻟْﺒـﻴ ِ‬
‫ﺎن ‪3.10.5‬‬‫َ ُ ََ‬ ‫‪96‬‬

‫‪CHAPTER 4‬‬
‫‪ – Governing Words‬اَﻟْ َﻌ َﻮ ِاﻣ ُﻞ‬
‫‪97‬‬

‫ﺎﻣﻠَﺔُ ‪4.1‬‬ ‫ف اﻟْﻌ ِ‬

‫‪ – Governing Particles‬اَ ْﳊُُﺮْو ُ َ‬ ‫‪98‬‬
‫‪Particles Which Govern Nouns‬‬ ‫‪98‬‬
‫ﻀﺎ ِرعٌ ‪Particles Which Govern‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ ُﻣ َ‬ ‫‪98‬‬
‫ف اﻟﻨﱠ ِ‬
‫ﺎﺻﺒَﺔُ ‪4.1.1‬‬ ‫‪ – Particles That Give Nasb‬اَ ْﳊُُﺮْو ُ‬ ‫‪99‬‬
‫اﳉَﺎ ِزَﻣﺔُ ‪4.1.2‬‬
‫ف ْ‬‫‪ – Particles That Give Jazm‬اَ ْﳊُُﺮْو ُ‬ ‫‪102‬‬
‫ﺎل اﻟْﻌ ِ‬
‫ﺎﻣﻠَﺔُ ‪4.2‬‬ ‫‪ – Governing Verbs‬اَْﻷَﻓْـ َﻌ ُ َ‬ ‫‪104‬‬
‫ﻞ اﻟْ ُﻤﺘَـ َﻌ ﱢﺪى ‪4.2.1‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ – Transitive Verb‬اَﻟْﻔ ْﻌ ُ‬ ‫‪105‬‬
‫ﱡﺮْوِع ‪4.2.2‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﺎل اﻟْ ُﻤ َﻘ َﺎرﺑَﺔ َواﻟﱠﺮ َﺟﺎء َواﻟﺸُ‬
‫أَﻓْـ َﻌ ُ‬ ‫‪107‬‬
‫ﺎل اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺪ ِح َو اﻟ ﱠﺬم ‪4.2.3‬‬
‫‪ – Verbs of Praise and Blame‬أَﻓْـ َﻌ ُ‬ ‫‪109‬‬
‫ﱠﻌ ﱡﺠ ِ‬
‫ﺐ ‪4.2.4‬‬ ‫ﺎل اﻟﺘـ َ‬
‫‪ – Verbs of Wonder‬أَﻓْـ َﻌ ُ‬ ‫‪111‬‬
‫‪ – Governing Nouns‬اَْﻷَ ْﲰﺎء اﻟْﻌ ِ‬
‫ﺎﻣﻠَﺔُ ‪4.3‬‬ ‫َُ َ‬ ‫‪112‬‬
‫ﱠﺮ ِﻃﻴﱠﺔُ ‪4.3.1‬‬
‫‪ – Conditional Nouns‬اَْﻷَ ْﲰَﺎءُ اﻟﺸ ْ‬ ‫‪112‬‬
‫اِﺳﻢ اﻟْ َﻔ ِ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ ‪4.3.2‬‬ ‫ُْ‬ ‫‪114‬‬
‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮِل ‪4.3.3‬‬ ‫‪116‬‬
‫ﺼ َﻔﺔُ اﻟْﻤ َﺸﺒﱠـﻬﺔُ ﺑِﺎﺳ ِﻢ اﻟْ َﻔ ِ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ ‪4.3.4‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ا ْﺳ ُﻢ ‪ – That Adjective Which Is Similar to‬اَﻟ ﱢ ُ َ ْ‬
‫‪117‬‬
‫اﻟْ َﻔ ِ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ‬
‫ﻀْﻴ ِﻞ ‪4.3.5‬‬‫اِﺳﻢ اﻟﺘﱠـ ْﻔ ِ‬
‫ُْ‬ ‫‪118‬‬
‫ﺼ َﺪ ُر ‪4.3.6‬‬
‫اَﻟْ َﻤ ْ‬ ‫‪120‬‬
‫ﺎف ‪4.3.7‬‬
‫ﻀ ُ‬‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ َ‬ ‫‪120‬‬
‫اَِْﻻ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟﺘﱠﺎمﱡ ‪4.3.8‬‬ ‫‪121‬‬

‫‪iv‬‬
 4.3.9 ‫ﻜﻨَﺎﻳَِﺔ‬
ِ ْ‫أَ ْﲰﺎء اﻟ‬
َُ 122
4.3.10 ‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ ُﻤﺒَﺎﻟَﻐَ ِﺔ‬ 123
4.4 ‫ف اﻟْﻐَْﻴـُﺮ اﻟْ َﻌ ِﺎﻣﻠَ ِﺔ‬ُ ‫ – اَ ْﳊُُﺮْو‬Non-Governing Particles 124
1. ‫ف اﻟﺘﱠـْﻨﺒِْﻴ ِﻪ‬ ُ ‫ – ُﺣُﺮْو‬Particles of Notification 124
2. ‫ﺎب‬ ِ َ‫اﻹ ْﳚ‬ ِْ ‫ف‬ ُ ‫ – ُﺣُﺮْو‬Particles of Affirmation 124
3. ‫ﲑ‬ ِْ ‫ – َﺣﺮﻓَﺎ اﻟﺘﱠـ ْﻔ ِﺴ‬Particles of Clarification
ْ 125
4. ُ‫ﺼ َﺪ ِرﻳﱠﺔ‬ ْ ‫ف اﻟْ َﻤ‬ ُ ‫اَ ْﳊُُﺮْو‬ 125
5. ‫ﺾ‬ ِ ‫ﻀْﻴ‬ ِ ‫ف اﻟﺘﱠﺤ‬
ْ ُ ‫ – ُﺣُﺮْو‬Particles of Exhortation 125
6. ‫ﱠﻮﻗﱡ ِﻊ‬ َ ‫ف اﻟﺘـ‬ ُ ‫ – َﺣ ْﺮ‬Particle of Anticipation 126
7. ‫اﻻ ْﺳﺘِ ْﻔ َﻬ ِﺎم‬ ِْ ‫ – ﺣﺮﻓَﺎ‬Particles of Interrogation
َْ 126
8. ‫ف اﻟ ﱠﺮْد ِع‬ ُ ‫ – َﺣ ْﺮ‬Particle of Rebuke 126
9. ‫اَﻟﺘﱠـْﻨ ِﻮﻳْ ُﻦ‬ 126
10. ‫ﻧـُ ْﻮ ُن اﻟﺘﱠﺄْﻛِْﻴ ِﺪ‬ 127
11. ‫ف َل‬
ُ ‫َﺣ ْﺮ‬ 127
12. ُ‫ف اﻟ ﱠﺰاﺋِ َﺪة‬
ُ ‫ – اَ ْﳊُُﺮْو‬Extra Particles 127
13. ‫ﱠﺮ ِط‬
ْ ‫ – َﺣ ْﺮﻓَﺎ اﻟﺸ‬Conditional Particles 128
14. ‫ﻟَ ْﻮَﻻ‬ 129
15. ‫ام‬
َ ‫َﻣﺎ – َﻣﺎ َد‬ 129
ِ ْ‫ف اﻟْﻌﻄ‬
16. ‫ﻒ‬ َ ُ ‫ُﺣُﺮْو‬ 129
Bibliography 131

v
 ‫‪LIST OF TABLES‬‬

‫‪Table No‬‬ ‫‪Page No‬‬

‫‪1.1‬‬ ‫ﻀ َﻤﺎﺋُِﺮ‬ ‫‪ – Personal Pronouns‬اَﻟ ﱠ‬ ‫‪17‬‬

‫‪1.2‬‬ ‫اﳉَﺎ ﱠرةُ‬ ‫ف ْ‬ ‫‪ – Prepositions‬اَ ْﳊُْﺮْو ُ‬ ‫‪18‬‬
‫‪1.3‬‬ ‫ف اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺸﺒﱠـ َﻬﺔُ ﺑِﺎﻟْ ِﻔ ْﻌ ِﻞ‬ ‫‪ – Those Particles That Resemble the Verb‬اَ ْﳊُُﺮْو ُ‬ ‫‪20‬‬
‫ﺼﺔُ‬ ‫‪ – Auxiliary (Defective) Verbs‬اَْﻷَﻓْـﻌ ُ ِ‬
‫‪1.4‬‬ ‫ﺎل اﻟﻨﱠﺎﻗ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪22‬‬
‫‪2.1‬‬ ‫ﺿ ِﻤْﻴـٌﺮ ُﻣْﻨـ َﻔﺼ ٌﻞ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ع ُﻣْﻨـ َﻔﺼ ٌﻞ ‪َ (also called‬ﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﱠﺮﻓْ ِﻊ ‪) in‬ﺑَﺎ ِرٌز( َ‬
‫)ﺿ ِﻤﻴـﺮ ﻣﺮﻓُـﻮ ٌ ِ‬
‫َ ٌْ َْ ْ‬ ‫‪31‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﺿﻤْﻴـٌﺮ ُﻣﺘﱠﺼ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪2.2‬‬ ‫ﺿﻤْﻴـٌﺮ َﻣ ْﺮﻓُـ ْﻮعٌ ُﻣﺘﱠﺼ ٌﻞ ‪َ (also called‬ﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﱠﺮﻓْ ِﻊ ‪َ in‬‬ ‫)َ‬ ‫‪32‬‬
‫ﺼ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﱠﺼﻞ ‪ and‬ﺿ ِﻤﻴـﺮ ﻣْﻨـ َﻔ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺐ ‪ِ in‬‬ ‫ﺼِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪2.3‬‬ ‫َ ٌْ ُ‬ ‫ﺿﻤْﻴـٌﺮ ُﻣﺘ ٌ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ب ‪َ (also called‬ﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﻨﱠ ْ‬ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ ٌ‬
‫ﺿﻤْﻴـٌﺮ َﻣﻨْ ُ‬‫َ‬ ‫‪33‬‬
‫ﺼ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﱠﺼﻞ ‪ and‬ﻣْﻨـ َﻔ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫) ِ‬
‫ُ‬ ‫ب ُﻣﺘ ٌ‬ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ ٌ‬ ‫ﺿﻤْﻴـٌﺮ َﻣﻨْ ُ‬‫َ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﺿﻤْﻴـٌﺮ ُﻣﺘﱠﺼ ٌﻞ )ﺑَﺎرٌز(‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫)ﺿ ِﻤﻴـﺮ َْﳎﺮور ﻣﺘ ِ‬
‫‪2.4‬‬ ‫اﳉَﱢﺮ ‪َ in‬‬ ‫ﱠﺼ ٌﻞ ‪َ (also called‬ﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ ْ‬ ‫َ ْ ٌ ٌٌْ ُ‬ ‫‪34‬‬
‫‪2.5‬‬ ‫ﺻ ْﻮﻟَﺔُ ) ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ(‬ ‫اَْﻷَ ْﲰَﺎءُ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻮ ُ‬ ‫‪36‬‬
‫‪2.6‬‬ ‫ﱠﺚ(‬ ‫ﺻ ْﻮﻟَﺔُ ) ُﻣ َﺆﻧ ٌ‬ ‫اَْﻷَ ْﲰَﺎءُ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻮ ُ‬ ‫‪36‬‬
‫‪2.7‬‬ ‫أَ ْﲰَﺎءُ ْاﻹ َﺷ َﺎرةِ ﻟِْﻠ ُﻤ َﺬ ﱠﻛ ِﺮ‬ ‫‪39‬‬
‫ﱠﺚ‬‫أَ ْﲰﺎء ْاﻹ َﺷﺎرةِ ﻟِْﻠﻤﺆﻧ ِ‬
‫‪2.8‬‬ ‫َ َُ‬ ‫َُ‬ ‫‪39‬‬
‫ﺎﺿﻲ ‪Nouns in the Meaning of‬‬ ‫اَﻟْ ِﻔﻌﻞ اﻟْﻤ ِ‬
‫‪2.9‬‬ ‫ُْ َ‬ ‫‪41‬‬
‫‪2.10‬‬ ‫اﳊَﺎﺿ ُﺮ ‪Nouns in the Meaning of‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫اَْﻷ َْﻣُﺮ ْ‬ ‫‪41‬‬
‫ﺎت‬‫َﲰ ِﺎء اﻟْﻤﻌﺮﺑ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪2.11‬‬ ‫اب أَﻗْ َﺴﺎم ْاﻷ َْ ُ ْ ََ‬ ‫إ ْﻋَﺮ ُ‬ ‫‪53‬‬
‫‪3.1‬‬ ‫أ َْوَزا ُن ﲨَْ ِﻊ ﻗِﻠﱠ ٍﺔ‬ ‫‪63‬‬
‫‪3.2‬‬ ‫أ َْوَزا ُن ﲨَْ ِﻊ َﻛﺜْـﺮةٍ‬ ‫‪63‬‬
‫َ‬
‫‪3.3‬‬ ‫اﳉَ ْﻤ ِﻊ‬‫ﺎل ﲨَْ ِﻊ ْ‬ ‫أ َْﻣﺜَ ُ‬ ‫‪64‬‬
‫‪3.4‬‬ ‫اﳉُ ُﻤ ْﻮِع‬‫أ َْوَزا ُن ُﻣﻨْﺘَـ َﻬﻰ ْ‬ ‫‪64‬‬
‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ‬‫ﺎل اﻟْ ِﻔﻌ ِﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟْ َﻔ ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫‪3.5‬‬ ‫ا ْﺳﺘ ْﻌ َﻤ ُ ْ َ ْ َ‬ ‫‪66‬‬
‫‪3.6‬‬ ‫‪َ and Its I‘raab‬ﻻ ‪Different Forms of the Noun of‬‬ ‫‪69‬‬
‫‪3.7‬‬ ‫ُﻣﻨَﺎدٰى ‪Rules Governing the I‘raab of the‬‬ ‫‪72‬‬
‫اب اﻟْ ُﻤ ْﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﲏ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪3.8‬‬ ‫إ ْﻋَﺮ ُ‬ ‫‪85‬‬
‫‪4.1‬‬ ‫ﺎﺻﺒَﺔُ‬ ‫ف اﻟﻨﱠ ِ‬ ‫اَ ْﳊُُﺮْو ُ‬ ‫‪99‬‬
‫‪4.2‬‬ ‫اﳉَﺎ ِزَﻣﺔُ‬ ‫ف ْ‬ ‫اَ ْﳊُُﺮْو ُ‬ ‫‪102‬‬

‫‪vii‬‬
 ‫ﺎل اﻟْ ُﻘﻠُﻮ ِ‬
‫ب‬
‫‪4.3‬‬ ‫أَﻓْـ َﻌ ُ ْ‬ ‫‪105‬‬
‫‪4.4‬‬ ‫اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮ ُل ﺑِِﻪ ‪Verbs Requiring Three‬‬ ‫‪106‬‬
‫‪4.5‬‬ ‫ﺎل اﻟْ ُﻤ َﻘ َﺎرﺑَِﺔ َواﻟﱠﺮ َﺟ ِﺎء َواﻟﺸُﱡﺮْوِع‬
‫أَﻓْـ َﻌ ُ‬ ‫‪107‬‬
‫‪4.6‬‬ ‫اَْﻷَ ْﲰَﺎءُ اﻟﺸ ْﱠﺮ ِﻃﻴﱠﺔُ‬ ‫‪112‬‬
‫أَوزا ُن اِﺳ ِﻢ اﻟﺘﱠـ ْﻔ ِ‬
‫ﻀْﻴ ِﻞ‬
‫‪4.7‬‬ ‫َْ ْ‬ ‫‪118‬‬

‫‪viii‬‬
 ‫ﺑﺴﻢ اﷲ اﻟﺮﲪﻦ اﻟﺮﺣﻴﻢ‬
‫ﳓﻤﺪﻩ و ﻧﺼﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ رﺳﻮﻟﻪ اﻟﻜﺮﱘ‬

Introduction to the Text & Translation

This book is a revised edition of Tasheel al-Nahw, which in turn is a somewhat expanded
translation of the Urdu language primer of Arabic grammar, ‘Ilm   al-Nahw by Mawlana
Mushtaq Ahmad Charthawali. Mawlana Charthawali’s primers for Nahw (Arabic grammar)
and Sarf (Arabic Morphology) are standard textbooks in Western madrasahs. The original
English translation of ‘Ilm   al-Nahw was prepared by scholars from Madrasah Islamiyyah,
Benoni, South Africa. They put in a lot of hardwork and made the English translation much
more beneficial than the Urdu original. May Allah reward them. At least two versions of this
translation are available online. The first one had many errors and typing issues. The newer
version has made some improvements but issues remain, especially with regards to language
and clarity of the English and Arabic texts. We decided to bring out a revised edition of this
translation to address these issues. During the course of our revision and editing, we consulted
various grammar works including al-Nahw al-Wadih, Sharh  ibn  ‘Aqeel, Mu‘jam  al-Qawa‘id  al-
‘Arabiyyah, and A Simplified Arabic Grammar of Mawlana Hasan Dockrat. We have completely
revised some sections, as well as a number of definitions. The organization has been changed in
a way that we feel will make it easier for the student to understand how each section fits in the
overall picture.
This is a beginner-to-intermediate level text; therefore, we have not transliterated Arabic
words exactly, keeping in mind that most people at this stage will not be comfortable with
Arabic transliteration schemes. Rather, we have used approximate equivalents that are easier to
read for the untrained. Nevertheless, non-English words have been italicized.
As for duals and plurals of Arabic words, we have not used the original Arabic duals and
plurals; rather, their plurals have been created the English way by adding an ‘s’ to the singular.
Thus, two dammahs is used instead of dammahtain. The word still remains italicized so as to
reflect its non-English origin.
It should also be noted that the English equivalents of Arabic grammar terms are mere
approximations. In some cases, they convey the exact meaning. In many cases, they do not.
The student is, therefore, urged to focus on the original term in Arabic.
To the best of our ability, we have tried to remove all errors. However, we are merely
human. There are bound to be some mistakes in it. Your comments, constructive criticism,
and suggestions are all welcome. You can contact us with your feedback at the email address
given at the end.

ix
 We hope and pray that this revised translation will be of benefit to the students. We also
pray that Allah, the Exalted, accepts this humble effort from all those who have contributed to
it in any way, especially the typists; and gives us the power to continue with more. We also
request the readers and all those who benefit from it in any way to remember us in their
prayers.
And He alone gives success.
‫ﲔ‬ ِ ْ ‫و ﺻﻠﱠﻰ اﷲ ﺗَـﻌ ٰﺎﱃ ﻋ ٰﻠﻰ ﺧ ِﲑ ﺧ ْﻠ ِﻘ ِﻪ ﺳﻴﱢ ِﺪﻧَﺎ و ﻣﻮَﻻﻧَﺎَ ُﳏ ﱠﻤ ٍﺪ ﱠو ﻋ ٰﻠﻰ اٰﻟِِﻪ و أَﺻﺤﺎﺑِِﻪ أ‬
َ ْ ‫َﲨَﻌ‬ َْ َ َ َ َْ َ َ َ َْ َ َ َ َ

‘Aamir Bashir
Buffalo, NY
9 Sha‘ban, 1432 (8 July, 2011)
E-mail: ainbay97@yahoo.com

x
 ُ ‫ﺻ ِﻄ َﻼ َﺣ‬
ُ‫ﺎت اﻟ َْﻌ َﺮﺑِﻴﱠﺔ‬ ْ ‫اَِْﻻ‬
ARABIC TERMS

Approximate Equivalent English Term /

Arabic Term
Transliteration Description of the meaning
‫اِ ْﺳ ٌﻢ‬ ism Noun

‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬ fi‘l Verb

‫ف‬ٌ ‫َﺣ ْﺮ‬ harf Particle

‫ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ‬ mudhakkar Masculine

‫ﱠﺚ‬
ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺆﻧ‬ mu’annath Feminine

‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ِ‫و‬
َ waahid Singular

ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬ tathniyah Dual

‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ‬ jam‘ Plural

ٌ‫ﺿ ﱠﻤﺔ‬ َ dammah ‫ﹹ‬

ٌ‫ﻓَـْﺘ َﺤﺔ‬ fathah ‫ﹷ‬

ٌ‫َﻛ ْﺴَﺮة‬ kasrah ‫ﹻ‬

ٌ‫َﺣَﺮَﻛﺔ‬ harakah
Short vowels, i.e., dammah ‫ﹹ‬, fathah ‫ﹷ‬, kasrah ‫ﹻ‬
‫ﺎت‬
ٌ ‫ َﺣَﺮَﻛ‬:‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ‬
plural: harakaat

‫ف اﻟْﻌِﻠﱠ ِﺔ‬
ُ ‫ُﺣ ُﺮْو‬ huroof al-‘illah Long vowels i.e., ‫ ا – ي‬- ‫و‬

ٌ ‫إِ ْﻋَﺮ‬
These are the variations at the end of the word, which
‫اب‬ i‘raab
take place in accordance with the governing word.
‫ﺗَـْﻨ ِﻮﻳْ ٌﻦ‬ two fathahs ‫ﹱ‬, two dammahs ‒◌‒ ٍ
tanween ٌ , two kasrahs ‒◌‒
‫ُﺳ ُﻜ ْﻮ ٌن‬ sukoon ‫ﹿ‬
‫َﺳﺎﻛِ ٌﻦ‬ saakin a letter with sukoon

‫ﺗَ ْﺸ ِﺪﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ tashdeed ‫ﹽ‬

‫ﱠد‬
ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺸﺪ‬ mushaddad A letter with tashdeed
ِ َ‫ﻓ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ faa‘il Subject i.e. the doer

xi
 Object i.e. the person or thing upon whom or which
‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل‬ maf‘ool
the work is done.
‫َﻋ ِﺎﻣ ٌﻞ‬
Governing word i.e. that word, which causes i‘raab
‘aamil
change in the word(s) following it.
The governed word i.e. that word in which the i‘raab
‫َﻣ ْﻌ ُﻤ ْﻮٌل‬ ma‘mool
change occurred.

ٌ ‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺮْو‬
The active verb i.e. that verb whose doer is
‫ف‬ fi‘l  ma‘roof
known/mentioned.
‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ َْﳎ ُﻬ ْﻮٌل‬
The passive verb i.e. that verb whose doer is not
fi‘l  majhool
known/mentioned.

‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ َﻻ ِزٌم‬
The intransitive verb i.e. that verb, which can be
fi‘l laazim
understood without a ‫ َﻣ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮٌل‬.

‫اَﻟْ ِﻔ ْﻌ ُﻞ اﻟْ ُﻤﺘَـ َﻌﺪﱢى‬

The transitive verb i.e. that verb, which cannot be
fi‘l muta‘addi
fully understood without a ‫ َﻣ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮٌل‬.
Definite noun. It is generally indicated by an ‫ال‬. For
ٌ‫َﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﻪ‬ ma‘rifah
example, ‫ﺖ‬
ُ ‫ اَﻟْﺒَـْﻴ‬the house (a particular/specific house).
ٌ‫ﻧَ ِﻜَﺮة‬
Common noun. It is generally indicated by a tanween.
nakirah
e.g. ‫ﺖ‬
ٌ ‫ ﺑـَْﻴ‬a house (any house).
It is that word, which is in the state of ‫ َرﻓْ ٌﻊ‬, which is
ٌ‫َﻣ ْﺮﻓُـ ْﻮع‬ marfoo‘
generally represented by a dammah on the last letter.
It is that word, which is in the state of ‫ﺐ‬
ٌ‫ﺼ‬ْ َ‫ﻧ‬, which is
‫ب‬
ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫َﻣْﻨ‬ mansoob
generally represented by a fathah on the last letter.
It is that word, which is in the state of ‫ﺟﱞﺮ‬َ , which is
‫َْﳎ ُﺮْوٌر‬ majroor
generally represented by a kasrah on the last letter.

xii
 CHAPTER 1

Section 1.1
‫ – اَﻟﻨﱠ ْﺤ ُﻮ‬Arabic Grammar
Definition:
Nahw is that science, which teaches us how to join a noun, verb and particle to form a correct
ٌ ‫( إِ ْﻋَﺮ‬condition) of the last letter of a word should be.
sentence, as well as what the ‫اب‬

Subject Matter:
Its subject matter is ٌ‫( َﻛﻠِ َﻤﺔ‬word) and ‫( َﻛ َﻼ ٌم‬sentence).

Objective:
 The immediate objective is to learn how to read, write and speak correct Arabic, and to
َ ‫ َد‬, and ‫ ِﰲ‬are four words. The
avoid making mistakes in this. For example, ‫ َزﻳْﺪ‬, ‫ َدار‬, ‫ﺧ َﻞ‬
science of Nahw teaches us how to put them together to form a correct sentence.
 The mid-term objective is to use our Arabic skills to understand the Qur’an, Hadeeth,
Fiqh and other Islamic sciences, so that we can act upon them.
 The ultimate objective through the above is to gain the pleasure of Allah, the Exalted.

1
Section 1.2
ُ‫ – اَﻟْ َﻜﻠِ َﻤﺔ‬The Word
Any word uttered by humans is called a ‫ﻆ‬
ٌ ‫ﻟَ ْﻔ‬. If it has a meaning, it is called ٌ‫ﺿ ْﻮع‬
ُ ‫( َﻣ ْﻮ‬meaningful);
and if it does not have any meaning, it is called ‫ﻞ‬
ٌ ‫( ُﻣ ْﻬ َﻤ‬meaningless).
In Arabic, ٌ‫ﺿ ْﻮع‬
ُ ‫ﻆ َﻣ ْﻮ‬ ٌ ‫ ُﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬.
ٌ ‫( ﻟَ ْﻔ‬meaningful word) is of two types: ‫ ُﻣ ْﻔَﺮٌد‬and ‫ﺐ‬ َ
1. ‫ – ُﻣ ْﻔَﺮٌد‬Singular: It is that single word, which conveys one meaning. It is also called ٌ‫ َﻛﻠِ َﻤﺔ‬.

ٌ ‫ – ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ‬Compound: It is a group of words. They may form a complete sentence or an

2. ‫ﺐ‬
incomplete one.

Types of ٌ‫َﻛﻠِ َﻤﺔ‬

There are three types of ٌ‫ َﻛﻠِ َﻤﺔ‬:
1. ‫( اِ ْﺳ ٌﻢ‬noun)
2. ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫( ﻓ ْﻌ‬verb)
3. ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫( َﺣ ْﺮ‬particle)
‫ – اِ ْﺳ ٌﻢ‬Noun:
 It is that ٌ‫ َﻛﻠِ َﻤﺔ‬whose meaning can be understood without the need to combine it with
another word.
 It is the name of a person, place or thing.
 It does not have any tense.
e.g. ‫ﻞ‬
ٌ ‫َر ُﺟ‬ man
‫ﺖ‬
ُ ‫ اَﻟْﺒَـْﻴ‬house
Note: A noun can never have a ‫( ﺗَـْﻨ ِﻮﻳْ ٌﻦ‬tanween) and an ‫ ال‬at the same time.

‫ – ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬Verb:
 It is that ٌ‫ َﻛﻠِ َﻤﺔ‬whose meaning can be understood without the need to combine it with
another word.
 It has one of the three tenses: past, present, or future.
 It denotes an action.
e.g. ‫ب‬َ ‫ﺿَﺮ‬ َ He hit.
‫ﺼَﺮ‬
َ َ‫ﻧ‬ He helped.
Note: A ‫ﻞ‬ ِ ِ
ٌ ‫ ﻓ ْﻌ‬can never have a ‫( ﺗَـْﻨﻮﻳْ ٌﻦ‬tanween) or an ‫ال‬.

2
‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ – َﺣ ْﺮ‬Particle:
It is that ٌ‫ َﻛﻠِ َﻤﺔ‬whose meaning cannot be understood without joining a ‫ اِ ْﺳ ٌﻢ‬or a ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ ﻓ ْﻌ‬or both to it.
e.g. ‫( ِﻣ ْﻦ‬from)
‫ﻠﻰ‬
ٰ ‫( َﻋ‬on top)

EXERCISE

1. State with reason whether the following words are ‫ اِ ْﺳ ٌﻢ‬،٬ ‫ﻞ‬ ِ ٌ ‫ﺣﺮ‬.
ٌ ‫ ﻓ ْﻌ‬or ‫ف‬َْ
i. ‫ﺲ‬َ َ‫( َﺟﻠ‬He sat.) iii. ‫ﺖ‬ٌ ‫ﺑِْﻨ‬ (girl)
ii. ‫َو‬ (and) iv. ‫َﻛ َﺴَﺮ‬ (He broke.)

2. Find the meaning and the plural of the following nouns using a dictionary.

‫ﻗَـﻠَ ٌﻢ‬ ‫ﺎب‬ ِ

i. iii. ٌ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬
ii. ‫ﺼ ٌﻞ‬ ْ َ‫ﻓ‬ iv. ٌ‫ُﺳﺒﱡـ ْﻮَرة‬

3
Section 1.3

‫اﻻ ْﺳ ِﻢ‬ِ ‫ – أَﻗْﺴﺎم‬Types of Noun

َُ
‫ اِ ْﺳ ٌﻢ‬is of three types:
1. ‫ﺎﻣ ٌﺪ‬ ِ ‫ – ﺟ‬Primary Noun: It is that ‫ اِﺳﻢ‬which is neither derived from another word nor is any
َ ٌْ
word derived from it.
e.g. ‫س‬
ٌ ‫ﻓَـَﺮ‬ horse ٌ ‫ﺑِْﻨ‬
‫ﺖ‬ girl
2. ‫ﺼ َﺪٌر‬ ِ
ْ ‫ – َﻣ‬Root Noun: It is that ‫ ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ‬from which many words are derived.
e.g. ‫ب‬
ٌ ‫ﺿ ْﺮ‬
َ to hit ‫ﺼٌﺮ‬
ْ َ‫ ﻧ‬to help
3. ‫ﺸﺘَ ﱞﻖ‬ ِ
ْ ‫ – ُﻣ‬Derived Noun: It is that ‫ ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ‬which is derived from a masdar.
e.g. ‫ب‬ٌ ‫ﺿﺎ ِر‬
َ hitter ‫ﺼ ْﻮٌر‬
ُ ‫ َﻣْﻨ‬the helped

‫ﺎم اﻟْ ِﻔ ْﻌ ِﻞ‬

ُ ‫ْﺴ‬
َ ‫ – أَﻗ‬Types of Verb
‫ ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬is of four types:
1. ‫ﺎﺿﻰ‬ ِ ‫ اَﻟْﻤ‬Past tense ‫ب‬
َ e.g. َ ‫ﺿَﺮ‬َ He hit.
2. ُ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬ َ ‫ اَﻟْ ُﻤ‬Present and Future tense e.g. ُ ‫ﻀ ِﺮ‬
‫ب‬ ْ َ‫ﻳ‬ He is hitting or will
hit.
ِ
3. ‫اَْﻷَ ْﻣُﺮ‬ Positive Command/ e.g. ْ ‫ﺿ ِﺮ‬
‫ب‬ ْ‫ا‬ Hit!
Imperative

4. ‫اَﻟﻨﱠـ ْﻬ ُﻰ‬ Negative Command/ e.g. ْ ‫ﻀ ِﺮ‬

‫ب‬ ْ َ‫َﻻ ﺗ‬ Don’t hit!
Prohibitive

ِ ‫ – أَﻗْﺴﺎم اﻟْﺤﺮ‬Types of Particle

‫ف‬ َْ ُ َ
‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬is of two types:
ِ
1. ‫ﻞ‬ ٌ ‫ – َﻋﺎﻣ‬Causative Particle: It is that ‫ف‬ ٌ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬, which causes ‫اب‬ ٌ ‫ إِ ْﻋَﺮ‬change in the word after it.
e.g. ‫ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ِﰲ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺴ ِﺠ ِﺪ‬Zayd is in the mosque.
ِ ‫ – َﻏﻴـﺮ اﻟْﻌ‬Non Causative: It is that ‫ف‬
2. ‫ﺎﻣ ِﻞ‬ َ ُْ ٌ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬, which does not cause ‫اب‬ ٌ ‫ إِ ْﻋَﺮ‬change in the
following word.
e.g. ‫ﰒُﱠ‬ then ‫َو‬ and

4
 EXERCISE
1. Correct the following words (stating a reason) and give its meaning.

i. ‫ﺖ‬ٌ ‫اَﻟْﺒَـْﻴ‬ iii. ‫اَﻟْ َﻮَر ٌق‬

ii. ‫اَﻟْ َﻔﺘَ َﺢ‬ iv. ‫َِﲰ ٌﻊ‬

2. Find the meaning and the plural of the following nouns using a dictionary.

i. ‫ﺑُ ْﺴﺘَﺎ ٌن‬ iii. ‫ﺎب‬

ٌ َ‫ﺑ‬
ii. ‫ﻗَ َﻤٌﺮ‬ iv. ‫ﺐ‬
ٌ ‫َﻛ ْﻠ‬

5
Section 1.4
ُ َ‫ْﺠ َﻤ ُﻞ َو اﻟ ُْﻤ َﺮﱠﻛﺒ‬
‫ﺎت‬ ُ ‫ – اَﻟ‬Sentences and Phrases
ِ ‫ ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬and ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛﺐ ﻏَﻴـﺮ ﻣ ِﻔﻴ ٍﺪ‬.
ٌ ‫ ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ‬is of two types: ‫ﺐ ُﻣﻔْﻴ ٌﺪ‬
‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ ْ ُ ُ ْ ٌ َُ
ِ ِ
 ‫ﺐ ُﻣﻔْﻴ ٌﺪ‬ ٌ ‫ ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ‬is also called ‫ﺐ ﺗَﺎمﱞ‬ ٌ ‫ ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ‬, ٌ‫ ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ُﻣﻔْﻴ َﺪة‬and ‫ َﻛ َﻼ ٌم ﺗَﺎمﱞ‬. This is a complete sentence.
Often, it is just called ‫ َﻛ َﻼ ٌم‬.
 ‫ﺐ َﻏْﻴـ ُﺮ ُﻣ ِﻔْﻴ ٍﺪ‬
ٌ ‫ ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ‬is also called ‫ﺺ‬
ِ ‫ ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬, ٍ‫ ﲨﻠَﺔٌ َﻏﻴـﺮ ﻣ ِﻔﻴﺪة‬and ‫ َﻛ َﻼم ﻧَﺎﻗِﺺ‬. This is a phrase, i.e.,
ٌ ‫ﺐ ﻧَﺎﻗ‬ ٌ َ ُ َ ْ ُ ُ ْ ُْ ٌ ٌ
an incomplete sentence.
From now onwards, when we use sentence, we will be referring to complete sentences; and
when we use phrase, we will be referring to incomplete sentences.

Types of Sentences
There are two types of sentences:
َِ ‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ َﺧ‬: It is that sentence, which has the possibility of being true or false.
A. ٌ‫ﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬
B. ٌ‫ﺸﺎﺋِﻴﱠﺔ‬
َ ْ‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ إِﻧ‬: It is that sentence, which does not have the possibility of being true or false.

Section 1.4.1
‫ْﺠ ْﻤﻠَ ِﺔ اﻟْ َﺨﺒَ ِﺮﻳﱠِﺔ‬
ُ ‫ﺎم اﻟ‬
ُ ‫ْﺴ‬
َ ‫أَﻗ‬

ٌ‫ ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬is of two types:

1. ٌ‫ﺟ ْﻤﻠَﺔٌ اِ ْﺳ ِﻤﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧﺒَ ِﺮﻳﱠﺔ‬
ُ – Nominal Sentence:
 Definition: It is that sentence, which begins with a noun.
 The second part of the sentence can be a noun or a verb.
 The first part of the sentence is called ٌ‫( ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬subject) or ‫ﺴﻨَ ٌﺪ إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬
ْ ‫( ُﻣ‬the word about which
information is being given).
 The second part of the sentence is called ‫ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬ َ (predicate) or ‫( ُﻣ ْﺴﻨَ ٌﺪ‬the word giving the
information).
The ٌ‫ ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬is generally ٌ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬and the ‫ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬ ِ
 َ generally ٌ‫ﻧَﻜَﺮة‬.
 Both parts (ٌ‫ ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬and ‫ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬
َ ) are ٌ‫ َﻣ ْﺮﻓُـ ْﻮع‬.

Sentence Analysis

ٌ ‫ﻧَ ِﻈ ْﻴ‬
‫ﻒ‬ ‫ﺖ‬
ُ ‫ اَﻟﺒَـ ْﻴ‬The house is clean.
ٌ‫ َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ = ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ اِ ِْﲰﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬+ ٌ‫ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬

6
Note: A sentence may have more than one ‫ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬
َ.
Sentence Analysis

‫ﻗَ ِﻮ ﱞ‬
‫ي‬ ‫ﻃَ ِﻮﻳْ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ اَﻟ ﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ‬The man is tall and strong.
ٌ‫ = ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ اِ ِْﲰﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬2 ‫ َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬+ 1 ‫ َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬+ ٌ‫ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬

2. ٌ‫ﺟ ْﻤﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧﺒَ ِﺮﻳﱠﺔ‬

ُ – Verbal Sentence:
 Definition: It is that sentence, which begins with a verb.
 The first part of the sentence is called ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ ﻓ ْﻌ‬or ‫ ُﻣ ْﺴﻨَ ٌﺪ‬.
 The second part of the sentence is called ‫ﻞ‬ ِ ِِ
ٌ ‫ ﻓَﺎﻋ‬or ‫ ُﻣ ْﺴﻨَ ٌﺪ إﻟَْﻴﻪ‬and is always ٌ‫ َﻣ ْﺮﻓُـ ْﻮع‬.
Sentence Analysis

‫َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ ‫ﺲ‬

َ َ‫ َﺟﻠ‬Zayd sat.
ٌ‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ = ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬
ِ َ‫ﻓ‬ + ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ﻓ ْﻌ‬

‫ اَﻟْ ِﻔ ْﻌﻞ ﱠ‬i.e. it is a verb whose meaning can be

Note: In the above example, the verb is ‫اﻟﻼ ِزُم‬ ُ
understood without a ‫ َﻣ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮٌل‬.

Note: If the verb is ‫ﻞ اﻟْ ُﻤﺘَـ َﻌ ﱢﺪى‬ ِ

ُ ‫ اَﻟْﻔ ْﻌ‬i.e. a verb whose meaning cannot be fully understood without
a ‫ َﻣ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮٌل‬, then a ‫ َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل‬will be added and will be ‫ب‬ ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫ َﻣْﻨ‬.
Sentence Analysis

َ‫ﺴ َﻤﺎء‬
‫اﻟ ﱠ‬ ُ‫اﷲ‬ ‫َﺧﻠَ َﻖ‬ Allah created the sky.
ٌ‫ َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل = ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬+ ‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬
ِ َ‫ﻓ‬ + ‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬

EXERCISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab, and analyze the following sentences.

i. ‫اﳌﻌﻠﻢ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ‬ ii. ‫اﻟﺒﺴﺘﺎن ﲨﻴﻞ‬ iii. ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﳏﻤﺪ اﻟﺒﺎب‬

iv. ‫اﳌﺪرﺳﺔ ﻛﺒﲑة ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ‬ v. ‫وﻗﻒ اﻟﺮﺟﻞ‬ vi. ‫اﻟﺮﺟﻞ وﻗﻒ‬

2. What is the difference between (v) and (vi) above?

7
Section 1.4.2
ٌ‫ﺸﺎﺋِﻴﱠﺔ‬
َ ْ‫ ُﺟ ْﻤﻠَﺔٌ إِﻧ‬is of ten types:
ِ
1. ‫اَْﻷَ ْﻣُﺮ‬ Positive Command e.g.
ْ ‫ﺿ ِﺮ‬
‫ب‬ ْ‫ا‬ Hit!

‫اَﻟﻨﱠـ ْﻬ ُﻰ‬ e.g. ‫ﻀ ِﺮب‬

2. Negative Command
ْ ْ َ‫َﻻ ﺗ‬ Don’t Hit!

3. ‫اَِْﻻ ْﺳﺘِ ْﻔ َﻬ ُﺎم‬ Interrogative e.g. ‫ب َزﻳْ ٌﺪ؟‬

َ ‫ﺿَﺮ‬
َ ‫َﻫ ْﻞ‬ Did Zayd hit?

4. ‫اَﻟﺘﱠ ّﻤ ﱢﲎ‬ Desire e.g. !‫ﻟَﻴﺖ اﻟﺸﱠﺒﺎب ﻋﺎﺋِ ٌﺪ‬ I wish youth would
َ َ َ َْ
return.
Note: ‫ﺖ‬
َ ‫ ﻟَْﻴ‬is generally used for something unattainable.
5. ‫اَﻟﺘﱠـَﺮ ﱢﺟﻰ‬ Hope e.g. ‫اﻻ ْﻣﺘِ َﺤﺎ َن َﺳ ْﻬ ٌﻞ‬
ِْ ‫ﻟَﻌ ﱠﻞ‬
َ
Hopefully, the
examination will be easy.
Note: ‫ﻞ‬
‫ ﻟَ َﻌ ﱠ‬is generally used for something attainable.
6. ُ‫اَﻟﻨﱢ َﺪاء‬ Exclamation e.g. !ُ‫ﻳَﺎ اﷲ‬ O Allah!
e.g. !‫ﻚ ِدﻳـﻨَﺎرا‬ ِ ِ
‫ض‬
ُ ‫اَﻟْ َﻌ ْﺮ‬ ً ْ َ َ‫أََﻻ ﺗَﺎْﺗْﻴ ِ ْﲏ ﻓَﺎُ ْﻋﻄﻴ‬
7. Request/Offer Will you not come to me
so that I may give you a
Note: ‫ض‬
ُ ‫ اَﻟْ َﻌ ْﺮ‬is a mere request; no answer is anticipated. dinar?
8. ‫اَﻟْ َﻘ َﺴ ُﻢ‬ Oath e.g. !ِ‫َواﷲ‬ By Allah!

9. ‫ﺐ‬ُ ‫اَﻟﺘﱠـ َﻌ ﱡﺠ‬

Amazement e.g. !‫َﻣﺎ أَ ْﺣ َﺴ َﻦ َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬ How good Zayd is!
ِ
10. ‫اَﻟْﻌ ُﻘﻮد‬
ُْ ُ Transaction e.g. The seller says ‫ﺎب‬ ُ ‫ – ﺑِ ْﻌ‬I sold this book.
َ َ‫ﺖ ٰﻫ َﺬا اﻟْﻜﺘ‬
and the buyer says ُ‫ – اِ ْﺷﺘَـَﺮﻳْـﺘُﻪ‬I bought it.
َِ ‫ َﺧ‬. However, in Islamic law, contracts require the
Note: The sentences for ‫ اَﻟْ ُﻌ ُﻘ ْﻮ ُد‬appear to be ٌ‫ﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬

use of past tense verbal sentences to convey the meaning of ٌ‫ﺸﺎﺋِﻴﱠﺔ‬

َ ْ‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ إِﻧ‬. Hence, these will be
classified as ٌ‫ﺸﺎﺋِﻴﱠﺔ‬
َ ْ‫إِﻧ‬.
Sentence Analysis:

‫َزﻳْ ٌﺪ؟‬ ‫ب‬

َ ‫ﺿ َﺮ‬َ ‫َﻫ ْﻞ‬ Did Zayd hit?
ٌ‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ = ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ إِﻧْ َﺸﺎﺋِﻴﱠﺔ‬
ِ َ‫ﻓ‬ + ‫ﻞ‬ ِ ِ ِ ِ ُ ‫ﺣﺮ‬
ٌ ‫ ﻓ ْﻌ‬+ ‫ف ْاﻻ ْﺳﺘ ْﻔ َﻬﺎم‬َْ

EXERCISE
1. State what type of ٌ‫ﺸﺎﺋِﻴﱠﺔ‬
َ ْ‫ ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ إِﻧ‬are the following sentences.
ِ ‫ﻳﺎ اِﺑـﺮ‬
i. ‫اﻫْﻴ ُﻢ‬ iii. ‫ﻚ؟‬
َْ َ َ ُ‫ﻒ َﺣﺎﻟ‬ َ ‫َﻛْﻴ‬
ii. ‫اﲰَ ْﻊ‬ِ iv. ‫ﺧ ْﻞ‬
ُ ‫َﻻ ﺗَ ْﺪ‬

8
Section 1.4.3
ِ ِ‫ﺐ اﻟﻨﱠﺎﻗ‬
‫ﺺ‬ ِ ‫ﺎم اﻟْ ُﻤﺮﱠﻛ‬
َ ُ ‫ْﺴ‬ َ ‫ أَﻗ‬- Types of Phrases

Phrases are of five types:

‫ﺻ ْﻴ ِﻔ ﱞ‬
1. ‫ﻰ‬ ِ ‫ – ﻣﺮﱠﻛﺐ ﺗَـﻮ‬Descriptive Phrase: It is a phrase in which one word describes the other.
ْ ٌ َُ
 The describing word is called ٌ‫ﺻ َﻔﺔ‬ ِ.
 The object being described is called ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫ َﻣ ْﻮ‬.
 The ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬ ِ
ُ ‫ َﻣ ْﻮ‬and ٌ‫ ﺻ َﻔﺔ‬must correspond in four things:
1. I‘raab.
2. Gender i.e. being masculine or feminine.
3. Number i.e. being singular, dual or plural.
4. Being ma‘rifah or nakirah.

For example,

‫ﺼﺎﻟِ ُﺤ ْﻮ َن‬‫اﻟ ﱠ‬ ‫ﺎل‬

ُ ‫اَﻟ ﱢﺮ َﺟ‬ the righteous men
ٌ‫ِﺻ َﻔﺔ‬ ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫َﻣ ْﻮ‬

ِ ‫ﺻﺎﻟِﺤ‬
‫ﺎن‬ ‫َر ُﺟ َﻼ ِن‬
َ َ two righteous men
ٌ‫ِﺻ َﻔﺔ‬ ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫َﻣ ْﻮ‬

ُ‫اﻟ َْﻌﺎﻗِﻠَﺔ‬ ُ ‫اَﻟْﺒِْﻨ‬

‫ﺖ‬ the intelligent/wise girl
ٌ‫ِﺻ َﻔﺔ‬ ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫َﻣ ْﻮ‬

2. ‫ﺿﺎﻓِ ﱞﻰ‬
َ ِ‫ﺐ إ‬
ٌ ‫ – ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬Possessive Phrase: It is a phrase in which the first word (‫ﺎف‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ ) ُﻣ‬is attributed
to the second one (‫ﺎف إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬
َ ‫) ُﻣ‬. In some cases, this means that the second word owns or
possesses the first.
 The ‫ﺎف‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ ُﻣ‬never gets an ‫ ال‬or a ‫ﺗَـْﻨ ِﻮﻳْ ٌﻦ‬.
 The ‫ﺎف إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ ُﻣ‬is always ‫ َْﳎُﺮْوٌر‬.
The i‘raab of the ‫ﺎف‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ ِ
 َ ‫ ُﻣ‬will be according to the ‫ َﻋﺎﻣ ٌﻞ‬governing it. For example,
‫َزﻳْ ٍﺪ‬ ‫ﺎب‬ ِ
ُ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬ Zayd’s book
‫ﺎف إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ُﻣ‬ ‫ﺎف‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ُﻣ‬

9
Notes:
ِ ٌ ‫ ﻣﻀ‬are found in one single phrase. For example,
1. Sometimes many ‫ﺎف‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ ُﻣ‬/‫ﺎف إِﻟَْﻴﻪ‬ َُ
‫اﻟ ﱠﺮ ُﺟ ِﻞ‬ ‫ﺖ‬ِ ‫ﺑـ ْﻴ‬ ‫ﺎب‬
َ ُ َ‫ﺑ‬ the door of the man’s house
‫ﺎف إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ﺎف ُﻣ‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ ِ ٌ ‫ﻣﻀ‬
َ ‫ﺎف إِﻟَْﻴﻪ و ُﻣ‬ َُ ‫ﺎف‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ُﻣ‬
ِ of the ‫ﺎف‬ ِ ٌ ‫ ﻣﻀ‬with an ‫ال‬
2. If a ٌ‫ﺻ َﻔﺔ‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ ُﻣ‬is brought, it should come immediately after the ‫ﺎف إِﻟَْﻴﻪ‬ َُ
and should have the same i‘raab as that of the ‫ﺎف‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬
َ ‫ ُﻣ‬. For example,
‫ْﺠ ِﺪﻳْ ُﺪ‬
َ ‫اﻟ‬ ‫ﺖ‬ِ ‫اﻟْﺒـ ْﻴ‬
َ ‫ﺎب‬
ُ َ‫ﺑ‬ the new door of the house
‫ﺎف‬ِ ‫ِﺻ َﻔﺔ اﻟْﻤﻀ‬ ‫ﺎف إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬
َ ُ َ ‫ُﻣ‬ ‫ﺎف‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ُﻣ‬
ِ of the ‫ﺎف إِﻟَﻴ ِﻪ‬ ِ ٌ ‫)ﻣﻀ‬, and it
3. If a ٌ‫ﺻ َﻔﺔ‬ ْ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ ُﻣ‬is brought, it should come immediately after it (‫ﺎف إِﻟَْﻴﻪ‬ َُ
should correspond to it (‫ﺎف إﻟَْﻴﻪ‬ ِ ِ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ ) ُﻣ‬i.e. in the four aspects mentioned earlier. For example,
‫ْﺠ ِﺪﻳْ ِﺪ‬
َ ‫اﻟ‬ ‫ﺖ‬ِ ‫اﻟْﺒـ ْﻴ‬
َ ‫ﺎب‬
ُ َ‫ﺑ‬
The door of the new house.

ٌ‫ِﺻ َﻔﺔ‬ ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬ ُ ‫َﻣ ْﻮ‬

‫ﺎف إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬

ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ُﻣ‬ ‫ﺎف‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ُﻣ‬
‫ﺐ إِ َﺷﺎ ِر ﱞ‬
3. ‫ى‬ ٌ ‫ – ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬Demonstrative Phrase: It is a phrase in which one noun (ِ‫ﺎرة‬ ِْ ‫ )اِ ْﺳﻢ‬points
َ ‫اﻹ َﺷ‬ ُ
towards another noun (‫ﺎر إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬ ٌ ‫) ُﻣ َﺸ‬.
 The ‫ﺎر إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬
ٌ ‫ ُﻣ َﺸ‬must have an ‫ال‬.
e.g. ‫اﻟ ﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ‬ ‫ٰﻫ َﺬا‬ This man
‫ُﻣ َﺸ ٌﺎر إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬ ِ‫اﻹ َﺷﺎرة‬ ِ
َ ِْ ‫ا ْﺳ ُﻢ‬
Note: If the ‫ﺎر إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬
ٌ ‫ ُﻣ َﺸ‬does not have an ‫ال‬, it would be a complete sentence.
e.g. ‫َر ُﺟ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ٰﻫ َﺬا‬ This is a man.
ٌ‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ اِ ِْﲰﻴﱠﺔ‬ ‫َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬ + ٌ‫ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬

‫ َﻋ َﺪ ِد ﱞ‬/‫ﺐ ﺑِﻨَﺎﺋِ ﱞﻲ‬

4. ‫ى‬ ٌ ‫ – ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬Numerical Phrase: It is a phrase in which two numerals are joined to
form a single word (number).
 A‫ف‬ٌ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬originally linked the two.
 This phrase is found only in numbers 11-19.
 Both parts of this phrase will be ‫ح‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ َﻣ ْﻔﺘُـ ْﻮ‬except the number 12 (‫)اﺛْـﻨَﺎ َﻋ َﺸَﺮ‬.
e.g. ‫( أَ َﺣ َﺪ َﻋ َﺸَﺮ‬eleven)
It was originally ‫ﺸٌﺮ‬ َ ‫أَ َﺣ ٌﺪ َو َﻋ‬.

10
 Note: The first part of the number ‫ﺸَﺮ‬ ِ ِ
َ ‫ اﺛْـﻨَﺎ َﻋ‬will be given a ‫ ي‬in place of the ‫ )اﺛْـ َﲏ َﻋ َﺸَﺮ( ا‬in ْ
ِ‫ﺼ‬
‫ﺐ‬ ْ ‫ َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﻨﱠ‬and ‫اﳉَﱢﺮ‬ ْ ُ‫ َﺣﺎﻟَﺔ‬.
e.g. ‫ﺖ اِﺛْـ َ ْﲏ َﻋ َﺸَﺮ َر ُﺟ ًﻼ‬
ُ ْ‫َرأَﻳ‬ ِ‫ﺼ‬
(‫ﺐ‬ ْ ‫) َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﻨﱠ‬ ‫ت ﺑِﺎِﺛْـ َ ْﲎ َﻋ َﺸَﺮ َر ُﺟ ًﻼ‬
ُ ‫َﻣَﺮْر‬ (‫اﳉَﱢﺮ‬
ْ ُ‫) َﺣﺎﻟَﺔ‬
I saw twelve men. I passed by twelve men.

ِ ‫ﺼﺮ‬
5. ‫ف‬ ٌ ‫ – ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬Indeclinable Phrase: It is a phrase in which two words are joined to form
ْ ‫ﺐ َﻣ ْﻨ ُﻊ اﻟ ﱠ‬
a single word.
 The first part of this phrase is always ‫ح‬ ٌ ‫ َﻣ ْﻔﺘُـ ْﻮ‬.
 The second part changes according to the ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ َﻋﺎﻣ‬.
e.g. ‫ت‬ُ ‫ﻀَﺮ َﻣ ْﻮ‬
َ ‫َﺣ‬ (‫ت‬
ٌ ‫ َﻣ ْﻮ‬+ ‫ﻀَﺮ‬
َ ‫) َﺣ‬ A region in Yemen.
‫ﻀَﺮ‬
َ ‫ َﺣ‬is a verb, which means “he/it became present” and ‫ت‬
ٌ ‫ َﻣ ْﻮ‬is a noun, which
means “death.”

‫ﻚ‬‫ﺑـَ ْﻌﻠَﺒَ ﱡ‬ (‫ﻚ‬‫ ﺑَ ﱠ‬+ ‫)ﺑـَ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬ A city in Lebanon.

‫ ﺑـَ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬was the name of an idol and ‫ﻚ‬‫ ﺑَ ﱠ‬was the name of a king.

Note: The above mentioned various types of phrases/incomplete sentences form part of a
complete sentence.

Example 1 ‫ْاﻻَِﻣ ْﻴ ُﻦ‬ ِ ‫اﻟﺘ‬

‫ﱠﺎﺟ ُﺮ‬ ‫َرﺑِ َﺢ‬ The trustworthy/honest trader
gained profit.
ٌ‫ِﺻ َﻔﺔ‬ + ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫َﻣ ْﻮ‬

ٌ‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ ِْﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬ ِ َ‫ﻓ‬

‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ + ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ﻓ ْﻌ‬

Example 2 ٌ‫َﻣ ْﺮﻓُـ ْﻮع‬ ِ َ‫ﻓ‬

‫ﺎﻋ ٍﻞ‬ ‫ُﻛ ﱡﻞ‬ Every faa‘il is marfoo‘

‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮ ٍل‬

and every maf‘ool is
‫ب‬
ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫َﻣ ْﻨ‬ ‫ُﻛ ﱡﻞ‬ ‫َو‬
mansoob.
‫ﺎف إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ ُﻣ‬+ ‫ﺎف‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ُﻣ‬

ٌ‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ اِ ِْﲰﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ ِْﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬ ‫َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬ + ٌ‫ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬

11
 ‫ﺎب‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اﻟْﻜﺘَ َ‬ ‫ٰﻫ َﺬا‬ ‫ﺖ‬
‫ا ْﺷﺘَـ َﺮﻳْ ُ‬
‫‪Example 3‬‬ ‫‪I bought this book.‬‬
‫اِ ْﺳﻢ ِْ‬
‫اﻹ َﺷ َﺎرةِ ‪ُ +‬ﻣ َﺸ ٌﺎر إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬ ‫ُ‬

‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ ِْﱪﻳﱠﺔٌ‬ ‫ﻮل‬

‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ٌ‬ ‫ﻞ َﻣ َﻊ ﻓَﺎﻋِﻠِ ِﻪ ‪+‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﻓ ْﻌ ٌ‬

‫‪Example 4‬‬ ‫ﺸ َﺮ َر ُﺟ ًﻼ‬

‫أَ ْرﺑَ َﻊ َﻋ َ‬ ‫ﺎء‬
‫‪َ Fourteen men came.‬ﺟ َ‬
‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ ِْﱪﻳﱠﺔٌ‬ ‫ﻓَ ِ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﻞ ‪+‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﻓ ْﻌ ٌ‬

‫‪Example 5‬‬ ‫ﺑَـ ْﻌﻠَﺒَ ﱡ‬

‫ﻚ‬ ‫‪ٰ This is Ba‘labakk.‬ﻫ ِﺬﻩِ‬
‫ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأٌ ‪َ +‬ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ = ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ اِ ِْﲰﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ ِْﱪﻳﱠﺔٌ‬

‫‪EXERCISE‬‬
‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyze the following phrases.‬‬

‫‪i.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺎرة اﻟﺮﺟﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻮردة اﳉﻤﻴﻠﺔ‬

‫‪v.‬‬
‫أرﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ ‪ii.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻢ رﺧﻴﺺ ‪vi.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎب ﻓﺼﻞ اﳌﺪرﺳﺔ ‪iii.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻳﻜﺮب ‪vii.‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻢ اﻟﺮﺟﻞ اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ‪iv.‬‬ ‫ذﻟﻚ اﻟﻜﺘﺎب ‪viii.‬‬

‫‪2.‬‬ ‫?‪What is the difference between the following sentences‬‬

‫‪i.‬‬ ‫ﻏُ َﻼ ٌم َﻋﺎﻗِ ٌﻞ‬ ‫‪and‬‬ ‫ﻏُ َﻼ ُم َﻋﺎﻗِ ٍﻞ‬

‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻔﺎﺣﺔ ‪ii.‬‬ ‫‪and‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة اﻟﻜﺒﲑةُ ‪iii.‬‬ ‫‪and‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة اﻟﻜﺒﲑةِ‬
‫اﻟﺜﻮب ﻧﻈﻴﻒ ‪iv.‬‬ ‫‪and‬‬ ‫اﻟﺜﻮب اﻟﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬

‫‪3.‬‬ ‫‪Correct the following and state the reason(s).‬‬

‫اﻟﻘﺒﻴﺢ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪i.‬‬ ‫َوﻟَ ٌﺪ ٌ‬ ‫اﳌﺪرﺳﺔ ‪iii.‬‬ ‫اﳌﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ُ‬
‫اﻟﺮﺟﻼن اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ‪ii.‬‬ ‫ﺸ ِﺮ ‪iv.‬‬
‫ﲦﺎﻧﻴﺔُ َﻋ َ‬
‫‪4.‬‬ ‫‪Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyze the following.‬‬
‫‪i.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎب ﻓﻀﻞ ﻗﻴﺎم ﻟﻴﻠﺔ اﻟﻘﺪر‬

‫‪12‬‬
Section 1.4.4
Additional Notes About ٌ‫ﺟ ْﻤﻠَﺔٌ اِ ْﺳ ِﻤﻴﱠﺔ‬
ُ
1. Sometimes, the ‫ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬
َ is not mentioned, in which case it will be regarded as hidden (‫ﱠر‬
ٌ‫) ُﻣ َﻘﺪ‬.
1

e.g. ‫اَِْﻹ َﻣ ُﺎم ِﰲ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺴ ِﺠ ِﺪ‬ The Imam is in the mosque.

‫اﻟ َْﻤ ْﺴ ِﺠ ِﺪ‬ ‫ﻓِﻲ‬ ِ ‫]ﺣ‬

[‫ﺎﺿ ٌﺮ‬ َ ُ ‫اَِْﻹ َﻣ‬
‫ﺎم‬
‫َْﳎُﺮْوٌر‬ + ‫ف َﺟﱟﺮ‬ُ ‫َﺣ ْﺮ‬

ٌ‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ اِ ِْﲰﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ ِْﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬ ‫ُﻣﺘَـ َﻌﻠﱢ ٌﻖ ﺑِﺎ ْﳋَِْﱪ‬ + ‫َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ ُﻣ َﻘ ﱠﺪٌر‬ + ٌ‫ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬

2. The ‫ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬
َ can be a complete sentence.
ِ
Example 1: ٌ‫َزﻳْ ٌﺪ أَﺑـُ ْﻮﻩُ َﻋﺎﱂ‬ Zayd’s father is knowledgable.

‫َﻋﺎﻟِ ٌﻢ‬ ُ‫أَﺑُـ ْﻮﻩ‬ ‫َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬

‫ﺎف إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ ُﻣ‬+ ‫ﺎف‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬
َ ‫ُﻣ‬

ٌ‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ اِ ِْﲰﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ ِْﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬ = ‫َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬ + ٌ‫ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬

ٌ‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ اِ ِْﲰﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ ِْﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬ = ‫َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬ + ٌ‫ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬

Example 2: ‫ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ أَ َﻛ َﻞ اﻟﻄﱠ َﻌ َﺎم‬Zayd ate the food.

َ ‫اﻟﻄﱠ َﻌ‬
‫ﺎم‬ ‫أَ َﻛ َﻞ‬ ‫َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬
ٌ‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ ِْﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬ = ‫ َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل‬+ ‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ َﻣ َﻊ ﻓَﺎﻋِﻠِ ِﻪ‬

ٌ‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ اِ ِْﲰﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ ِْﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬ = ‫َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬ + ٌ‫ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬

EXERCISE

1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab, and analyze the following sentences.

i. ‫اﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﰱ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬ ii. ‫اﻟﺜﻮر ﳛﺮث اﻻرض‬

1
However, generally, to simplify matters, the ‫ ُﻣﺘَـ َﻌﻠﱢ ٌﻖ‬is taken to be ‫ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬
َ . See Hasan Dockrat, A
Simplified Arabic Grammar, (Azaadvillle: Madrasa Arabia Islamia, 2003 ), 37.

13
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫ﻆ‬
‫ﻟَْﻔ ٌ‬

‫ع‬
‫ﺿ ْﻮ ٌ‬
‫َﻣ ْﻮ ُ‬ ‫ُﻣ ْﻬ َﻤ ٌﻞ‬

‫ُﻣ ْﻔَﺮٌد‬ ‫ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ ٌ‬

‫ﺐ‬

‫اِ ْﺳ ٌﻢ‬ ‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ف‬

‫َﺣْﺮ ٌ‬ ‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ُﻣ ِﻔْﻴ َﺪةٌ‬ ‫ﲨﻠَﺔٌ َﻏﻴـﺮ ﻣ ِﻔﻴ َﺪةٍ‬
‫ُْ ْ ُ ُ ْ‬

‫َﺟ ِﺎﻣ ٌﺪ‬ ‫َﻣ ٍ‬

‫ﺎض‬ ‫َﻋ ِﺎﻣ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﺐ ﺗَـ ْﻮ ِﺻْﻴ ِﻔ ﱞﻲ‬
‫ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ ٌ‬

‫ﺼ َﺪ ٌر‬
‫َﻣ ْ‬ ‫ﻀﺎ ِرعٌ‬
‫ُﻣ َ‬ ‫َﻏْﻴـُﺮ اﻟْ َﻌ ِﺎﻣ ِﻞ‬ ‫ﺐ إِ َ‬
‫ﺿ ِﺎﰲﱞ‬ ‫ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ ٌ‬

‫ُﻣ ْﺸﺘَ ﱞﻖ‬ ‫أ َْﻣٌﺮ‬ ‫ﺐ إِ َﺷﺎ ِر ﱞ‬

‫ي‬ ‫ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ ٌ‬
‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ إِﻧْ َﺸﺎﺋِﻴﱠﺔٌ‬ ‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔٌ‬
‫ﻧَـ ْﻬ ٌﻲ‬ ‫ﺐ ﺑِﻨَﺎﺋِ ﱞﻲ‬
‫ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ ٌ‬

‫ﺼﺮ ِ‬
‫ف‬ ‫ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ ٌ‬
‫ﺐ َﻣْﻨ ُﻊ اﻟ ﱠ ْ‬

‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ‬ ‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ اِ ِْﲰﻴﱠﺔٌ‬

‫ﺐ‬
‫ﺗَـ َﻌ ﱡﺠ ٌ‬ ‫ض‬
‫َﻋْﺮ ٌ‬ ‫ﺗَـَﺮ ﱢﺟﻰ‬ ‫اِ ْﺳﺘِ ْﻔ َﻬ ٌﺎم‬ ‫أ َْﻣٌﺮ‬
‫ُﻋ ُﻘ ْﻮٌد‬ ‫ﻗَ َﺴ ٌﻢ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﻧ َﺪاءٌ‬ ‫ﲤََﱢﲎ‬ ‫ﻧـَ ْﻬ ٌﻲ‬

‫‪14‬‬
Section 1.5
ِْ ‫ﺎت‬
‫اﻻ ْﺳ ِﻢ‬ ُ ‫ – َﻋ َﻼ َﻣ‬Signs of a Noun:
1. It is preceded by an ‫ال‬. e.g. ‫اَﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ‬ the man
2. It is preceded by a ‫ﺟﱟﺮ‬
َ ‫ف‬
ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬. e.g. ‫ﺑِﺎﻟْ َﻘﻠَ ِﻢ‬ with the pen
3. There is tanween on the last letter. e.g. ‫َر ُﺟ ٌﻞ‬ a man
4. It ends with a round ‫ة‬. e.g. ٌ‫َﻛﻠِ َﻤﺔ‬ a word
5. It is a dual (ٌ‫)ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬.2 e.g. ‫َر ُﺟ َﻼ ِن‬ two men
6. It is a plural (‫)ﲨَْ ٌﻊ‬. e.g. ٌ ‫ِر َﺟ‬
‫ﺎل‬ men
7. It is a ‫ﺴﻨَ ٌﺪ إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬ ِ
ْ ‫ ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأٌ( ُﻣ‬or ‫)ﻓَﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ e.g. ‫ى‬ ‫اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ ﻗَ ِﻮ ﱞ‬ The man is strong.
e.g. ‫ﺲ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ َ َ‫َﺟﻠ‬ Zayd sat.
8. It is ‫ﺎف‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ ُﻣ‬. e.g. ‫ﺎب ِزﻳْ ٍﺪ‬ ُ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬
ِ book of Zayd
9. It is ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫ َﻣ ْﻮ‬. e.g. ‫َر ُﺟ ٌﻞ ﻃَ ِﻮﻳْ ٌﻞ‬ tall man
10. It is ‫ ُﻣﻨَﺎ ٰدى‬. e.g. ‫ﻳَﺎ َر ُﺟ ُﻞ‬ O man!
11. It is ‫ﺼﻐٌﱠﺮ‬
َ ‫ ُﻣ‬. e.g. ‫ُر َﺟْﻴ ٌﻞ‬ a little man
12. It is ‫ب‬
ٌ ‫ َﻣْﻨ ُﺴ ْﻮ‬. e.g. ‫َﻣ ﱢﻜ ﱞﻰ‬ a Makkan

‫ﺎت اﻟْ ِﻔ ْﻌ ِﻞ‬

ُ ‫ – َﻋ َﻼ َﻣ‬Signs of a Verb:
1. It is preceded by ‫ﻗَ ْﺪ‬. e.g. ‫ﻗَ ْﺪ َﺧَﺮ َج‬ He has gone out.
2. It is preceded by ‫س‬
َ. e.g. ‫ج‬ُ ‫َﺳﻴَ ْﺨُﺮ‬ He will soon go out.
3. It is preceded by ‫ف‬
َ ‫ َﺳ ْﻮ‬. e.g. ‫ج‬ُ ‫ف َﳜُْﺮ‬ َ ‫َﺳ ْﻮ‬ He will go out after a while.
4. It is preceded by ‫ﺟ ْﺰٍم‬َ ‫ف‬ ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬. e.g. ‫َﱂْ َﳜُْﺮ ْج‬ He did not go out.
5. It is preceded by ‫ﺐ‬ ٍ‫ﺼ‬ ْ َ‫ف ﻧ‬
ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬. e.g. ‫ﻟَ ْﻦ َﳜُْﺮ َج‬ He will never go out.
6. It has a hidden ‫ﺿ ِﻤْﻴـٌﺮ‬
َ. e.g. ‫َﺧَﺮ َج‬ He went out.
7. It is an imperative (‫)أ ْﻣٌﺮ‬. e.g. ‫اُ ْﺧُﺮ ْج‬ Go out.
8. It is a prohibitive (‫)ﻧـَ ْﻬﻰ‬. e.g. ‫َﻻ َﲣُْﺮ ْج‬ Do not go out.
ٌ
ِ ‫ – ﻋ َﻼﻣﺔُ اﻟْﺤﺮ‬Sign of a Particle:
‫ف‬ َْ َ َ
That word which has no sign of a noun or verb is a particle (a particle has no sign of its own).

Verbs are said to be dual and plural with respect to their doers (‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫)ﻓَﺎﻋ‬. The action is one. Thus, duality
2

and plurality are signs of a noun and not a verb.

15
Section 1.5.1
General Notes

1. The indefiniteness of a noun (‫ )اِ ْﺳ ٌﻢ‬is indicated by a tanween. Such a noun is called ٌ‫ﻜَﺮة‬
ِ َ‫ﻧ‬.
e.g. ‫ﺖ‬
ٌ ‫ﺑـَْﻴ‬ a house (any house)
2. The definiteness of a noun is indicated by an ‫ال‬. Such a noun is called ٌ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬.
e.g. ‫ﺖ‬
ُ ‫اَﻟْﺒَـْﻴ‬ the house (a specific house)
3. A noun can never have a tanween and an ‫ ال‬at the same time.
e.g. ‫ﺖ‬
ٌ ‫ اَﻟْﺒَـْﻴ‬is incorrect.
4. When the last letter of a word and the first letter of the following word have sukoon (‫)ﹿ‬, it
ِ ْ ‫ﺎع اﻟ ﱠﺴﺎﻛِﻨَـ‬
is called ‫ﲔ‬ ِ ِ
ُ ‫( ا ْﺟﺘ َﻤ‬the meeting of two sukoons). In this case, the first sukoon will be
changed to a kasrah.
ِ . The ‫ َﳘْﺰةُ اﻟْﻮﺻ ِﻞ‬before the ‫ ل‬will not be
e.g. ‫ﺖ‬ ُ ْ‫ﺖ اﻟْﺒِﻨ‬ْ َ‫ﺿَﺮﺑ‬
َ will become ‫ﺖ‬ ُ ْ‫ﺿَﺮﺑَﺖ اﻟْﺒِﻨ‬
َ َْ َ
pronounced.
5. When an ‫ ال‬appears before a noun, which begins with a letter from ُ‫ﺸ ْﻤ ِﺴﻴﱠﺔ‬ ‫وف اﻟ ﱠ‬
ُ ‫( اَ ْﳊُُﺮ‬sun
letters) then the ‫ ل‬of ‫ ال‬must not be pronounced. The ‫ ل‬of ‫ ال‬will not get a sukoon. Instead
the ‫ﻲ‬ ِ ٌ ‫ ﺣﺮ‬will get a tashdeed.
‫ف َﴰْﺴ ﱞ‬َْ
e.g. ُ‫ﱠﺠَﺮة‬
َ ‫اَﻟﺸ‬
ُ‫وف اﻟ ﱠﺸ ْﻤ ِﺴﻴﱠﺔ‬ُ ‫ت ث د ذ ر ز س ش ص ض ط ظ ل ن = اَ ْﳊُُﺮ‬
6. The remaining letters are known as ُ‫وف اﻟْ َﻘ َﻤ ِﺮﻳﱠﺔ‬ ُ ‫( اَ ْﳊُُﺮ‬moon letters). In these, the ‫ ل‬of ‫ ال‬will get
a sukoon and will be pronounced. The ‫ي‬ ‫ف ﻗَ َﻤ ِﺮ ﱞ‬ٌ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬will not get a tashdeed.
e.g. ‫ اَﻟْ َﻘﻠَ ُﻢ‬the pen
7. Generally, a noun ending with a round ‫ )اَﻟﺘﱠﺎءُ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺮﺑُﻮﻃَﺔُ( ة‬is a feminine (‫ﺚ‬ ٌ ‫ ) ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬noun.
e.g. ٌ‫ﺳﺒﱡـ ْﻮَرة‬ َ blackboard
ِ – ِ‫اﻹ َﺷﺎرة‬ ِ ِ ُ ‫ ﺧﺒـﺮ – اَِْﻻﺳﻢ اﻟْﻤﻮﺻ‬etc. of a ‫( َﻏﻴـﺮ اﻟْﻌﺎﻗِ ِﻞ‬non-human) plural will be
8. The ٌ‫ﺻ َﻔﺔ‬ َ ِْ ‫ﻮل – ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ – ا ْﺳ ُﻢ‬ ُ َْ ُ ْ ٌَ َ َ ُْ
ِ
ٌ ‫ َواﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬.
‫ﺚ‬
e.g.
ٌ‫ﺻﻨَ ٌﺎم َﻛﺜِْﻴـَﺮة‬
ْ َ‫أ‬ many idols ‫ﺻﻨَ ُﺎم َﻻ ﺗَـْﻨـ َﻔ ُﻊ‬
ْ َ‫اَْﻷ‬ The idols do not benefit.
‫ﺻﻨَ ُﺎم‬ ِِ ٌ‫اﳊَﺎ ِر َﺳﺔُ َﺟﺎﻟِ َﺴﺔ‬ ِ
ْ َ‫ ٰﻫﺬﻩ ْاﻷ‬These idols. ْ ‫ب‬ ُ ‫ اَﻟْﻜ َﻼ‬The guard dogs are sitting.
ً‫ت َﻛﺜِْﻴـَﺮة‬ ِ
ُ ‫َﻛﺎﻧَﺖ اﻟْﺒُـﻴُـ ْﻮ‬ The houses were many.
9. When writing a noun ending with two fathahs (‫)ﹱ‬, an alif ( ‫ ) ا‬must be added at the end.
e.g. ‫َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬

16
Section 1.6
‫ﻀ َﻤﺎﺋُِﺮ‬
‫ – اَﻟ ﱠ‬Personal Pronouns

Definition: ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋُِﺮ‬ ِ ) are those words, which refer to the speaker (‫ )ﻣﺘَ َﻜﻠﱢﻢ‬or the
َ (singular: ‫ﺿﻤ ٌﲑ‬َ ٌ ُ
second person (‫ﺣﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ ِ ِ
َ ) or the third person (‫ﺐ‬
ٌ ‫) َﻏﺎﺋ‬.

Table 1.1
‫ﻀ َﻤﺎﺋُِﺮ‬
‫ – اَﻟ ﱠ‬Personal Pronouns

Unattached Form (‫ﻞ‬ ِ ِ

ٌ ‫) ُﻣ ْﻨـ َﻔﺼ‬ Attached Form (‫ﻞ‬
ٌ ‫) ُﻣﺘﱠﺼ‬
ِ ِ
‫ُﻫ َﻮ‬ He (one male), it ‫ُه‬ his, its, him ‫ﺐ‬ٌ ‫َواﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ‬
ِ ِ
‫ُﳘَﺎ‬ They (two males) ‫ُﳘَﺎ‬ their, them ‫ﺐ‬ٌ ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨﻴَﺔٌ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ‬
ِ
‫ُﻫ ْﻢ‬ They (many males) ‫ُﻫ ْﻢ‬ their, them ‫ﺐ‬ٌ ‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ‬
‫ِﻫ َﻲ‬ She (one female), it ‫َﻫﺎ‬ her, its ‫ﺐ‬ ِ ٌ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ ﻣﺆﻧﱠ‬
ٌ ‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ‬ َ ُ ‫َو‬
ِ
‫ُﳘَﺎ‬ ‫ُﳘَﺎ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ِ ٌ ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴﺔٌ ﻣﺆﻧﱠ‬
They (two females) their, them ٌ ‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ‬ َُ َ
‫ُﻫ ﱠﻦ‬ ‫ُﻫ ﱠﻦ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ِ ٌ ‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬
They (many females) their, them ٌ ‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ‬
‫ﺖ‬ ِ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛﺮ ﺣ‬ ِ
َ ْ‫أَﻧ‬ You (one male) ‫َك‬ your ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ُ ‫َو‬
‫أَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ‬ ‫ُﻛ َﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ِ ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴﺔٌ ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛﺮ ﺣ‬
You (two males) your َ ٌ ُ َ
‫أَﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ‬ You (many males) ‫ُﻛ ْﻢ‬ your ِ
‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﺣﺎﺿٌﺮ‬
ِ ْ‫أَﻧ‬ ‫ِك‬ ِ ‫ﺚﺣ‬ ِ
‫ﺖ‬ You (one female) your ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ‫َواﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬
ِ ‫ﺚﺣ‬ ِ
‫ أَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ‬You (two females) ‫ُﻛ َﻤﺎ‬ your ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨﻴَﺔٌ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬
ِ ‫ﺚﺣ‬
‫ﱳ‬‫ أَﻧْـ ُ ﱠ‬You (many females) ‫ُﻛ ﱠﻦ‬ your ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬
‫ أَﻧَﺎ‬I (one male or female) ‫ى‬ (‫ﺚ‬ ِ‫و‬
ٌ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣﺘَ َﻜﻠﱢ ٌﻢ ) ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ و ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬
my َ
‫ َْﳓ ُﻦ‬We (many males or ‫ﻧَﺎ‬ our ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔٌ َو ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣﺘَ َﻜﻠﱢ ٌﻢ‬
females)
(‫ﺚ‬ ٌ ‫) ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ و ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬

e.g. ‫ُﻫ َﻮ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ He is Zayd. ‫ﻚ‬َ ‫ﻗَـﻠَ ُﻤ‬ your pen
‫ﺐ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫أَﻧَﺎ ﻃَﺎﻟ‬ I am a student. ‫ﺼ ْﺮﺗُـ َﻬﺎ‬
َ َ‫ﻧ‬ I helped her.

17
Section 1.7
ُ‫وف اﻟْ َﺠﺎ ﱠرة‬
ُ ‫ – اَﻟْ ُﺤ ْﺮ‬Prepositions
Effect: A ‫ﺟﱟﺮ‬
َ ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬gives a ‫ َﺟﱞﺮ‬to the noun it enters upon, which is then known as ‫ور‬
ٌ ‫ َْﳎُﺮ‬.

Table 1.2
ُ‫وف اﻟْ َﺠﺎ ﱠرة‬
ُ ‫ – اَﻟْ ُﺤ ْﺮ‬Prepositions

‫ف َﺟ ﱟﺮ‬
ُ ‫َﺣ ْﺮ‬ Meaning Example
1. ‫ب‬ ِ with ‫ﺖ ﺑِﺎﻟْ َﻘﻠَ ِﻢ‬
ُ ‫َﻛﺘَْﺒ‬ I wrote with the pen.
‫ت‬ ِ‫ﺗَﺎﷲ‬
2. َ by (for oath) By Allah!
3. ‫َك‬ like ‫َزﻳْ ٌﺪ َﻛ ْﺎﻷَ َﺳ ِﺪ‬ Zayd is like a lion.
4. ‫ِل‬ for ‫اَ ْﳊَ ْﻤ ُﺪ ﻟِ ِﻠﻪ‬ All praise is for Allah.
5. ‫َو‬ ِ‫واﷲ‬
by (oath) َ By Allah!
6. ‫ُﻣْﻨ ُﺬ‬ since ‫َﻣﺎ َرأَﻳْـﺘُﻪُ ُﻣْﻨ ُﺬ أُ ْﺳﺒُـ ْﻮٍع‬ I have not seen him since a week.
7. ‫ُﻣ ْﺬ‬ since/for ‫َﻣﺎ َرأَﻳْـﺘُﻪُ ُﻣ ْﺬ أَْرﺑـَ َﻌ ِﺔ أَﻳﱠ ٍﺎم‬ I did not see him for four days.
8. ‫َﺧ َﻼ‬ besides, except ‫ﺧ َﻼ َزﻳْ ٍﺪ‬ َ ‫ﱠﺎس‬ ُ ‫َﺟﺎءَ اﻟﻨ‬ The people came except Zayd.
9. ‫ب‬
‫ُر ﱠ‬ many a…
‫ﺎﱂ ﻳـَ ْﻌ َﻤ ُﻞ ﺑِﻌِْﻠ ِﻤ ِﻪ‬ ٍِ ‫ب َﻋ‬ ‫ُر ﱠ‬
Many a learned person acts on his
knowledge.
10. ‫ﺎﺷﺎ‬
َ ‫َﺣ‬ besides, except ‫ﺎﺷﺎ َزﻳْ ٍﺪ‬ َ ‫ﱠﺎس َﺣ‬ ُ ‫َﺟﺎءَ اﻟﻨ‬ The people came except Zayd.
11. ‫ِﻣ ْﻦ‬ from ‫ﺖ ِﻣ َﻦ اﻟ ﱠﺴ َﻔ ِﺮ‬ ُ ‫َر َﺟ ْﻌ‬ I returned from the journey.
12. ‫َﻋ َﺪا‬ besides, except ‫ﱠﺎس َﻋ َﺪا َزﻳْ ٍﺪ‬ ُ ‫َﺟﺎءَ اﻟﻨ‬ The people came except Zayd.
13. ‫ﰲ‬ ِ ‫ﺖ‬ ِ ‫زﻳ ٌﺪ ِﰲ اﻟْﺒـﻴ‬
ْ in, regarding َْ َْ Zayd is in the house.
ِ ْ‫ﺐ َﻋ ِﻦ اﻟْ َﻤ ِﺮﻳ‬ ِ‫ﱠ‬
14. ‫َﻋ ْﻦ‬ from, regarding ‫ﺾ‬ ُ ‫َﺳﺄَ َل اﻟﻄﺒْﻴ‬ The doctor asked about the patient.
15. ‫ﻠﻰ‬
ٰ ‫َﻋ‬ on ‫ﻠﻰ اﻟْ ُﻜ ْﺮِﺳ ﱢﻲ‬ َ ‫ب َﻋ‬ ُ ‫اَﻟﺜـ ْﱠﻮ‬ The cloth/clothes is/are on the chair.
16. ‫ﺣ ّٰﱴ‬ ‫ﺼْﺒ ِﺢ‬ ‫ﺖ َﺣ ّٰﱴ اﻟ ﱡ‬ ِ
َ up to, until ُ ْ‫ﳕ‬ I slept till dawn.
17. ‫إِ ٰﱃ‬ up to, towards ‫ت إِ َﱃ اﻟْ َﻤ ِﺪﻳْـﻨَ ِﺔ‬ ُ ‫َﺳﺎﻓَـ ْﺮ‬ I travelled to Madinah.

Example 1: ‫اَﻟﻨﱠ ْﺤ ُﻮ ِﰱ اﻟْ َﻜ َﻼِم َﻛﺎﻟْ ِﻤ ْﻠ ِﺢ ِﰱ اﻟﻄﱠ َﻌ ِﺎم‬ Grammar in speech is like salt in food.

18
Example 2 with Sentence Analysis:
‫ﺑِﺎﻟْ َﻘﻠَ ِﻢ‬ ‫ﺖ‬
ُ ‫َﻛﺘَْﺒ‬ I wrote with the pen.
‫ور‬
ٌ ‫َْﳎُﺮ‬
+ ‫ف ﺟﱟﺮ‬
َ ٌ ‫َﺣ ْﺮ‬

ٌ‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬ ‫ُﻣﺘَـ َﻌﻠﱢ ٌﻖ ﺑِﺎﻟْ ِﻔ ْﻌ ِﻞ‬ ِ

+ ‫ﺎﻋﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ َ‫ ﻓ‬+ ‫ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬
ِِ
Note: Together, the ‫ﺟﱟﺮ‬ َ ‫ف‬ ٌ ‫ َْﳎُﺮ‬are known as ‫( ُﻣﺘَـ َﻌﻠﱢ ٌﻖ‬connected) of the ‫ َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬in ٌ‫ ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ا ْﲰﻴﱠﺔ‬and
ٌ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬and ‫ور‬
of the ‫ﻞ‬ ِ ِِ
ٌ ‫ ﻓ ْﻌ‬in ٌ‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓ ْﻌﻠﻴﱠﺔ‬.

EXERCISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyze the following sentences.
i. ‫اﳌﺴﺠﺪ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺖ زﻳﺪ‬ iii. ‫اﻟﻜﺘﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﻨﻀﺪة‬
ii. ‫ﻧﺰل اﳌﻄﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻤﺎء‬ iv. ‫زﻳﻨﺐ ﺟﺎﻟﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻜﺮﺳﻰ ﰱ اﳊﺠﺮة‬

19
Section 1.8
‫ﺸﺒﱠـ َﻬﺔُ ﺑِﺎﻟْ ِﻔ ْﻌ ِﻞ‬
َ ‫وف اﻟْ ُﻤ‬
ُ ‫ – اَﻟْ ُﺤ ُﺮ‬Those Particles That Resemble the Verb

 These are called ‫ﺸﺒﱠـ َﻬﺔُ ﺑِﺎﻟْ ِﻔ ْﻌ ِﻞ‬ ُ ‫ اَ ْﳊُُﺮ‬because like ‫اَﻟْ ِﻔ ْﻌ ُﻞ اﻟْ ُﻤﺘَـ َﻌ ﱢﺪى‬, they also govern two words.
َ ‫وف اﻟْ ُﻤ‬
 ٌ ‫ ُﺣُﺮ‬appear before a ٌ‫ ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬and ‫)ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ اِ ِْﲰﻴﱠﺔٌ( َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬.
These ‫وف‬
ِ ِ
Effect: Such a particle gives a ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ‫ﺼ‬ْ َ‫ ﻧ‬to the ٌ‫ ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬which is then known as ‫( ا ْﺳ ُﻢ إِ ﱠن‬or ‫ ا ْﺳ ُﻢ أَ ﱠن‬and so
َ which is then known as ‫( َﺧﺒَـُﺮ إِ ﱠن‬or ‫ َﺧﺒَـُﺮ أَ ﱠن‬and so on).
on) and a ‫ َرﻓْ ٌﻊ‬to the ‫ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬

Table 1.3
‫ﺸﺒﱠـ َﻬﺔُ ﺑِﺎﻟْ ِﻔ ْﻌ ِﻞ‬
َ ‫وف اﻟْ ُﻤ‬
ُ ‫ – اَﻟْ ُﺤ ُﺮ‬Those Particles That Resemble the Verb

Meaning Example
1. ‫إِ ﱠن‬ certainly, verily, indeed ‫إِ ﱠن اﷲَ َﻋﻠِْﻴ ٌﻢ‬ Verily Allah is All Knowing.
ِِ ِ
ٌ ْ‫ﺖ أَ ﱠن ْاﻻ ْﻣﺘ َﺤﺎ َن ﻗَ ِﺮﻳ‬
2. ‫أَ ﱠن‬ ‫ﺐ‬
certainly, verily; that
ُ ‫َﻋﻠ ْﻤ‬ I knew that the examination
was near.
3. ‫ َﻛﺄَ ﱠن‬as if ‫ﺖ َﺟ ِﺪﻳْ ٌﺪ‬َ ‫َﻛﺄَ ﱠن اﻟْﺒَـْﻴ‬ It is as if the house is new.
4. ‫ﻜ ﱠﻦ‬ِ ‫ ٰﻟ‬but, however ِ َ‫ اَﻟْﺒـﻴﺖ ﺟ ِﺪﻳ ٌﺪ ٰﻟﻜِ ﱠﻦ ْاﻷَﺛ‬The house is new but the
ٌ‫ﺎث ﻗَﺪ ْﱘ‬ َ ْ َ ُ َْ
furniture is old.
5. ‫ﺖ‬َ ‫ ﻟَْﻴ‬if only, I wish ‫ﺎب َﻋﺎﺋِ ٌﺪ‬
َ َ‫ﺖ اﻟﺸﱠﺒ‬ َ ‫ﻟَْﻴ‬ I wish youth would return.
6. ‫ﻞ‬
‫ ﻟَ َﻌ ﱠ‬maybe, hopefully, ‫اﻻ ْﻣﺘِ َﺤﺎ َن َﺳ ْﻬ ٌﻞ‬
ِْ ‫ﻟَﻌ ﱠﻞ‬
َ
Hopefully, the examination
perhaps will be easy.

Sentence Analysis:
‫َﻋﻠِ ْﻴ ٌﻢ‬ َ‫اﷲ‬ ‫إِ ﱠن‬ Indeed, Allah is All-Knowing.
‫َﺧْﺒـُﺮ إِ ﱠن‬ ‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ إِ ﱠن‬ ‫ف اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺸﺒﱠـ َﻬﺔُ ﺑِﺎﻟْ ِﻔ ْﻌ ِﻞ‬
ُ ‫اَ ْﳊَْﺮ‬

Notes:
1. Difference between ‫ إِ ﱠن‬and ‫أَ ﱠن‬:
a. ‫ إِ ﱠن‬is generally used at the beginning of a sentence.
‫ أَ ﱠن‬is generally used in the middle of a sentence.
b. Sometimes, ‫ إِ ﱠن‬appears in the middle of a sentence. This happens when it is used after
a word with root letters ‫ق – و – ل‬.
e.g. َ ٌ‫ﻳـَ ُﻘ ْﻮ ُل إِﻧـ َﱠﻬﺎ ﺑـَ َﻘَﺮة‬
ُ‫ﺻ ْﻔَﺮاء‬ He says, it is a yellow cow.

20
‫ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ ‪2. The‬‬
‫‪َ can be a complete sentence.‬‬
‫إِ ﱠن زﻳﺪا أُﱡﻣﻪ ﺻ ِ‬
‫ﺎﳊَﺔٌ‬
‫‪Example 1:‬‬ ‫َْ ً ُ َ‬ ‫‪Indeed, Zayd’s mother is pious.‬‬

‫ﺻﺎﻟِ َﺤﺔٌ‬
‫َ‬ ‫أُ ﱡﻣﻪُ‬ ‫َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬ ‫إِ ﱠن‬
‫ﺎف إِﻟَ ِﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻀ ٌ‬‫ﺎف ‪ُ +‬ﻣ َ‬
‫ﻀ ٌ‬‫ُﻣ َ‬

‫= )ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ اِ ِْﲰﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔٌ(‬ ‫َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأٌ‬

‫َﺧْﺒـُﺮ إِ ﱠن‬ ‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ إِ ﱠن‬ ‫ف اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺸﺒﱠـ َﻬﺔُ ﺑِﺎﻟْ ِﻔ ْﻌ ِﻞ‬

‫اَ ْﳊُْﺮ ُ‬

‫‪Example 2:‬‬ ‫إِ ﱠن َزﻳْ ًﺪا أَ َﻛ َﻞ اﻟﻄﱠ َﻌ َﺎم‬ ‫‪Indeed, Zayd ate the food.‬‬

‫اﻟﻄﱠ َﻌ َ‬
‫ﺎم‬ ‫أَ َﻛ َﻞ‬ ‫َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬ ‫إِ ﱠن‬
‫ﻮل = )ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔٌ(‬
‫‪َ +‬ﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ٌ‬ ‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ َﻣ َﻊ ﻓَﺎﻋِﻠِ ِﻪ‬

‫َﺧﺒَـُﺮ إِ ﱠن‬ ‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ إِ ﱠن‬ ‫ف اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺸﺒﱠـ َﻬﺔُ ﺑِﺎﻟْ ِﻔ ْﻌ ِﻞ‬

‫اَ ْﳊُْﺮ ُ‬

‫ﺟﱟﺮ ‪3. If there is a‬‬ ‫‪ second.‬اِ ْﺳ ٌﻢ ‪َ will appear first and the‬ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ ‪َ , then the‬ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ ‪َ before the‬ﺣ ْﺮ ٌ‬
‫ف َ‬
‫‪e.g.‬‬ ‫إِ ﱠن إِﻟَﻴﻨَﺎ إِﻳَﺎﺑـَ ُﻬ ْﻢ‬ ‫‪Indeed, to us is their return.‬‬

‫إِﻳَﺎﺑَـ ُﻬ ْﻢ‬ ‫إِﻟَﻴﻨَﺎ‬ ‫إِ ﱠن‬

‫ﺎف إِﻟَ ِﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻀ ٌ‬‫ﺎف ‪ُ +‬ﻣ َ‬ ‫ﻀ ٌ‬
‫ُﻣ َ‬ ‫ور‬
‫َﺟﺎ ﱞر َو َْﳎُﺮ ٌ‬

‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ إِ ﱠن ) ُﻣ َﺆ ﱠﺧٌﺮ(‬ ‫َﺧْﺒـُﺮ إِ ﱠن ) ُﻣ َﻘ ﱠﺪ ٌم(‬ ‫ف اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺸﺒﱠـ َﻬﺔُ ﺑِﺎﻟْ ِﻔ ْﻌ ِﻞ‬

‫اَ ْﳊَْﺮ ُ‬

‫وف ‪َ is joined to any of these‬ﻣﺎ اﻟْ َﻜﺎﻓﱠﺔُ ‪4. When‬‬

‫‪ُ , their effect will be cancelled.‬ﺣُﺮ ٌ‬
‫إِﱠﳕَﺎ إِ ٰﳍ ُﻜﻢ إِٰﻟﻪ و ِ‬
‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬
‫‪e.g.‬‬ ‫ُ ْ ٌَ‬ ‫‪Your god is only one god.‬‬

‫‪EXCERISE‬‬
‫‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab, and analyze the following sentences.‬‬

‫ﻟﻌﻞ اﳌﺮﻳﺾ ﻧﺎﺋﻢ ‪i.‬‬ ‫‪iv.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺄن اﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﻣﺼﺒﺎح‬

‫اﻋﻠﻢ أن زﻳﺪا ﻋﺎﻗﻞ ‪ii.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺖ اﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﻃﺎﻟﻊ ‪v.‬‬
‫إن رﺟﻼ دﺧﻞ اﻟﺒﻴﺖ ‪iii.‬‬ ‫إن ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻪ ‪vi.‬‬

‫‪21‬‬
Section 1.9
ِ ُ ‫ – اَْﻷَﻓْـﻌ‬Auxiliary (Defective) Verbs
َ ‫ﺎل اﻟﻨﱠﺎﻗ‬
ُ‫ﺼﺔ‬ َ
ِ ِ
 Such a verb is called ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫( ﻧَﺎﻗ‬incomplete) because even though it is a ‫ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ َﻻ ِزٌم‬, it needs two
ma‘mools (‫ﲔ‬
َ ْ َ‫) َﻣ ْﻌ ُﻤﻮﻟ‬. The sentence remains incomplete with one ‫ﻮل‬
ٌ ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﻤ‬.
e.g. ‫َﻛﺎ َن َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ Zayd was (the sentence remains incomplete).
These verbs enter on a ٌ‫ ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬and a ‫ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬ ِِ
 َ (ٌ‫)ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ا ْﲰﻴﱠﺔ‬.
Effect: They give ‫ َرﻓْ ٌﻊ‬to the ٌ‫ ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬, which becomes known as ‫( اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ َﻛﺎ َن‬or ‫ﺎر‬
َ‫ﺻ‬
ِ
َ ‫ ا ْﺳ ُﻢ‬and so on) and
‫ﺐ‬
ٌ‫ﺼ‬ْ َ‫ ﻧ‬to the ‫ َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬, which becomes known as ‫( َﺧﺒَـُﺮ َﻛﺎ َن‬or ‫ﺻ َﺎر‬
َ ‫ َﺧﺒَـُﺮ‬and so on).

Table 1.4

‫ﺺ‬ ِ ِ
ٌ ‫ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ ﻧَﺎﻗ‬ Meaning Example
1. ‫َﻛﺎ َن‬ was ‫ﺖ ﻧَ ِﻈْﻴـ ًﻔﺎ‬
ُ ‫َﻛﺎ َن اﻟْﺒَـْﻴ‬ The house was clean.

2. ‫ﺎر‬
َ‫ﺻ‬ َ
became ‫ﺻ َﺎر اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ َﻏﻨِﻴﺎ‬ َ
The man became wealthy.

3. ‫ﺢ‬
َ َ‫ﺻﺒ‬
ْ َ‫أ‬ happen in the morning ‫ﻀﺎ‬ً ْ‫ﺻﺒَ َﺢ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ َﻣ ِﺮﻳ‬ْ َ‫أ‬ Zayd became ill in the
morning.
OR

became ‫ﺻﺒَ َﺢ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ َﻏﻨِﻴﺎ‬ ْ َ‫أ‬ Zayd became rich.

4. ‫أَْﻣ ٰﺴﻰ‬ happen in the evening, ‫أَْﻣ َﺴﻰ اﻟْ َﻌ ِﺎﻣ ُﻞ ُﻣْﺘﻌِﺒًﺎ‬ The worker became tired in
became the evening.
5. ‫ﺿ ٰﺤﻰ‬
ْ َ‫أ‬ happen at mid-morning, ‫ﺿﺤﻰ اﻟْﻐَﻤﺎم َﻛﺜِﻴـ ًﻔﺎ‬
َ ْ َ‫أ‬
The clouds became dense at
ْ َُ
became mid morning.
6. ‫ﻞ‬
‫ﻇَ ﱠ‬ happen during the day, ‫ﻇَ ﱠﻞ اﻟْ َﻤﻄَُﺮ ﻧَﺎ ِزًﻻ‬ It rained the whole day.
became
7. ‫ﺎت‬
َ َ‫ﺑ‬ happen during the ‫ﺎت َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﻧَﺎﺋِ ًﻤﺎ‬
َ َ‫ﺑ‬ Zayd passed the night
night, became sleeping.
8. ‫ام‬ ‫ﺲ َﻣﺎ َد َام َزﻳْ ٌﺪ َﺟﺎﻟِ ًﺴﺎ‬ ِ ِ
َ ‫َﻣﺎ َد‬ ْ ‫ا ْﺟﻠ‬
as long as Sit as long as Zayd is sitting.

9. ‫ال‬
َ ‫َﻣﺎ َز‬ always, continuously ‫ﻀﺎ‬ً ْ‫َﻣﺎ َز َال َزﻳْ ٌﺪ َﻣ ِﺮﻳ‬ Zayd was continuously sick.

10. ‫ِح‬
َ ‫َﻣﺎ ﺑَﺮ‬
always, continuously ‫ﺻﺎﺋِ ًﻤﺎ‬َ ‫َﻣﺎ ﺑَﺮ َِح َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬
Zayd was always fasting.

11. ‫َﻣﺎ ﻓَﺘِ َﺊ‬ always, continuously ‫َﻣﺎ ﻓَﺘِ َﺊ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﻧَ ِﺸْﻴﻄًﺎ‬ Zayd was always active.

12. ‫ﻚ‬
‫ َﻣﺎ اﻧْـ َﻔ ﱠ‬always, continuously ‫ﺻ ِﺎدﻗًﺎ‬ ِ ‫ﻣﺎ اﻧْـ َﻔ ﱠ‬
َ ‫ﻚ اﻟﺘﱠﺎﺟُﺮ‬ َ
The businessman was always
truthful.
13. ‫ﻟَْﻴﺲ‬
َ
no, not ‫اﳋَ ِﺎد ُم ﻗَ ِﻮﻳﺎ‬
ْ ‫ﺲ‬َ ‫ﻟَْﻴ‬
The servant is not strong.

22
Sentence Analysis:
‫ﻧَ ِﻈ ْﻴـ ًﻔﺎ‬ ‫ﺖ‬ُ ‫اﻟْﺒَـ ْﻴ‬ ‫َﻛﺎ َن‬ The house was clean.
‫َﺧﺒَـ ُﺮ َﻛﺎ َن‬ ‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ َﻛﺎ َن‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ِ ِ
ٌ ‫ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ ﻧَﺎﻗ‬

Notes:
1. When ‫ َﻛﺎ َن‬is used with ٌ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬
َ ‫ ُﻣ‬, it gives the meaning of past continuous.
e.g. ‫ﺐ‬
ُ ُ‫َﻛﺎ َن َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﻳَﻜْﺘ‬ Zayd was writing/Zayd used to write.
Note: Here, the ‫ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬ ِِ
َ of ‫ َﻛﺎ َن‬is a ٌ‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓ ْﻌﻠﻴﱠﺔ‬.

2. ‫ﺻ َﺎر – َﻛﺎ َن‬

َ – ‫ﺻﺒَ َﺢ‬
ْ َ‫ﺿ ٰﺤﻰ – أَْﻣ ٰﺴﻰ – أ‬ َ َ‫ ﺑ‬can be used in ٌ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬
ْ َ‫ﺎت – ﻇَ ﱠﻞ – أ‬ َ ‫ ُﻣ‬and ‫ أَْﻣٌﺮ‬as well.

‫ِح – َﻣﺎ َز َال‬ ِ ‫ َﻣﺎ اﻧْـ َﻔ ﱠ‬can be used in ٌ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬

3. َ ‫ﻚ – َﻣﺎ ﻓَﺘ َﺊ – َﻣﺎ ﺑَﺮ‬ َ ‫ ُﻣ‬but not in ‫أَْﻣٌﺮ‬.

4.
َ ‫ ﻟَْﻴ‬have a past tense only (no ٌ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬
‫ َﻣﺎ َد َام‬and ‫ﺲ‬ َ ‫ ُﻣ‬or ‫)أَْﻣٌﺮ‬.

5. ‫ َﻣﺎ َد َام‬must be preceded by another sentence.

6. The ‫ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬ ِ
َ of ‫ﺲ‬َ ‫ ﻟَْﻴ‬is sometimes prefixed with a ‫ب‬.
‫ﲔ‬ ِ ِ ْ ‫ أَﻟَﻴﺲ اﷲ ﺑِﺄَﺣ َﻜ ِﻢ‬Is Allah not the greatest of rulers?
e.g. َ ْ ‫اﳊَﺎﻛﻤ‬ ْ ُ ْ َ

7. If there is a ‫ﺟﱟﺮ‬ ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬before the ‫ َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬, then the ‫ َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬will appear first and the ٌ‫ ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬second.
َ ‫ف‬
e.g. ‫ﺎب‬ٌ ‫َﺳ َﺤ‬ ‫ﺴ َﻤ ِﺎء‬
‫ﻓِﻲ اﻟ ﱠ‬ ‫َﻛﺎ َن‬ There were clouds in the sky.
‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ َﻛﺎ َن ) ُﻣ َﺆ ﱠ‬
(‫ﺧٌﺮ‬ (‫ﱠم‬
ٌ ‫َﺧﺒَـُﺮ َﻛﺎ َن ) ُﻣ َﻘﺪ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ِ ِ
ٌ ‫ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ ﻧَﺎﻗ‬

EXERCISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab, and analyze the following sentences.

i. ‫ﻟﻴﺲ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺸﻴﻄﺎ‬ v. ‫ﺻﺎر اﻟﻜﺒﺶ ﲰﻴﻨﺎ‬

ii. ‫ﻛﺎن ﻣﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﻣﺎ ﺻﺎدﻗﺎ‬ vi. ‫ﻻ ﻳﺰال ﻟﺴﺎﻧﻚ رﻃﺒﺎ ﻣﻦ ذﻛﺮ اﷲ‬
iii. ‫أﻣﺴﻰ اﻟﻐﲏ ﻓﻘﲑا‬ vii. ‫ﻳﺼﺒﺢ اﳌﺪاد ﺟﺎﻓﺎ‬
iv. ‫ﻧﻮﻳﺖ اﻻﻋﺘﻜﺎف ﻣﺎ دﻣﺖ ﰲ اﳌﺴﺠﺪ‬

23
 CHAPTER 2
‫ب َو اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺒﻨِ ﱡﻰ‬
ُ ‫ – اَﻟْ ُﻤ ْﻌ َﺮ‬Declinable and Indeclinable Nouns

Words are of two types with respect to changes, which may or may not take place at their ends.
If the end of a word remains the same in all conditions, it is called ‫ ; َﻣْﺒ ِﲏﱞ‬and that word whose
end changes is called ‫ب‬
ٌ ‫ ُﻣ ْﻌَﺮ‬.

Section 2.11
‫أَﻧْـ َﻮاعُ اﻟْﺒِﻨَ ِﺎء‬: Those conditions (‫ت‬ ‫ َﻣْﺒ ِ ﱞ‬words are four:
ٌ ‫) َﺣ َﺎﻻ‬, which remain unchanged at the end of ‫ﲏ‬
ِ
‫ﺿ ﱞﻢ‬َ , ‫ﻓَـْﺘ ٌﺢ‬, ‫ َﻛ ْﺴٌﺮ‬and ‫ ُﺳ ُﻜ ْﻮ ٌن‬. These are called ‫ع اﻟْﺒِﻨَﺎء‬
ُ ‫أَﻧْـ َﻮا‬.

ِ ‫أَﻧْـ َﻮاعُ ا ِﻹ ْﻋ‬: Those conditions (‫ت‬

‫ﺮاب‬ ٌ ‫) َﺣ َﺎﻻ‬, which occur at the end of ‫ب‬ ٌ ‫ ُﻣ ْﻌَﺮ‬words are four: ‫ َرﻓْ ٌﻊ‬, ‫ﺐ‬
ٌ‫ﺼ‬ْ َ‫ﻧ‬,
ِ ‫ع ا ِﻹ ْﻋﺮ‬
‫ َﺟﱞﺮ‬, and ‫ َﺟ ْﺰٌم‬. These are called ‫اب‬ ُ ‫ اَِْﻹ ْﻋَﺮ‬for short). These changes are brought about at
ُ ‫اب( أَﻧْـ َﻮا‬
the end of a ‫ب‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ ُﻣ ْﻌَﺮ‬word in accordance with the requirement of the ‫( َﻋﺎﻣ ٌﻞ‬governing word).

ِ ‫اﻹ ْﻋﺮ‬
‫اب‬ َ ِْ ‫ﺎت‬
ُ ‫ – َﻋ َﻼ َﻣ‬Signs of I‘raab
ِ ‫اﻹ ْﻋﺮ‬
I‘raab can be shown in two ways. These are called ‫اب‬ ِ ُ ‫( َﻋ َﻼ َﻣ‬signs of i‘raab).
َ ْ ‫ﺎت‬
1. ‫ﺎﳊَﺮَﻛ ِﺔ‬
ْ ِ‫اب ﺑ‬
ُ ‫اَِْﻹ ْﻋَﺮ‬: These are the basic signs and are the most common. I‘raab is shown by means
َ
of a ٌ‫ﺣﺮَﻛﺔ‬
َ i.e. ٌ‫ﺿ ﱠﻤﺔ‬
َ or ٌ‫ ﻓَـْﺘ َﺤﺔ‬or ٌ‫ َﻛ ْﺴَﺮة‬, or ‫( ُﺳ ُﻜ ْﻮ ٌن‬which is the absence of a ٌ‫) َﺣﺮَﻛﺔ‬.
َ َ
e.g. ‫َر ُﺟ ٌﻞ‬ ‫َر ُﺟ ٍﻞ‬ ‫َر ُﺟ ًﻼ‬ ْ ‫ﻀ ِﺮ‬
‫ب‬ ْ َ‫َﱂْ ﻳ‬
ِ ‫ﺎﳊﺮ‬
2. ‫وف‬ ِ ‫اَِْﻹ ْﻋﺮ‬: Sometimes, the i‘raab is shown by means of any of the ‫وف ِﻋﻠﱠ ٍﺔ‬
ُُْ ‫اب ﺑ‬
ُ َ ُ ‫ ُﺣُﺮ‬i.e. ‫ و‬or ‫ ا‬or
‫ي‬.
e.g. ‫ﻮك‬
َ ُ‫أَﺑ‬ ‫ﺎك‬
َ َ‫أَﺑ‬ َ ِ‫أَﺑ‬
‫ﻴﻚ‬

ِ ‫ت اﻟ ُْﻤ ْﻌﺮ‬
‫ب‬ َ ُ ‫ – َﺣ َﺎﻻ‬Conditions of Mu‘rab
As mentioned above, the conditions that occur at the end of ‫ب‬
ٌ ‫ ُﻣ ْﻌَﺮ‬words are four. Below, we
look at them in more detail.

1
This section is based upon the discussion in al-Nahw al-Wadih. See ‘Ali al-Jaarim & Mustafa Ameen, al-Nahw
al-Wadih li al-Madaris al-Ibdtida’iyyah, (Cairo: Dar al-Ma’arif, n.d.), 2:7-17.

25
 ٍ ِ ُ ‫ )و( ﺣﺮ‬appears at the end of a word.
َ or its corresponding ‫ف ﻋﻠﱠﺔ‬
1. ‫ َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟ ﱠﺮﻓْ ِﻊ‬is that when a ٌ‫ﺿ ﱠﻤﺔ‬ َْ
Such a word is said to be ٌ‫ َﻣ ْﺮﻓُﻮع‬.
e.g. ‫خ‬
ٌ َ‫أ‬ ‫ﻮك‬
َ ‫أَ ُﺧ‬
ِ‫ﺼ‬ ٍ ِ ُ ‫ )ا( ﺣﺮ‬appears at the end of a word.
2. ‫ﺐ‬ ْ ‫ َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﻨﱠ‬is that when a ٌ‫ ﻓَـْﺘ َﺤﺔ‬or its corresponding ‫ف ﻋﻠﱠﺔ‬َْ
Such a word is said to be ‫ﻮب‬ ٌ ‫ﺼ‬ ُ ‫ َﻣْﻨ‬.
e.g. ‫أَ ًﺧﺎ‬ ‫ﺎك‬
َ ‫أَ َﺧ‬
ٍ ِ ُ ‫ )ي( ﺣﺮ‬appears at the end of a word.
َ ْ‫ َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟ‬is that when a ٌ‫ َﻛ ْﺴَﺮة‬or its corresponding ‫ف ﻋﻠﱠﺔ‬
3. ‫ﺠ ﱢﺮ‬ َْ
Such a word is said to be ‫ور‬ ٌ ‫ َْﳎُﺮ‬.
e.g. ‫أَ ٍخ‬ َ ‫أَ ِﺧْﻴ‬
‫ﻚ‬
4. ‫ﺠ ْﺰِم‬
َ ْ‫ َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟ‬is that when a ‫ ُﺳ ُﻜ ْﻮ ٌن‬appears at the end of a word. Such a word is said to be ‫وم‬
ٌ ‫ َْﳎُﺰ‬.
e.g. ْ ‫ﻀ ِﺮ‬
‫ب‬ ْ َ‫َﱂْ ﻳ‬

Difference Between ٌ‫ﺿ ﱠﻤﺔ‬

َ – ٌ‫ َﻛ ْﺴ َﺮةٌ – ﻓَـ ْﺘ َﺤﺔ‬and ‫ﺿ ﱞﻢ‬
َ – ‫َﻛ ْﺴ ٌﺮ – ﻓَـ ْﺘ ٌﺢ‬
 The words ٌ‫ﺿ ﱠﻤﺔ‬
َ – ٌ‫ َﻛ ْﺴَﺮةٌ – ﻓَـْﺘ َﺤﺔ‬are used to describe the conditions at the end of a ‫ب‬
ٌ ‫ ُﻣ ْﻌَﺮ‬, e.g.
‫ اَﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ‬has a ٌ‫ﺿ ﱠﻤﺔ‬ َ at the end, which is a sign of its being ٌ‫ َﻣ ْﺮﻓُﻮع‬.
 The words ‫ﺿ ﱞﻢ‬ َ – ‫ َﻛ ْﺴٌﺮ – ﻓَـْﺘ ٌﺢ‬are used to describe the conditions at the end of a ‫ َﻣْﺒ ِﲏﱞ‬, e.g. ‫ب‬
َ ‫ﺿَﺮ‬
َ
has a ‫ﺢ‬ ‫ َﻣْﺒ ِ ﱞ‬.
ٌ ‫ ﻓَـْﺘ‬at the end. It is ‫ﲏ َﻋﻠَﻰ اﻟْ َﻔْﺘ ِﺢ‬
In other words, (‫ )ﹹ‬is the same but the name is ٌ‫ﺿ ﱠﻤﺔ‬ َ when it appears in a ‫ب‬ٌ ‫ ُﻣ ْﻌَﺮ‬and is ‫ﺿﻢﱞ‬َ when
it appears in a ‫ َﻣْﺒ ِﲏﱞ‬. The same is true of (‫ )ﹷ‬and (‫)ﹻ‬.

26
Section 2.2
‫ – اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﺒﻨِ ﱡﻰ‬Indeclinable Noun
As mentioned earlier, a ‫ﲏ‬ ‫ َﻣْﺒ ِ ﱞ‬is that word whose end remains unchanged in all conditions i.e.
irrespective of the requirement of the ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ َﻋﺎﻣ‬governing it.
e.g. ‫َﺟﺎءَ ٰﻫ َﺬا‬ ‫ﺖ ٰﻫ َﺬا‬
ُ ْ‫َرأَﻳ‬ ‫ت ﺑِ ٰﻬ َﺬا‬
ُ ‫َﻣَﺮْر‬
This came. I saw this. I passed by this.

Note: The ٌ‫ﺣﺮَﻛﺔ‬

َ َ at the end of ‫ ٰﻫ َﺬا‬remained constant and did not change according to the
‫ َﻋ ِﺎﻣ ٌﻞ‬requirement.

‫ َﻣ ْﺒﻨِ ﱞ‬:
Types of ‫ﻲ‬
1. All Particles (‫وف‬
ٌ ‫* ) ُﺣُﺮ‬
2. ُ ‫)اَْﻷَﻓْـ َﻌ‬, the following are ‫ َﻣْﺒ ِﲏﱞ‬.
Amongst the verbs (‫ﺎل‬
‫ﺎﺿﻰ‬ِ ‫* اَﻟْ ِﻔﻌﻞ اَﻟْﻤ‬
1) َ ُْ
‫ف‬ ِ ‫* اَْﻷَﻣﺮ اَ ْﳊ‬
ُ ‫ﺎﺿ ُﺮ اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻌُﺮْو‬
2) َ ُْ
ٍ ‫ َﻏﺎﺋِﺐ( ﲨَْﻊ ﻣﺆﻧﱠ‬and ‫ﺎﺿﺮ‬ ِ ِِ ِ ِ ِ
3) The ‫ﺚ‬ َُ ُ ٌ ٌ ‫ ) َﺣ‬and the ‫ ﺛَﻘْﻴـﻠَﺔٌ( ﻧـُ ْﻮ ُن اﻟﺘﱠﺄﻛْﻴﺪ‬and ٌ‫ ) َﺧﻔْﻴـ َﻔﺔ‬of ٌ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬
َ ‫ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ ُﻣ‬.
3. Amongst nouns (ُ‫)اَْﻷَ ْﲰَﺎء‬, there are some nouns whose ends remain constant. They are
known as ‫ َﻏْﻴـ ُﺮ اﻟْ ُﻤﺘَ َﻤ ﱢﻜ ِﻦ‬i.e. nouns, which do not give place to changes. These nouns are ‫َﻣْﺒ ِﲏﱞ‬
and are recognized by their resemblance with any one of the three types of al-mabny al-
asl words (‫ف‬ ِ ‫ اَﻟْ ِﻔﻌﻞ اَﻟْﻤ‬or ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ ُﺣُﺮْو‬or ‫ﺎﺿﻰ‬ ُ ‫اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻌُﺮْو‬ ِ ‫)اَْﻷَﻣﺮ اَ ْﳊ‬. This resemblance can be in any one
‫ﺎﺿُﺮ‬
َ ُْ َ ُْ
of the following ways:
a. Resemblance in meaning. For example, the noun ‫( ُرَوﻳْ َﺪ‬give grace/respite) resembles
the word ‫أَْﻣ ِﻬ ْﻞ‬, which is ‫ف‬ ِ ‫( اَْﻷَﻣﺮ اَ ْﳊ‬one of the al-mabny al-asl) and has the
ُ ‫ﺎﺿُﺮ اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻌُﺮْو‬َ ُْ
same meaning.
b. Resemblance in dependency. For example, the noun ‫ﺎرةِ( ٰﻫ َﺬا‬ ِْ ‫)اِ ْﺳﻢ‬, which is
َ ‫اﻹ َﺷ‬ ُ
ِ ِ
dependent on a ‫ﺎر إﻟَْﻴﻪ‬
ٌ ‫ ُﻣ َﺸ‬to give meaning, resembles a ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫( َﺣ ْﺮ‬one of the al-mabny al-
asl), which is also dependent on another word to give meaning.
c. Resemblance in having less than three letters. For example, the noun ‫ َﻣ ْﻦ‬, which is
less than three letters, resembles ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫( َﺣ ْﺮ‬e.g. ‫) َو‬, which is also generally less than three
letters.
d. Resemblance in having had a ‫ف‬ ٌ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬originally. For example, the noun ‫أَ َﺣ َﺪ َﻋ َﺸَﺮ‬
resembles a ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬in the sense that originally it contained a ‫ف‬ٌ ‫)أَ َﺣ ٌﺪ َو َﻋ َﺸٌﺮ( َﺣ ْﺮ‬.
*These three are known as ‫ﻞ‬
ُ‫ﺻ‬ ‫اَﻟْ َﻤْﺒ ِ ﱡ‬.
ْ َ‫ﲎ ْاﻷ‬

27
Section 2.3
‫ب‬
ُ ‫ – اَﻟْ ُﻤ ْﻌ َﺮ‬Declinable Noun
As mentioned above, a ‫ب‬
ٌ ‫ ُﻣ ْﻌَﺮ‬is that word whose end accepts any of the i‘raab according to the
requirement of the ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ َﻋﺎﻣ‬governing it.
e.g. ‫َﺟﺎءَ َر ُﺟ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﺖ َر ُﺟ ًﻼ‬
ُ ْ‫َرأَﻳ‬ ‫ت ﺑَِﺮ ُﺟ ٍﻞ‬
ُ ‫َﻣَﺮْر‬
A man came. I saw a man. I passed by a man.

Note: The i‘raab of ‫ رﺟﻞ‬kept on changing according to the requirement of the ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ َﻋﺎﻣ‬.

Types of ‫ب‬
ٌ ‫ ُﻣ ْﻌ َﺮ‬:
ِ ٍ ِ ِ
1. Amongst verbs (‫ﺎل‬ ُ ‫)اَْﻷَﻓْـ َﻌ‬, all of ٌ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬َ ‫ ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ ُﻣ‬besides the ‫ﺐ( ﲨَْ ُﻊ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠﺚ‬
ٌ ‫ َﻏﺎﺋ‬and ‫ ) َﺣﺎﺿٌﺮ‬and the ‫ﻧـُ ْﻮ ُن‬
‫ ﺛَِﻘْﻴـﻠَﺔٌ( اﻟﺘﱠﺄﻛِْﻴ ِﺪ‬and ٌ‫ ) َﺧ ِﻔْﻴـ َﻔﺔ‬are ‫ب‬ ٌ ‫ ُﻣ ْﻌَﺮ‬.
2. Amongst nouns (ُ‫)اَْﻷَ ْﲰَﺎء‬, those nouns, which accept i‘raab changes are ‫ب‬
ٌ ‫ ُﻣ ْﻌَﺮ‬. They are
‫ ُﻣﺘَﻤ ﱢ‬i.e. nouns which give place to i‘raab changes.
known as ‫ﻜ ٌﻦ‬ َ
Note: These nouns will be ‫ب‬ ٌ ‫ ُﻣ ْﻌَﺮ‬when they are used in a sentence. If not used in a
sentence, such a word will be ‫ َﻣْﺒ ِﲏﱞ‬. For example, ‫ﻴﺖ‬
ُ َ‫ اَﻟْﺒ‬on its own, out of a sentence, will
have a ‫ﺿ ﱞﻢ‬
َ.

EXERCISE

‫ َﻣْﺒ ِ ﱞ‬or ‫ب‬

1. State with reason whether the following words are ‫ﲏ‬ ٌ ‫ ُﻣ ْﻌَﺮ‬.
i. ‫َِﲰ َﻊ‬ v. ِ ‫ﻳﻜ‬
‫ْﺴ ْﺮ َن‬ َ
ii. ‫ُﻣْﻨ ُﺬ‬ vi. ‫ٰﻟﻜ ﱠﻦ‬ِ
ِ
iii. ‫ﺼ ُﺮ‬
ُ ‫ﻳـَْﻨ‬ vii. ‫ﻚ‬ َ ‫ٰذﻟ‬
iv. ‫ﻀ ِﺮﺑْ َﻦ‬
ْ َ‫ﻳ‬ viii. ‫اِ ْﲰَﻌِﻲ‬
ْ

28
Section 2.4
‫ﺎم ْاﻷَ ْﺳ َﻤ ِﺎء اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺒﻨِﻴﱠ ِﺔ‬ َ ‫ – أَﻗ‬Types of Indeclinable Nouns
ُ ‫ْﺴ‬
The types of ُ‫ اَْﻷَ ْﲰَﺎءُ اﻟْ َﻤْﺒﻨِﻴﱠﺔ‬are as follows:
1.‫ﻀ َﻤﺎﺋُِﺮ‬
‫( اَﻟ ﱠ‬personal pronouns)
2. ُ‫ﺻ ْﻮﻟَﺔ‬
ُ ‫( اَْﻷَ ْﲰَﺎءُ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻮ‬relative pronouns)
3. ِ‫ﺎرة‬ ِْ ‫( أَ ْﲰَﺎء‬demonstrative pronouns)
َ ‫اﻹ َﺷ‬ ُ
ِ ‫( أَ ْﲰَﺎء ْاﻷَﻓْـﻌ‬those nouns which have the meaning of verbs)
4. ‫ﺎل‬ َ ُ
ِ ‫( أَ ْﲰﺎء ْاﻷَﺻﻮ‬those nouns which denote a sound)
5. ‫ات‬َْ ُ َ
ِ ‫( أَ ْﲰﺎء اﻟﻈﱠﺮ‬adverbs)
6. ‫ف‬ ْ َُ
ِ ‫( أَ ْﲰﺎء اﻟْ ِﻜﻨَﺎﻳ‬those nouns which indicate an unspecified quantity)
7. ‫ﺎت‬َ َُ
8. ‫ﺐ اﻟْﺒِﻨَﺎﺋِ ﱡﻰ‬
ُ ‫( اَﻟْ ُﻤﺮﱠﻛ‬numerical phrase)
َ

In the following pages, we will look at each of these in detail.

29
Section 2.4.1
‫ﻀ َﻤﺎﺋُِﺮ‬
‫ – اَﻟ ﱠ‬Personal Pronouns

We have discussed ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋُِﺮ‬

َ before. Now, we will look at them in greater detail.
Definition: ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋُِﺮ‬ ِ ) are those words, which refer to the speaker (‫ )ﻣﺘَ َﻜﻠﱢﻢ‬or the
َ (singular: ‫ﺿﻤْﻴـٌﺮ‬
َ ٌ ُ
second person (‫ﺣﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ ِ ِ
َ ) or the third person (‫ﺐ‬ٌ ‫) َﻏﺎﺋ‬.
There are two types of dameers:
1. ‫ﻀ ِﻤْﻴـ ُﺮ اﻟْﺒَﺎ ِرُز‬
‫ – اَﻟ ﱠ‬Visible or Independent Pronoun: It is that dameer, which is visible and has a
distinct form. It appears on its own, unattached to another word (known as ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ ) ُﻣْﻨـ َﻔﺼ‬or
attached to another word (known as ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫) ُﻣﺘﱠﺼ‬.
2. ِ
ُ‫اﻟْ ُﻤ ْﺴﺘَﱰ‬ ‫ﻀ ِﻤْﻴـُﺮ‬
‫ – اَﻟ ﱠ‬Hidden or Implied Pronoun: It is that dameer, which is not visible but is
implied.
Note: A hidden dameer can only appear in ‫ﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟ ﱠﺮﻓْ ِﻊ‬
َ . (refer to Table 2.2)
Below are tables showing different forms that the dameers will assume in the various conditions
(haalaat).

30
 ‫‪Table 2.1‬‬
‫ﺿ ِﻤﻴـﺮ ﻣ ْﻨـ َﻔ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫) َِ‬
‫ﺼ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﺿﻤ ْﻴـ ٌﺮ َﻣ ْﺮﻓُﻮعٌ ُﻣ ْﻨـ َﻔﺼ ٌﻞ ‪َ (also called‬ﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟ ﱠﺮﻓْ ِﻊ ‪) in‬ﺑَﺎ ِرٌز( َ ْ ٌ ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ُﻫ َﻮ‬ ‫ﺐ‬‫َواﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ُﳘَﺎ‬ ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨﻴَﺔٌ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُﻫ ْﻢ‬ ‫ﺐ‬‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬
‫ِﻫ َﻲ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ ﻣﺆﻧﱠ ٌ ِ‬
‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬ ‫َو ُ َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُﳘَﺎ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴﺔٌ ﻣﺆﻧﱠ ٌ ِ‬
‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬ ‫َ َُ‬
‫ُﻫ ﱠﻦ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ‬
‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬
‫ﺖ‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛﺮ ﺣ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫أَﻧْ َ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ ‫َو ُ ٌ َ‬
‫أَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴﺔٌ ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛﺮ ﺣ ِ‬
‫َ ُ ٌ َ‬
‫أَﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﺣﺎﺿٌﺮ‬
‫أَﻧْ ِ‬ ‫ﺚﺣ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﺖ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ ‫َواﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ َ‬
‫ﺚﺣ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫أَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨﻴَﺔٌ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ َ‬
‫ﺚﺣ ِ‬
‫ﱳ‬
‫أَﻧْـ ُ ﱠ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ ‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ َ‬
‫أَﻧَﺎ‬ ‫ﺚ(‬ ‫وِ‬
‫اﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣﺘَ َﻜﻠﱢ ٌﻢ ) ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ و ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ‬ ‫َ‬
‫َْﳓ ُﻦ‬ ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔٌ َو ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣﺘَ َﻜﻠﱢ ٌﻢ ) ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ و ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ‬
‫ﺚ(‬

‫‪e.g.‬‬ ‫َر ُﺟ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ُﻫ َﻮ‬

‫َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬ ‫ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأٌ‬
‫) َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﱠﺮﻓْ ِﻊ(‬

‫‪31‬‬
 ‫‪Table 2.2‬‬
‫ﺿ ِﻤﻴـﺮ ﻣﺘ ِ‬
‫ﱠﺼ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﺿ ِﻤﻴـﺮ ﻣﺮﻓُﻮ ٌ ِ‬
‫ع ُﻣﺘﱠﺼ ٌﻞ ‪َ (also called‬ﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟ ﱠﺮﻓْ ِﻊ ‪ُ ٌ ْ َ in‬‬ ‫) َ ٌْ َْ‬

‫ﺑَﺎ ِرٌز‬ ‫ُﻣ ْﺴﺘَﺘٌِﺮ‬

‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ب ) ُﻫ َﻮ(‬
‫ﺿَﺮ َ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ﻀ ِﺮ ُ‬
‫ب ) ُﻫ َﻮ(‬ ‫ﻳَ ْ‬ ‫ﺐ‬‫َواﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬
‫ﻀ ِﺮﺑ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﺿَﺮﺑَﺎ )ا(‬
‫َ‬ ‫ﺎن )ا(‬ ‫ﻳَ ْ َ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨﻴَﺔٌ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬
‫ﻀ ِﺮﺑـُ ْﻮ َن )و(‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﺿَﺮﺑـُ ْﻮا )و(‬
‫َ‬ ‫ﻳَ ْ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺐ‬‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬
‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺖ ) ِﻫ َﻲ(‬
‫ﺿَﺮﺑَ ْ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ب ) ِﻫ َﻲ(‬
‫ﻀ ِﺮ ُ‬
‫ﺗَ ْ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ ﻣﺆﻧﱠ ٌ ِ‬
‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬ ‫َو ُ َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﺿَﺮﺑـَﺘَﺎ )ا(‬ ‫ﻀ ِﺮﺑ ِ‬
‫ﺎن )ا(‬ ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴﺔٌ ﻣﺆﻧﱠ ٌ ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ﺗَ ْ َ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬ ‫َ َُ‬
‫ﺿَﺮﺑْ َﻦ )ن(‬ ‫ﻀ ِﺮﺑْ َﻦ )ن(‬
‫ﻳَ ْ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ‫ﲨﻊ ﻣﺆﻧﱠ ٌ ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬ ‫َْ ٌ ُ َ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫وِ‬
‫ت(‬
‫ﺖ) َ‬
‫ﺿَﺮﺑْ َ‬
‫َ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺖ(‬ ‫ﻀ ِﺮ ُ‬
‫ب )أَﻧْ َ‬ ‫ﺗَ ْ‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﺣﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ ‫َ‬
‫ﺿَﺮﺑْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ )ﲤَُﺎ(‬ ‫ﻀ ِﺮﺑ ِ‬
‫ﺎن )ا(‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ﺗَ ْ َ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨﻴَﺔٌ ُﻣ َﺬﻛٌﺮ َﺣﺎﺿٌﺮ‬
‫ﺿَﺮﺑْـﺘُ ْﻢ ) ُْﰎ(‬ ‫ﻀ ِﺮﺑـُ ْﻮ َن )و(‬
‫ﺗَ ْ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﲨَْﻊ ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛﺮ ﺣ ِ‬
‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ٌُ ٌ َ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫وِ‬
‫ﺿَﺮﺑْﺖ )ت(‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ﲔ )ي(‬ ‫ﻀ ِﺮﺑِ ْ َ‬‫ﺗَ ْ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺚ َﺣﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ‬ ‫َ‬
‫ﺿَﺮﺑْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ )ﲤَُﺎ(‬ ‫ﻀ ِﺮﺑ ِ‬
‫ﺎن )ا(‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨﻴَﺔٌ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ﺗَ ْ َ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺚ َﺣﺎﺿٌﺮ‬
‫ﻀ ِﺮﺑْ َﻦ )ن(‬ ‫ﺚﺣ ِ‬
‫ﱳ )ﺗُ ﱠﻦ(‬‫ﺿَﺮﺑْـ ُ ﱠ‬‫َ‬ ‫ﺗَ ْ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ ‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ َ‬
‫وِ‬
‫ت(‬‫ﺖ) ُ‬ ‫ﺿَﺮﺑْ ُ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ب )أَﻧَﺎ(‬‫ﺿ ِﺮ ُ‬
‫أَ ْ‬ ‫ﺚ(‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣﺘَ َﻜﻠﱢ ٌﻢ ) ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ و ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ‬ ‫َ‬
‫ﺿَﺮﺑْـﻨَﺎ )ﻧَﺎ(‬
‫َ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ب ) َْﳓ ُﻦ(‬‫ﻀ ِﺮ ُ‬
‫ﻧَ ْ‬ ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔٌ َو ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣﺘَ َﻜﻠ ٌﻢ ) ُﻣ َﺬﻛٌﺮ و ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ‬
‫ﺚ(‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﱢ‬

‫‪32‬‬
 ‫‪Table 2.3‬‬
‫ﺿ ِﻤﻴﺮ ﻣ ْﻨـ َﻔ ِ‬
‫ﺼ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺐ ‪ِ َ in‬‬
‫ﺼِ‬ ‫ﻮب ﻣ ْﻨـ َﻔ ِ‬ ‫ﺿ ِﻤﻴﺮ ﻣ ْﻨﺼ ٌ ِ‬
‫ﱠﺼﻞ ‪ِ َ and‬‬
‫ﺿﻤ ٌﻴﺮ ُﻣﺘﱠﺼ ٌﻞ ‪ُ ٌ َ and‬‬ ‫ﺼ ٌﻞ ‪َ (also called‬ﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﻨﱠ ْ‬ ‫ﺼ ٌ ُ‬‫ﺿﻤ ٌﻴﺮ َﻣ ْﻨ ُ‬ ‫ﻮب ُﻣﺘ ٌ‬ ‫)َ ٌ َ ُ‬
‫ﺿ ِﻤﲑ ﻣْﻨﺼﻮب ﻣْﻨـ َﻔ ِ‬
‫ﺼ ٌﻞ )ﺑَﺎ ِرٌز(‬ ‫ﺿ ِﻤﲑ ﻣْﻨﺼﻮب ﻣﺘ ِ‬
‫ﱠﺼ ٌﻞ )ﺑَﺎ ِرٌز(‬
‫َ ٌَ ُ ٌ ُ‬ ‫َ ٌَ ُ ٌ ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫إِﻳﱠﺎﻩُ‬ ‫ﺿَﺮﺑَﻪُ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ه‬ ‫ﺐ‬‫َواﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬
‫إِﻳﱠﺎ ُﳘَﺎ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﺿَﺮﺑـَ ُﻬ َﻤﺎ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ﳘﺎ‬ ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨﻴَﺔٌ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬
‫إِﻳﱠﺎ ُﻫ ْﻢ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﺿَﺮﺑـَ ُﻬ ْﻢ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺐ‬‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬
‫إِﻳﱠﺎ َﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺿَﺮﺑـَ َﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ ﻣﺆﻧﱠ ٌ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬ ‫َو ُ َ‬
‫إِﻳﱠﺎ ُﳘَﺎ‬ ‫ﺿَﺮﺑـَ ُﻬ َﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﳘﺎ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴﺔٌ ﻣﺆﻧﱠ ٌ ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬ ‫َ َُ‬
‫إِﻳﱠﺎ ُﻫ ﱠﻦ‬ ‫ﺿَﺮﺑـَ ُﻬ ﱠﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﻦ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ‫ﲨﻊ ﻣﺆﻧﱠ ٌ ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬ ‫َْ ٌ ُ َ‬
‫إِﻳﱠﺎ َك‬ ‫ﻚ‬‫ﺿَﺮﺑَ َ‬ ‫ك‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬‫اﺣ ٌﺪ ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛﺮ ﺣ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َو ُ ٌ َ‬
‫إِﻳﱠﺎ ُﻛ َﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺿَﺮﺑَ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴﺔٌ ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛﺮ ﺣ ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ ُ ٌ َ‬
‫إِﻳﱠﺎ ُﻛ ْﻢ‬ ‫ﺿَﺮﺑَ ُﻜ ْﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﻢ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﺣﺎﺿٌﺮ‬
‫َ‬
‫إِﻳﱠﺎ ِك‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﻚِ‬ ‫ﺚﺣ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َ ََ‬ ‫ك‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ ‫َواﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ َ‬
‫إِﻳﱠﺎ ُﻛ َﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺚﺣ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﺿَﺮﺑَ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ‬‫َ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨﻴَﺔٌ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ َ‬
‫إِﻳﱠﺎ ُﻛ ﱠﻦ‬ ‫ﺚﺣ ِ‬
‫ﺿَﺮﺑَ ُﻜ ﱠﻦ‬‫َ‬ ‫ﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ ‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ َ‬
‫ي‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ‪2‬‬ ‫وِ‬
‫اﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣﺘَ َﻜﻠﱢ ٌﻢ ) ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ و ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ‬
‫إﻳﱠﺎ َ‬ ‫ﺿَﺮﺑَ ْﲏ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ي‬ ‫ﺚ(‬ ‫َ‬
‫إِﻳﱠﺎﻧَﺎ‬ ‫ﺿَﺮﺑـَﻨَﺎ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ﻧﺎ‬ ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔٌ و ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣﺘَ َﻜﻠﱢ ٌﻢ ) ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ و ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ‬
‫ﺚ(‬

‫‪e.g.‬‬ ‫ﻧَـ ْﻌﺒُ ُﺪ‬ ‫إِﻳﱠ َ‬

‫ﺎك‬ ‫‪You alone we worship.‬‬
‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ َﻣ َﻊ ﻓَﺎﻋِﻠِ ِﻪ‬ ‫ﺼِ‬
‫ﺐ(‬ ‫ﻮل ُﻣ َﻘ ﱠﺪ ٌم ) َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﻨﱠ ْ‬
‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ٌ‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫ن ‪Sometimes, a‬‬ ‫ﺿ ِﻤْﻴـٌﺮ ‪) is added before the‬ﻧُﻮ ُن اﻟْ ِﻮﻗَﺎﻳَِﺔ(‬ ‫ﺿَﺮﺑَِ ْﲏ ‪ to protect an i‘raab as in‬ﻳَﺎء َ‬
‫‪َ , which would otherwise be‬‬
‫ِ ِ‬ ‫‪).‬ﻣﺒ ِﲎ ﻋﻠَﻰ اﻟْ َﻔْﺘ ِﺢ ‪ is‬اَﻟْ ِﻔﻌﻞ اﻟْﻤ ِ‬
‫ﰊ ‪incorrectly read as‬‬‫ﺿَﺮِ ْ‬‫ﺎﺿﻰ ‪َ of‬ﻻ ُم اﻟْ َﻜﻠ َﻤﺔ‪َ (the  ‬‬ ‫ُْ َ‬ ‫َْ ﱞ َ‬

‫‪33‬‬
‫ﻞ )ﺑَﺎ ِرٌز( ‪There are two ways in which‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪. One is when it is preceded by‬ﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ ا ْﳉﱢﺮ ‪ِ appears in‬‬
‫ﺿﻤْﻴـٌﺮ ُﻣﺘﱠﺼ ٌ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫ﺟﱟﺮ ‪a‬‬
‫ف َ‬
‫ﺎف ‪َ ; and the other is when some other word is‬ﺣ ْﺮ ُ‬ ‫ﻀ ٌ‬‫‪ُ to it.‬ﻣ َ‬

‫‪Table 2.4‬‬
‫ﺿ ِﻤﻴـﺮ ﻣﺘ ِ‬
‫ﱠﺼ ٌﻞ )ﺑَﺎ ِرٌز(‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫) َِ‬
‫ور ُﻣﺘﱠﺼ ٌﻞ ‪َ (also called‬ﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟْ َﺠ ﱢﺮ ‪ُ ٌ ْ َ in‬‬
‫ﺿﻤ ْﻴـ ٌﺮ َﻣ ْﺠ ٌﺮ ٌ‬

‫ف اﻟْ َﺠ ﱢﺮ‬ ‫ﺑِﺤﺮ ِ‬ ‫ﺿﺎﻓَ ِﺔ‬‫ﺎﻹ َ‬ ‫ﺑِ ِْ‬

‫َْ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﻟَﻪُ‬ ‫َد ُارﻩُ‬ ‫ﺐ‬‫َواﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َﳍَُﻤﺎ‬ ‫َد ُارُﳘَﺎ‬ ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨﻴَﺔٌ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َﳍُ ْﻢ‬ ‫َد ُارُﻫ ْﻢ‬ ‫ﺐ‬‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬
‫َﳍَﺎ‬ ‫َد ُارَﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ ﻣﺆﻧﱠ ٌ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬ ‫َو ُ َ‬
‫َﳍَُﻤﺎ‬ ‫َد ُارُﳘَﺎ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴﺔٌ ﻣﺆﻧﱠ ٌ ِ‬
‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬ ‫َ َُ‬
‫َﳍُ ﱠﻦ‬ ‫َد ُارُﻫ ﱠﻦ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ‫ﲨﻊ ﻣﺆﻧﱠ ٌ ِ‬
‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ ٌ‬ ‫َْ ٌ ُ َ‬
‫ﻚ‬‫ﻟَ َ‬ ‫َد ُارَك‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﺣﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ ‫وِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ﻟَ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ‬ ‫َد ُارُﻛ َﻤﺎ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨﻴَﺔٌ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﺣﺎﺿٌﺮ‬
‫ﻟَ ُﻜ ْﻢ‬ ‫َد ُارُﻛ ْﻢ‬ ‫ﲨَْﻊ ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛﺮ ﺣ ِ‬
‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ ‫ٌُ ٌ َ‬
‫ﻚ‬‫ﻟَ ِ‬ ‫َد ُار ِك‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﺚ َﺣﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ ‫وِ‬
‫اﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ‬ ‫َ‬
‫ﺚﺣ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﻟَ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ‬ ‫َد ُارُﻛ َﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨﻴَﺔٌ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ َ‬
‫ﺚﺣ ِ‬
‫ﻟَ ُﻜ ﱠﻦ‬ ‫َد ُارُﻛ ﱠﻦ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ ‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ َ‬
‫ِ ْﱄ‬ ‫َدا ِر ْي‬ ‫ﺚ(‬ ‫وِ‬
‫اﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣﺘَ َﻜﻠﱢ ٌﻢ ) ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ و ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ‬ ‫َ‬
‫ﻟَﻨَﺎ‬ ‫َد ُارﻧَﺎ‬ ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔٌ َو ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣﺘَ َﻜﻠ ٌﻢ ) ُﻣ َﺬﻛٌﺮ و ُﻣ َﺆﻧ ٌ‬
‫ﺚ(‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﱢ‬

‫‪e.g.‬‬ ‫ﻟَﻪُ‬ ‫َد ُارﻩُ‬ ‫‪His house is his.‬‬

‫ور‬
‫ف َﺟﱟﺮ ‪َْ +‬ﳎُﺮ ٌ‬
‫َﺣ ْﺮ ُ‬ ‫ﺎف إِﻟَ ِﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻀ ٌ‬ ‫ﺎف ‪ُ +‬ﻣ َ‬ ‫ﻀ ٌ‬‫ُﻣ َ‬
‫اﳉَﱢﺮ(‬
‫ف ْ‬‫ﱠﺼﻞ ﳎﺮور ِﲝﺮ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫) ِ‬ ‫ﺿﺎﻓَِﺔ(‬ ‫ور ﺑِ ِْ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫) ِ‬
‫ﺿﻤﲑٌ ُﻣﺘ ٌ ٌَْ ٌ َْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ﺎﻹ َ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﲑٌ ُﻣﺘﱠﺼ ٌﻞ َْﳎٌﺮ ٌ‬ ‫َ‬

‫اﳉَﱢﺮ ‪Note: The dameer baariz in‬‬ ‫‪.‬ﻣﺘ ِ‬

‫ﱠﺼ ٌﻞ ‪َ will always be‬ﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ ْ‬ ‫ُ‬

‫‪34‬‬
‫ﺸﺄْ ِن‬‫ﺿ ِﻤ ْﻴـ ُﺮ اﻟ ﱠ‬
َ:
It is that ‫ﺐ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ‬ ِ ِ , which sometimes appears at the beginning of a sentence without a
ٌ ‫ﺿﻤْﻴـٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ‬ َ
‫( َﻣ ْﺮ َﺟ ٌﻊ‬an earlier word that it refers to). The sentence after it clarifies such a ‫ﺿ ِﻤْﻴـٌﺮ‬
َ.
e.g. ‫إِﻧﱠﻪُ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﻗَﺎﺋِ ٌﻢ‬ Indeed, the matter is that Zayd is standing.

‫ﺿ ِﻤ ْﻴـ ُﺮ اﻟ ِْﻘ ﱠ‬
‫ﺼ ِﺔ‬ َ:
It is that ‫ﱠﺚ‬ ٌ ‫ﺐ ُﻣ َﺆﻧ‬ ِ ِ , which sometimes appears at the beginning of a sentence without a
ٌ ‫ﺿﻤْﻴـٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ‬
َ
‫( َﻣ ْﺮ َﺟ ٌﻊ‬an earlier word that it refers to). The sentence after it clarifies such a ‫ﺿ ِﻤْﻴـٌﺮ‬
َ.
e.g. ٌ‫ﺎﻃ َﻤﺔُ ﻗَﺎﺋِ َﻤﺔ‬
ِ َ‫إِﻧـﱠﻬﺎ ﻓ‬
َ Indeed, the matter is that Fatimah is standing.

ْ ‫ﺿ ِﻤ ْﻴـ ُﺮ اﻟْ َﻔ‬

‫ﺼ ِﻞ‬ َ:
It is that ‫ﺿ ِﻤْﻴـٌﺮ‬ َ , which appears between a ٌ‫ ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬and a ‫ َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬for emphasis.
ِ
e.g. ‫ﺤ ْﻮ َن‬ َ ِ‫أُوٰﻟﺌ‬
ُ ‫ﻚ ُﻫ ُﻢ اﻟْ ُﻤ ْﻔﻠ‬ It is they who are successful.

EXERCISE

1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyze the following sentences, pointing out all the
dameers, as well as their type and haalaat.

i. ‫اﻟﻘﻄﺎر ﻗﺪم ﰱ وﻗﺘﻪ‬ iii. ‫ﺼَﺮﻧَﺎ‬

َ َ‫ﻧ‬
ii. ‫ﳓﻦ ﻧﺮزﻗﻚ‬ iv. ‫اﷲ ﻳﺮزﻗﻬﺎ و إﻳﺎﻛﻢ‬

35
Section 2.4.2
ُ ‫ اَْﻷَ ْﺳ َﻤﺎءُ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻮ‬- Relative Pronouns
ُ‫ﺻ ْﻮﻟَﺔ‬
ِ ِ
ُ ‫ ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ َﻣ ْﻮ‬is a ٌ‫ ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ َﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬whose purpose is understood through the sentence,
Definition: An ‫ﺻ ْﻮٌل‬
which comes after it, which is called ٌ‫ﺻﻠَﺔ‬ ِ.
An ‫ﻮل‬
ٌ ‫ﻮﺻ‬ ِ ِ
 ُ ‫ ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ َﻣ‬cannot form a complete part of a sentence on its own. It must have a ٌ‫ﺻﻠَﺔ‬
ِ is a ٌ‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﺧ ِﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬, which must have a ‫( ﺿ ِﻤﻴـﺮ‬visible or
which relates (refers back) to it. The ٌ‫ﺻﻠَﺔ‬ ََ ٌْ َ
hidden) referring to the ‫ﻮل‬
ٌ ‫ﻮﺻ‬ ِ
ُ ‫ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ َﻣ‬.

Table 2.5
(‫ﺻ ْﻮﻟَﺔُ ) ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛ ٌﺮ‬
ُ ‫اَْﻷَ ْﺳ َﻤﺎءُ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻮ‬

‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ِ‫و‬
َ ‫اَﻟﱠ ِﺬ ْي‬ who, that, which
ِ
ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨﻴَﺔ‬ ‫اَﻟﻠﱠ َﺬ ِان‬ those two who, that, which ‫َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﱠﺮﻓْ ِﻊ‬
ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬ ‫اَﻟﻠﱠ َﺬﻳْ ِﻦ‬ those two, who, that, which ‫اﳉَﱢﺮ‬
ْ ‫ﺐ َو‬ ِ‫ﺼ‬ ْ ‫َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﻨﱠ‬
‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ‬ ‫اَﻟﱠ ِﺬﻳْ َﻦ‬ those who, that, which

Table 2.6
ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮﻟَﺔُ ) ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬
(‫ﺚ‬ ُ ‫اَْﻷَ ْﺳ َﻤﺎءُ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻮ‬

‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ِ‫و‬ ‫اَﻟﱠِ ْﱵ‬ who, that, which

َ
ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬ ِ َ‫اَﻟﻠﱠﺘ‬
‫ﺎن‬ those two who, that, which ‫َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﱠﺮﻓْ ِﻊ‬
ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬ ِ ْ ‫اَﻟﻠﱠﺘَـ‬
‫ﲔ‬ those two, who, that, which ‫اﳉَﱢﺮ‬
ْ ‫ﺐ َو‬ ِ‫ﺼ‬ ْ ‫َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﻨﱠ‬
‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ‬ ‫اَ ﱠﻟﻼﺗِ ْﻰ‬ those who, that, which

‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ‬ ‫اَﻟﻠﱠ َﻮاﺗِ ْﻰ‬ those who, that, which

ِ
‫ﺼَﺮَك‬َ َ‫َﺟﺎءَ اﻟﱠﺬ ْي ﻧ‬
e.g. The man who helped you, came.
‫ﺎك‬ َ ‫ﺖ اﻟﻠﱠ َﺬﻳْ ِﻦ‬
َ َ‫ﺿَﺮﺑ‬ ُ ْ‫َرأَﻳ‬ I saw those two men who hit you.
‫ﱏ‬ ِ ‫أُ ِﺣ ﱡ ﱠ ِ ﱠ‬
ْ ‫ﺐ اﻟﺬﻳْ َﻦ َﻋﻠ ُﻤ ْﻮ‬
I love those men who taught me.

36
Additional Relative Pronouns:
1. ‫ َﻣﺎ‬and ‫َﻣ ْﻦ‬
 These are used for all genders and all numbers.
 The difference is that ‫ َﻣ ْﻦ‬is used for humans and ‫ َﻣﺎ‬is used for things (non-human).
ِ
e.g. َ ‫أَ ْﺣ ِﺴ ْﻦ ا ٰﱃ َﻣ ْﻦ أَ ْﺣ َﺴ َﻦ إِﻟَْﻴ‬
‫ﻚ‬ Show goodness to that person who has
shown goodness to you.
‫ﺖ‬ ُ ْ‫ﻗَـَﺮأ‬
َ ‫ت َﻣﺎ َﻛﺘَْﺒ‬ I read what you wrote.

2. ‫ي‬
‫ أَ ﱞ‬and ٌ‫أَﻳﱠﺔ‬
 They are generally ‫ب‬ َ ِ‫إ‬.
ٌ ‫ ُﻣ ْﻌَﺮ‬and used in ٌ‫ﺿﺎﻓَﺔ‬
 ‫ أَ ﱞ‬has the meaning of ‫اَﻟﱠ ِﺬ ْي‬.
‫ي‬
e.g. ‫ﺎب‬ ٍ َ‫ي ﻛِﺘ‬ ‫ِﻣ ْﻦ أَ ﱢ‬ from which book…
 ٌ‫ أَﻳﱠﺔ‬has the meaning of ‫اَﻟﱠِ ْﱵ‬.
e.g. ‫ﺖ‬ ٍ ‫أَﻳﱠﺔُ ﺑِْﻨ‬ which girl…

ِ َ‫ اِﺳﻢ ﻓ‬and an ‫اِﺳﻢ ﻣ ْﻔﻌﻮٍل‬, will have the effect of ‫اِﺳﻢ ﻣﻮﺻﻮٌل‬.
3. ‫ال‬, which appears before an ‫ﺎﻋ ٍﻞ‬ ُْ ُْ َ ُ ْ ُْ َْ ٌ ْ
ِ
ُ ‫اَﻟﻀﱠﺎ ِر‬
‫ب‬ ‫ب‬َ ‫ﺿَﺮ‬ َ ‫اَﻟﱠﺬ ْي‬
e.g. would equal
ِ
‫ب‬ُ ‫ﻀُﺮْو‬ ْ ‫اَﻟْ َﻤ‬ would equal ‫ب‬َ ‫ﺿ ِﺮ‬ ُ ‫اَﻟﱠﺬ ْي‬
‫اَﻟ ﱠﺴ ِﺎﻣ ُﻌ ْﻮ َن‬ would equal ‫اَﻟﱠ ِﺬﻳْ َﻦ َِﲰﻌُ ْﻮا‬

4. ‫ذُ ْو‬
According to the dialect of the tribe ‫ﺑـَﻨُـ ْﻮ ﻃَ ﱟﻰ‬, it is an ‫ﺻ ْﻮٌل‬ ِ
ُ ‫ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ َﻣ ْﻮ‬.
It is used for all genders and all numbers, without its form changing.

ِ
e.g. ‫ﻚ‬
َ َ‫ﺿَﺮﺑ‬َ ‫َﺟﺎءَ ذُ ْو‬ equals ‫ﻚ‬َ َ‫ﺿَﺮﺑ‬َ ‫َﺟﺎءَ اﻟﱠﺬ ْي‬ The one who hit you, came.
ِ ‫رأَﻳ‬
‫ﺿَﺮﺑَﻚ‬ َ ‫ﺖ ذُ ْو‬ ُ ْ‫َرأَﻳ‬ equals ‫ﻚ‬َ َ‫ﺿَﺮﺑ‬َ ‫ﺖ اﻟﱠﺬ ْي‬ُ َْ I saw the one who hit you.
ِ
‫ﻚ‬ َ ‫ت ﺑِ ُﺬ ْو‬
َ َ‫ﺿَﺮﺑ‬ ُ ‫َﻣَﺮْر‬ equals ‫ﻚ‬
َ َ‫ﺿَﺮﺑ‬ ‫ﱠ‬
َ ‫ت ﺑﺎﻟﺬ ْي‬ِ ُ ‫َﻣَﺮْر‬ I passed by the one who hit you.

37
‫‪Sentence Analysis:‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َﺟﺎءَ اﻟﱠﺬ ْي أَﺑـُ ْﻮﻩُ َﻋﺎﱂٌ‬ ‫‪That person whose father is knowledgeable, came.‬‬

‫َﻋﺎﻟِ ٌﻢ‬ ‫أَﺑُـ ْﻮﻩُ‬ ‫اﻟﱠ ِﺬ ْي‬ ‫ﺎء‬

‫َﺟ َ‬
‫ﺎف إِﻟَ ِﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻀ ٌ‬‫ﺎف ‪ُ +‬ﻣ َ‬ ‫ﻀ ٌ‬
‫ُﻣ َ‬

‫‪َ +‬ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ = ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ اِ ِْﲰﻴﱠﺔٌ‬ ‫ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأٌ‬

‫ِﺻﻠَﺔٌ‬ ‫ﺻ ْﻮٌل‬ ‫ِ‬

‫ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ َﻣ ْﻮ ُ‬

‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ ِْﱪﻳﱠﺔٌ‬ ‫ﻓَ ِ‬

‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ ‪+‬‬

‫‪EXERCISE‬‬
‫‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab, and analyze the following sentences.‬‬

‫‪i.‬‬ ‫أﻳﻦ اﻟﺬي ﺿﺮب زﻳﺪا‬

‫اﷲ ﻳﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ ﰱ اﻷرض ‪ii.‬‬
‫ﺟﺎءت اﻟﻠﺘﺎن ﺗﺴﻜﻨﺎن أﻣﺎﻣﻨﺎ ‪iii.‬‬
‫إن اﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻛﻔﺮوا ﻻ ﻳﺪﺧﻠﻮن اﳉﻨﺔ ‪iv.‬‬

‫‪38‬‬
‫‪Section 2.4.3‬‬
‫‪ – Demonstrative Pronouns‬أَﺳﻤﺎء ْاﻹ َﺷﺎرةِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َْ ُ‬

‫ﺎرةِ ‪Definition: An‬‬ ‫‪ is that noun, which is used to point at something. These nouns are of‬اِ ْﺳﻢ ِْ‬
‫اﻹ َﺷ َ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫‪of two types.‬‬
‫ﺐ ‪i.‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪: It is used for pointing at something near.‬اَﻟْ َﻘﺮﻳْ ُ‬
‫‪ii.‬‬ ‫‪: It is used for pointing at something far.‬اَﻟْﺒَﻌِْﻴ ُﺪ‬

‫‪Table 2.7‬‬
‫ْﻤ َﺬ ﱠﻛ ِﺮ‬ ‫ِِ‬
‫أَ ْﺳ َﻤﺎءُ ْاﻹ َﺷ َﺎرة ﻟﻠ ُ‬
‫ﻟِ ْﻠ َﻘ ِﺮﻳْ ِ‬
‫ﺐ‬ ‫ﻟِ ْﻠﺒَ ِﻌ ْﻴ ِﺪ‬
‫وِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ٰﻫ َﺬا‬ ‫‪this‬‬ ‫‪ٰ that‬ذﻟ َ‬
‫ﻚ‬

‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔٌ‬ ‫ٰﻫ َﺬ ِان‬ ‫ٰذاﻧِ َ‬

‫‪these‬‬ ‫‪those‬‬
‫َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﱠﺮﻓْ ِﻊ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ ‫َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﱠﺮﻓْ ِﻊ‬
‫…‪two‬‬ ‫…‪two‬‬

‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔٌ‬ ‫َذﻳْﻨِ َ‬
‫‪these‬‬ ‫ﺼِ‬ ‫‪those‬‬ ‫ﺼِ‬
‫ٰﻫ َﺬﻳْ ِﻦ‬ ‫اﳉَﱢﺮ‬
‫ﺐ َو ْ‬ ‫َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﻨﱠ ْ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ ‫اﳉَﱢﺮ‬
‫ﺐ َو ْ‬ ‫َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﻨﱠ ْ‬
‫…‪two‬‬ ‫…‪two‬‬
‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ‬ ‫ٰﻫ ُﺆَﻻ ِء‬ ‫‪these‬‬ ‫‪ those‬أُوٰﻟﺌِ َ‬
‫ﻚ‬

‫‪Table 2.8‬‬
‫أَ ْﺳﻤﺎء ْاﻹ َﺷﺎرةِ ﻟِﻠْﻤ َﺆﻧﱠ ِ‬
‫ﺚ‬ ‫َ ُ‬ ‫َُ‬
‫ﻟِ ْﻠ َﻘ ِﺮﻳْ ِ‬
‫ﺐ‬ ‫ﻟِ ْﻠﺒَ ِﻌ ْﻴ ِﺪ‬
‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬‫وِ‬ ‫ٰﻫ ِﺬﻩِ‬ ‫ﻚ‬
‫َ‬ ‫‪this‬‬ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻠ َ‬ ‫‪that‬‬

‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔٌ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗَ ِ‬ ‫ﺗَﺎﻧِ َ‬

‫‪these‬‬ ‫‪those‬‬
‫ﺎن‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﱠﺮﻓْ ِﻊ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ ‫َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﱠﺮﻓْ ِﻊ‬
‫…‪two‬‬ ‫…‪two‬‬

‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔٌ‬ ‫ﺗَـْﻴﻨِ َ‬
‫َﻫﺎﺗَـ ْ ِ‬ ‫‪these‬‬ ‫ﺼِ‬ ‫‪those‬‬ ‫ﺼِ‬
‫ﲔ‬ ‫اﳉَﱢﺮ‬
‫ﺐ َو ْ‬ ‫َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﻨﱠ ْ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ ‫اﳉَﱢﺮ‬
‫ﺐ َو ْ‬ ‫َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﻨﱠ ْ‬
‫…‪two‬‬ ‫…‪two‬‬
‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ‬ ‫ٰﻫ ُﺆَﻻ ِء‬ ‫‪these‬‬ ‫‪ those‬أُوٰﻟﺌِ َ‬
‫ﻚ‬

‫ﺎب‬ ‫ٰذﻟِ َ ِ‬
‫‪e.g.‬‬ ‫ﻚ اﻟْﻜﺘَ ُ‬ ‫‪that book‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﱢﺴﺎءُ‬
‫ٰﻫ ُﺆَﻻء اﻟﻨ َ‬ ‫‪these women‬‬
‫ﺎل‬ ‫أُوٰﻟﺌِ َ‬
‫ﻚ اﻟﱢﺮ َﺟ ُ‬ ‫‪those men‬‬

‫‪39‬‬
Notes:
1. The ‫ ك‬of ِ‫ﺎرة‬ ِْ ‫ )اَﻟْﺒَﻌِْﻴ ُﺪ( اِ ْﺳﻢ‬is sometimes changed according to the number of persons being
َ ‫اﻹ َﺷ‬ ُ
addressed. The meaning will not be affected.
e.g. ‫ٰذﻟِ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ َرﺑﱡ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ‬ He is the Lord of both of you.
ِ َ‫ ﻣ َﺸﺎر إِﻟ‬is a ‫ﺎف‬
2. If the ‫ﻴﻪ‬ ٌ ُ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ ِْ ‫ اِ ْﺳﻢ‬will come after the ‫ﺎف إِﻟَ ِﻴﻪ‬
َ ‫ ُﻣ‬, then the ِ‫اﻹ َﺷ َﺎرة‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ ُﻣ‬.
ُ
e.g. َ ُ‫ﻛِﺘَﺎﺑ‬
‫ﻚ ٰﻫ َﺬا‬ This book of yours.

3. If the ِ‫ﺎرة‬ ِْ ‫ اِ ْﺳﻢ‬occurs as a ٌ‫ ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬, then the ‫ َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬will generally be a ٌ‫ﻧَ ِﻜﺮة‬.
َ ‫اﻹ َﺷ‬ ُ َ
‫ﺎب‬ ِ
e.g. ٌ َ‫ٰﻫ َﺬا ﻛﺘ‬ This is a book.
ِ should be added between the ٌ‫ﻣﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬,
However, if the ‫ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬ َ is also ٌ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬, then a suitable ‫ﺿﻤْﻴـٌﺮ‬
َ ُْ
which is an ِ‫ﺎرة‬ ِ
ِْ ‫ا ْﺳﻢ‬, and the ‫ َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬for it to remain a complete sentence.
َ ‫اﻹ َﺷ‬ ُ
e.g. ‫ﺎب‬ ِ
ُ َ‫ ٰﻫ َﺬا ُﻫ َﻮ اﻟْﻜﺘ‬This is the book.
If no ٌ‫ﺿ ِﻤﲑ‬
َ is added, it would be an incomplete sentence.
e.g. ‫ﺎب‬ ِ
ُ َ‫ٰﻫ َﺬا اﻟْﻜﺘ‬ This book

4. If the ‫ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬ ِ to be added between the ٌ‫ ﻣﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬and

َ is a ‫ﺎف‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ ُﻣ‬, then there will be no need for a ٌ‫ﺿﻤﲑ‬
َ ُْ
the ‫ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬
َ.
ِ ِ‫ٰﻫ َﺬا اﺑﻦ اﻟْﻤﻠ‬
‫ﻚ‬
e.g. َ ُْ This is the son of the king.

ِْ ‫اِ ْﺳﻢ‬. However, they do not have any special

َ َ‫( ُﻫﻨ‬there) are also ِ‫اﻹ َﺷ َﺎرة‬
5. ‫ ُﻫﻨَﺎ‬or ‫( ٰﻫ ُﻬﻨَﺎ‬here) and ‫ﺎك‬ ُ
rules.

Sentence Analysis:

‫ﺲ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ﻧَﻔ ْﻴ‬ ‫اﻟْ َﻘﻠَ ُﻢ‬ ‫ٰﻫ َﺬا‬ This pen is precious.
ِْ ‫اِ ْﺳﻢ‬
‫ ُﻣ َﺸ ٌﺎر إِﻟَ ِﻴﻪ‬+ ِ‫اﻹ َﺷ َﺎرة‬ ُ

ٌ‫َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ = ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ اِ ِْﲰﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ ِْﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬ + ٌ‫ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬

EXERCISE

1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab, and analyze the following sentences.

i.‫ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة ﻗﺪﳝﺔ‬ iv. ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺣﺠﺮة واﺳﻌﺔ‬

ii. ‫أوﻟﺌﻚ ﲡﺎر ﺻﺎدﻗﻮن‬ v. ‫ﻫﺆﻻء ﻃﻼب اﳌﺪرﺳﺔ‬
iii. ‫ﻫﺬان وﻟﺪان ﻣﻬﺬﺑﺎن‬ vi. ‫ﻫﺬان اﻟﻮﻟﺪان ﻣﻬﺬﺑﺎن‬

40
Section 2.4.4
ِ ‫ – أَ ْﺳﻤﺎء ْاﻷَﻓْـ َﻌ‬Those Nouns Which Have the Meaning of Verbs
‫ﺎل‬ َُ

Definition: These are nouns that have the meaning of verbs.

That which has the meaning of ‫ﺎﺿﻲ‬ِ ‫اَﻟْ ِﻔﻌﻞ اﻟْﻤ‬, gives the noun after it a raf‘; and the one which has
َ ُْ
ِ ‫اﳊ‬
the meaning of ‫ﺎﺿ ُﺮ‬َْ ‫اَْﻷ َْﻣُﺮ‬, gives the noun after it a nasb.

Table 2.9
ِ ‫اَﻟ ِْﻔ ْﻌﻞ اﻟْﻤ‬
Nouns in the Meaning of ‫ﺎﺿﻲ‬ َ ُ
Noun Verb Meaning Example
‫ﺎت‬
َ ‫َﻫْﻴـ َﻬ‬ ‫ﺑـَ ُﻌ َﺪ‬ beyond, far from ‫ﺎت َزﻳْ ٌﺪ أَ ْن ﻳـَ ْﻔ َﻌ َﻞ ٰﻫ َﺬا‬
َ ‫َﻫْﻴـ َﻬ‬ It is far from (beyond)
Zayd to do this.
‫َﺷﺘﱠﺎ َن‬ ‫ اِﻓْـﺘَـَﺮ َق‬what a difference, ِ ‫اﳉ‬
‫ﺎﻫ ِﻞ‬ ِ ‫ﲔ اﻟْ َﻌ‬
َْ ‫ﺎﱂ َو‬ َ ْ َ‫َﺷﺘﱠﺎ َن ﺑـ‬ What a difference there is
there is a difference between the learned and
between the ignorant!
‫َﺳ ْﺮ َﻋﺎ َن‬ ‫ع‬
َ ‫أَ ْﺳَﺮ‬ hastened, made quick ‫َﺳ ْﺮ َﻋﺎ َن َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ Zayd hastened.

Table 2.10
ِ ‫اَْﻷَﻣﺮ اﻟْﺤ‬
Nouns in the Meaning of ‫ﺎﺿ ُﺮ‬ َ ُْ
Noun Verb Meaning Example
‫ُرَوﻳْ َﺪ‬ ‫أَْﻣ ِﻬ ْﻞ‬ give respite, ‫ُرَوﻳْ َﺪ َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬ Give Zayd respite.
let him be slow
َ‫ﺑـَْﻠﻪ‬ ‫َد ْع‬ leave, give up ‫ﺑـَْﻠﻪَ اﻟﺘﱠـ َﻔ ﱡﻜَﺮ ﻓِْﻴ َﻤﺎ َﻻ‬ Give up thinking about

َ ‫ﻳـَ ْﻌﻨِْﻴ‬
that which does not
‫ﻚ‬ concern you.
‫ﻚ – َﻫﺎ‬
َ َ‫ُد ْوﻧ‬ ‫ُﺧ ْﺬ‬ take ‫ﱭ‬ََ ‫ﻚ اﻟﻠﱠ‬
َ َ‫ُد ْوﻧ‬ Take the milk.

‫ﻚ‬
َ ‫َﻋﻠَْﻴ‬ ‫اِﻟَْﺰْم‬ hold on to, ‫ﱠﱵ‬ِ ِ َ ‫َﻋﻠَْﻴ‬
ْ ‫ﻚ ﺑ ُﺴﻨ‬
Hold on to my
incumbent on you Sunnah.
‫َﺣﻴﱠـ َﻬ ْﻞ – َﺣ ﱠﻲ‬ ‫ﺖ – َﻋ ﱢﺠ ْﻞ‬ ِ ْ‫اِﺋ‬
come, hasten ِ‫ﺼ َﻼة‬‫َﺣ ﱠﻲ َﻋﻠَﻰ اﻟ ﱠ‬ Come to salaah.

‫ﺖ – َﻫﻠُ ﱠﻢ‬
َ ‫َﻫْﻴ‬ ‫أَﻗْﺒِ ْﻞ‬ come, hasten

Notes:
1. There are some other nouns which have the meaning of verbs. These are as follows:
ِ ْ‫ – اِﺋ‬come) ِ ‫ – اِﺳﺘ ِﺠ‬accept)
‫ﺎل‬
َ ‫ﺖ( ﺗَـ َﻌ‬ ‫ﲔ‬َ ْ ‫ﺐ( اٰﻣ‬
ْ َْ
‫ﺻ ْﻪ‬ (‫ﺖ‬
ْ ‫ – اُ ْﺳ ُﻜ‬keep quite) ِ َ‫ – اِ ْﻛﺘ‬suffice)
‫ﻒ( ﻓَـ َﻘ ْﻂ‬
َ

41
 ِ ‫ – اِﻋ ِﻂ( ﻫ‬bring, give)
‫ﺎت‬ َ ْ َ ‫ – ﺗَـﺒَـ ﱠﻌ ْﺪ َﻋ ﱢ ْﲏ( إِﻟَْﻴ‬away from me)
‫ﻚ َﻋ ﱢ ْﲏ‬
ِ‫ – ِﺟﺊ ﺑِِﻪ ِﻋْﻨ ِﺪي( ﻋﻠَﻰ ﺑِﻪ‬bring him/it to me)
‫ْ َ ﱠ‬ ْ

2. Some of these nouns are inflectable, i.e. their form changes.

ِ ‫ﻫﺎﺗِﲔ ﻫﺎﺗِﻴﺎ ﻫ ِﺎﰐ ﻫﺎﺗُـﻮا ﻫﺎﺗِﻴﺎ ﻫ‬
i. ‫ﺎت‬ َ َ َ ْ َ ْ َ َ َ َْ َ
ِِ
e.g. َ ْ ‫ﻗُ ْﻞ َﻫﺎﺗُـ ْﻮا ﺑـُْﺮٰﻫﻨَ ُﻜ ْﻢ إِ ْن ُﻛْﻨﺘُ ْﻢ ٰﺻﺪﻗ‬
‫ﲔ‬
Say: bring your proof, if you are truthful.
ii. ‫ﺎل‬
َ ‫ﺗَـ َﻌ‬ ‫ﺎﱄ ﺗَـ َﻌﺎﻟَْﻮا ﺗَـ َﻌﺎﻟَﻴَﺎ‬ ْ ِ ‫ﲔ ﺗَـ َﻌﺎﻟَﻴَﺎ ﺗـَ َﻌ‬ َ ْ َ‫ﺗَـ َﻌﺎﻟ‬
e.g. ‫اﻵﻳﺔ‬...‫ﺐ ﺗـَ َﻌﺎﻟَْﻮا إِ َﱃ َﻛﻠِ َﻤ ٍﺔ‬
ِ ‫ﻗُﻞ ﻳٰﺄَ ْﻫﻞ اﻟْ ِﻜٰﺘ‬
َ ْ
Say: O people of the book! Come to a word…
َِ ‫ﻓَـﺘَـﻌﺎﻟَﲔ أُﻣﺘـﱢﻌ ُﻜ ﱠﻦ و أُﺳﱢﺮﺣ ُﻜ ﱠﻦ ﺳﺮاﺣﺎ‬
‫ﲨْﻴ ًﻼ‬
e.g. ً ََ ْ َ َ ْ َ َ ْ َ
Then, come, I will make provision for you and release you with kindness.

Section 2.4.5
ِ ‫ﺻﻮ‬
‫ات‬ َ ْ َ‫ – أَ ْﺳ َﻤﺎءُ ْاﻷ‬Those Nouns Which Denote a Sound

‫أُ ْح أُ ْح‬ To denote a cough.

‫ف‬ ْ ُ‫أ‬ To denote pain.
‫ﺑَ ْﺦ‬ To denote happiness, pleasure.
‫ﻧَ ﱠﺦ‬ To make a camel sit.
‫ﺎق‬
َ ‫َﻏ‬ To denote the cawing of a crow.

42
Section 2.4.6
ِ ‫ – أَﺳﻤﺎء اﻟْﻈُﺮ‬Adverbs
‫وف‬ ُ ُ َْ
ٍ ‫ اِﺳﻢ ﻇَﺮ‬is that noun, which gives us an idea of the place or time when (or
Definition: An ‫ف‬ ْ ُْ
where) some work is done.

ِ ‫ أَ ْﲰﺎء اﻟﻈﱡﺮ‬are of two kinds: ‫ﺎن‬

‫وف‬ ِ ‫ف اﻟﱠﺰﻣ‬ ِ
ُ َُ َ ُ ‫( ﻇَْﺮ‬adverb of time) and ‫ف اﻟْ َﻤ َﻜﺎن‬
ُ ‫( ﻇَْﺮ‬the adverb of place).

ِ ‫ف اﻟ ﱠﺰﻣ‬
‫ﺎن‬ َ ُ ‫ – ﻇَْﺮ‬Adverb of Time:
1. ‫إِ ْذ‬ (when)
It gives the meaning of past tense even when it appears before ٌ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬ ِ
 َ ‫ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ ُﻣ‬.
 ِْ ِ‫ ﲨﻠَﺔٌ ا‬or a ‫ﲨﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔ‬.
The sentence after ‫ إِ ْذ‬could be a ٌ‫ﲰﻴﱠﺔ‬ ُْ ْ ُْ
e.g. ‫َو اذْ ُﻛُﺮْوا إِ ْذ أَﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ ﻗَﻠِْﻴ ٌﻞ‬ Remember when you were less.
‫ﺖ‬ِ ‫اﻋ َﺪ ِﻣﻦ اﻟْﺒـﻴ‬ ِ ‫و إِ ْذ ﻳـﺮﻓَﻊ إِﺑـ ٰﺮِﻫﻴﻢ اﻟْ َﻘﻮ‬
e.g. َْ َ َ ُ ْ ْ ُ َْ َ And when Ibrahim (Allah give him peace)
raised the foundation of the House (Ka‘ba).
 Sometimes, it gives the meaning of suddenness (ٌ‫ﺎﺟﺄَة‬
َ ‫) ُﻣ َﻔ‬.
ِ َ‫ﺧﺮﺟﺖ إِ ْذ ﻣ ِﺪﻳـﺮ اﻟْﻤ ْﺪرﺳ ِﺔ ﻧ‬
‫ﺎﻇٌﺮ‬
e.g. َ َ َ ُْ ُ ُ ْ َ َ I came out and suddenly the principal of
the school was watching.

2. ‫إِذَا‬ (when)
 ِ ‫اَﻟْ ِﻔﻌﻞ اﻟْﻤ‬.
It gives the meaning of future tense even when it appears before ‫ﺎﺿﻰ‬ َ ُْ
 It gives the meaning of ‫ط‬
ٌ ‫ َﺷ ْﺮ‬and ٌ‫ َﺟَﺰاء‬but does not give either a ‫ َﺟ ْﺰٌم‬.
 ِْ ِ‫ ﲨﻠَﺔٌ ا‬or preferably a ٌ‫ﲨﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔ‬.
The sentence after ‫ إِذَا‬could be a ٌ‫ﲰﻴﱠﺔ‬ ُْ ْ ُْ
ٌ‫ﺲ ﻃَﺎﻟِ َﻌﺔ‬ ِ ‫اٰﺗِﻴ‬
e.g.
ُ ‫ﱠﻤ‬
ْ ‫ﻚ اذَا اﻟﺸ‬
َْ I will come to you when the sun rises.
ِ‫اِ َذا ﺟﺎء ﻧَﺼﺮ اﷲ‬
e.g. ُْ َ َ When the help of Allah will come.

Sometimes, it gives the meaning of suddenness (ٌ‫ﺎﺟﺄَة‬ ِ

 َ ‫) ُﻣ َﻔ‬, in which case ‫ إ َذا‬must be
ِْ ِ‫ﲨﻠَﺔٌ ا‬.
followed by a ٌ‫ﲰﻴﱠﺔ‬ ُْ
‫ﻒ‬ ِ ‫ﺧﺮﺟﺖ ﻓَِﺈذَا اﻟْ َﻜ ْﻠ‬
e.g. ٌ ‫ﺐ َواﻗ‬
ُ ُ ْ ََ I came out and suddenly the dog was standing.

3. ‫َﻣ ٰﱴ‬ (when)

 It can be used as an interrogative (‫ﺎم‬ ِ ِ
ٌ ‫)ا ْﺳﺘ ْﻔ َﻬ‬.
e.g. ‫َﻣ ٰﱴ ﺗُ َﺴﺎﻓُِﺮ؟‬ When will you travel?

43
  It can also be used as a conditional noun in which case the ‫ط‬
ٌ ‫ َﺷ ْﺮ‬and ٌ‫ َﺟَﺰاء‬get a ‫ َﺟ ْﺰٌم‬.
e.g. ‫ﺻ ْﻢ‬
ُ َ‫ﺼ ْﻢ أ‬
ُ َ‫َﻣ ٰﱴ ﺗ‬ When you fast, I will fast.

4. ‫ﻒ‬َ ‫( َﻛْﻴ‬how)
 It is used to enquire condition.
e.g. ‫ﻚ؟‬
َ ُ‫ﻒ َﺣﺎﻟ‬
َ ‫َﻛْﻴ‬ How are you? (In what condition are you?)

5. ‫أَﻳﱠﺎ َن‬ (when)

 It is used as an interrogative.
e.g. ‫أَﻳﱠﺎ َن ﻳـَ ْﻮُم اﻟﺪﱢﻳْ ِﻦ؟‬ When will be the day of recompense?

Note: ‫ أَﻳﱠﺎ َن‬is used only to enquire of great events of the future as compared to ‫ َﻣ ٰﱴ‬.

ِ ‫( أَْﻣ‬yesterday)
6. ‫ﺲ‬
ِ ‫ﱐ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ أَْﻣ‬
‫ﺲ‬ ِ
e.g. ْ َ‫َﺟﺎء‬ Zayd came to me yesterday.

7. ‫( ُﻣْﻨ ُﺬ – ُﻣ ْﺬ‬since, from)

 These two can be used to convey the beginning of a time period.
e.g. ْ ‫ ُﻣ ْﺬ ﻳـَ ْﻮِم‬/‫َﻣﺎ َرأَﻳْـﺘُﻪُ ُﻣْﻨ ُﺬ‬
‫اﳉُ ُﻤ َﻌ ِﺔ‬ I have not seen him since Friday.

 They can also be used to refer to the entire period.

ِ ‫ ُﻣ ْﺬ ﻳـَﻮَﻣ‬/‫َﻣﺎ رأَﻳْـﺘُﻪُ ُﻣْﻨ ُﺬ‬
‫ﲔ‬
e.g. ْ َ I have not seen him for two days.

 These can be used as ‫ﺟﱟﺮ‬ ِ

َ ‫ف‬
ُ ‫( َﺣ ْﺮ‬followed by a ‫ور‬
ٌ ‫ ) َْﳎُﺮ‬or as ‫ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ‬, which will be regarded as
a ٌ‫ ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬followed by a ٌ‫ َﻣ ْﺮﻓُﻮع‬.
e.g. ْ ‫ ُﻣ ْﺬ ﻳـَ ْﻮِم‬/‫َﻣﺎ َرأَﻳْـﺘُﻪُ ُﻣْﻨ ُﺬ‬
‫اﳉُ ُﻤ َﻌ ِﺔ‬ I have not seen him since Friday.
‫اﳉُ ُﻤ َﻌ ِﺔ‬
ْ ‫ ُﻣ ْﺬ ﻳـَ ْﻮُم‬/‫َﻣﺎ َرأَﻳْـﺘُﻪُ ُﻣْﻨ ُﺬ‬

‫ﻗَ ﱡ‬
8. ‫ﻂ‬ (not, never)
 It is used to emphasize ‫ﺎﺿﻰ اَﻟْ َﻤْﻨ ِﻔ ﱡﻰ‬
ِ ‫اَﻟْﻤ‬.
َ
‫ﺿﺮﺑْـﺘُﻪُ ﻗَ ﱡ‬
‫ﻂ‬
e.g. َ َ ‫َﻣﺎ‬ I never hit him.

9. ‫ض‬
ُ ‫( َﻋ ْﻮ‬never)
 It is used to emphasize ‫ع اﻟْ َﻤْﻨ ِﻔ ﱡﻰ‬
ُ ‫ﻀﺎ ِر‬
َ ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ‬.
e.g. ُ ‫ﺿ ِﺮﺑُﻪُ َﻋ ْﻮ‬
‫ض‬ ْ َ‫َﻻ أ‬ I will never hit him.

44
 10. ‫ﻞ‬
ُ ‫ﻗَـْﺒ‬ (before)
‫ﺑـَ ْﻌ ُﺪ‬ (after)
ِ ٌ ‫ ﻣﻀ‬is not mentioned, but intended.
 They are ‫ َﻣْﺒ ِﲏﱞ‬when they are ‫ﺎف‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ ُﻣ‬and the ‫ﺎف إِﻟَﻴﻪ‬ َُ
e.g. (‫َي ِﻣ ْﻦ ﻗَـْﺒ ِﻞ ُﻛ ﱢﻞ َﺷ ْﻲ ٍء َو ِﻣ ْﻦ ﺑـَ ْﻌ ِﺪ ُﻛ ﱢﻞ َﺷ ْﻲ ٍء‬ ِ ِ ِِ
ْ ‫ﻟﻠّﻪ ْاﻷَ ْﻣُﺮ ﻣ ْﻦ ﻗَـْﺒ ُﻞ َو ﻣ ْﻦ ﺑـَ ْﻌ ُﺪ )أ‬
Allah’s is the decision before and after (i.e., before everything and after
everything).
ِ
e.g. َ ‫َي ِﻣ ْﻦ ﻗَـْﺒﻠ‬
(‫ﻚ‬ ِ ِ
ْ ‫أَﻧَﺎ َﺣﺎﺿٌﺮ ﻣ ْﻦ ﻗَـْﺒ ُﻞ )أ‬
I have been present from before (i.e., before you).

(‫َي ﺑـَ ْﻌ َﺪ ٰﻫ َﺬا‬ ِ

e.g. ْ ‫َﻣ ٰﱴ َﲡﻴﺌُـﻨَﺎ ﺑـَ ْﻌ ُﺪ؟ )أ‬
When will you come after (i.e., after this)?
ِ َ‫ﺎف إِﻟ‬
 When the ‫ﻴﻪ‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ ُﻣ‬is mentioned, they will be ‫ب‬
ٌ ‫ ُﻣ ْﻌَﺮ‬.
e.g. ‫ِﻣ ْﻦ ﻗَـْﺒ ِﻞ اﻟْ َﻔْﺘ ِﺢ‬ before the victory

ِ ‫ف اﻟْﻤ َﻜ‬
‫ﺎن‬ َ ُ ‫ – ﻇَْﺮ‬Adverb of Place:
1. ‫ﺚ‬
ُ ‫( َﺣْﻴ‬where)
 It is generally ‫ﺎف‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ ُﻣ‬to a sentence.
‫ﺲ‬ ِ ِ ِ
e.g. ٌ ‫ﺚ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ َﺟﺎﻟ‬
ُ ‫ﺲ َﺣْﻴ‬
ْ ‫ا ْﺟﻠ‬ Sit where Zayd is sitting.

2. ‫ﱠام‬
ُ ‫ﻗَﺪ‬ (in front of)
‫ﻒ‬
ُ ‫( َﺧ ْﻠ‬behind)
 It has the same rules as those for ‫ﻞ‬
ُ ‫ ﻗَـْﺒ‬and ‫ﺑـَ ْﻌ ُﺪ‬.
e.g. (ُ‫ﱠاﻣﻪُ َو َﺧﻠْ َﻔﻪ‬
َ ‫َي ﻗُﺪ‬
ْ ‫ﻒ )أ‬
ُ ‫ﱠام َو َﺧ ْﻠ‬
ُ ‫ﱠﺎس ﻗُﺪ‬
ُ ‫ﻗَ َﺎم اﻟﻨ‬
The people stood in front and behind.
(i.e., in front of him and behind him).

3. ‫ﺖ‬
ُ ‫َْﲢ‬ (under)
‫ﻓَـ ْﻮ ُق‬ (on top, above)
 It has the same rules as those for ‫ﻞ‬
ُ ‫ ﻗَـْﺒ‬and ‫ﺑـَ ْﻌ ُﺪ‬.
e.g. (ِ‫ﱠﺠَﺮة‬
َ ‫ﱠﺠَﺮةِ َو ﻓَـ ْﻮ َق اﻟﺸ‬
َ ‫ﺖ اﻟﺸ‬
َ ‫َي َْﲢ‬
ْ ‫ﺖ َو َﻋ ْﻤٌﺮو ﻓَـ ْﻮ ُق )أ‬
ُ ‫ﺲ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ َْﲢ‬
َ َ‫َﺟﻠ‬
Zayd sat under and ‘Amr above. (i.e., under the tree and above the tree.)

45
 4. ‫ِﻋْﻨ َﺪ‬ (by, at, near, with)
e.g. ‫ﺎل ِﻋْﻨ َﺪ َزﻳْ ٍﺪ‬
ُ ‫اَﻟْ َﻤ‬ The money is with Zayd.

Note: ‫ ِﻋْﻨ َﺪ‬will get a kasrah if it is preceded by ‫ ِﻣ ْﻦ‬.

e.g. ِ‫ِﻣ ْﻦ ﻋِْﻨ ِﺪ اﷲ‬ from Allah

5. ‫أَ ّٰﱏ‬/‫( أَﻳْ َﻦ‬where, how)

 It is used for ‫ﺎم‬ ِ ِ
ٌ ‫ا ْﺳﺘ ْﻔ َﻬ‬.
e.g. ‫ﺐ؟‬ ُ ‫أَ ّٰﱏ ﺗَ ْﺬ َﻫ‬
ُ ‫ﺐ – أَﻳْ َﻦ ﺗَ ْﺬ َﻫ‬ Where are you going?

 It is used for ‫ط‬

ٌ ‫ط( َﺷ ْﺮ‬
ٌ ‫ َﺷ ْﺮ‬and ٌ‫ َﺟَﺰاء‬will get a ‫) َﺟ ْﺰٌم‬.
‫ﺲ‬ ِ ِ
e.g. ْ ‫ﺲ أَ ْﺟﻠ‬
ْ ‫أَﻳْ َﻦ َْﲡﻠ‬ Where you sit, I will sit.
‫ﺲ‬ ِ ِ ٰ
ْ ‫ﺲ أَ ْﺟﻠ‬
ْ ‫أَ ّﱏ َْﲡﻠ‬

6. ‫ﻟَ ُﺪ ْن‬/‫( ﻟَ ٰﺪى‬at, by, near, with (same meaning as ‫)) ِﻋْﻨ َﺪ‬.
e.g. ‫ﺎل ﻟَ ٰﺪى َزﻳْ ٍﺪ‬
ُ ‫اَﻟْ َﻤ‬ The money is with Zayd.
‫ِﻣ ْﻦ ﻟَ ُﺪ ْن َﺣ ِﻜْﻴ ٍﻢ َﺧﺒِ ٍْﲑ‬ From the All-Wise, All-knowing

 ‫ ﻟَ ُﺪ ْن‬is generally used with ‫ ِﻣ ْﻦ‬.

 The difference between ‫ﻟَ ُﺪ ْن‬/‫ ﻟَ ٰﺪى‬and ‫ ِﻋْﻨ َﺪ‬is that in the case of ‫ﻟَ ٰﺪى‬/‫ﻟَ ُﺪ ْن‬, the possessed
thing must be present with the person; whereas, in the case of ‫ ِﻋْﻨ َﺪ‬, the possessed
thing need not be present with the person.

Note: That adverb which is mu‘rab and is mudaaf to a sentence or the word ‫إِ ْذ‬, could be mabny
‘ala  al-fath or it could get the i‘raab according to the ‘aamil.
e.g. the adverb ‫ ﻳﻮم‬which is mudaaf in the following ayahs:
‫ﲔ ِﺻ ْﺪﻗُـ ُﻬ ْﻢ‬ ِ ِ ٰ ‫ ٰﻫ َﺬا ﻳـﻮم ﻳـْﻨـ َﻔﻊ‬and ‫اﻟﺼ ِﺪﻗِﲔ ِﺻ ْﺪﻗُـﻬﻢ‬
َ ْ ‫اﻟﺼﺪﻗ‬
ّ ُ َ َ َْ ُْ َ ْ ّٰ ‫ٰﻫ َﺬا ﻳـَ ْﻮُم ﻳـَْﻨـ َﻔ ُﻊ‬
This is the day when the truth of the truthful will benefit them.

‫ ُو ُﺟ ْﻮﻩٌ ﻳـﱠ ْﻮَﻣﺌِ ٍﺬ‬and ‫ُو ُﺟ ْﻮﻩٌ ﻳـﱠ ْﻮُﻣﺌِ ٍﺬ‬

faces on that day

46
Section 2.4.7
ِ ‫ – أَﺳﻤﺎء اﻟْ ِﻜﻨَﺎﻳ‬Those Nouns Which Indicate an Unspecified Quantity
‫ﺎت‬َ ُ َْ

1. ‫ َﻛ َﺬا‬،٬‫َﻛ ْﻢ‬ (so many, so much, how many, how much)

 It is used for numbers
e.g. ‫َﻛ ْﻢ ِد ْرَﳘًﺎ ِﻋْﻨ َﺪ َك‬ How many silver coins do you have?
ِ
e.g. ً‫ت َﻛ َﺬا ِد ْرﳘﺎ‬
ُ ‫َﺧ ْﺬ‬
َ‫أ‬ I took this many silver coins.
 ‫ َﻛ َﺬا‬is also used in the meaning of “such and such.”
e.g. ْ ِ ‫ﺎل‬
‫ﱄ َﻛ َﺬا َو َﻛ َﺬا‬ َ َ‫ﻗ‬ He said to me such and such.
2. ‫ﺖ‬
َ ْ‫ َذﻳ‬،٬‫ﺖ‬
َ ‫َﻛْﻴ‬ (so and so, such and such)
e.g. ‫ﺖ‬
َ ْ‫ﺖ ذَﻳ‬
َ ‫ﺖ َﻛْﻴ‬
ُ ‫ﻗُـ ْﻠ‬ or ‫ﺖ‬
َ ْ‫ﺖ َو َذﻳ‬
َ ‫ﺖ َﻛْﻴ‬
ُ ‫ﻗُـ ْﻠ‬ I said such and such.
e.g. ‫ﺖ‬
َ ْ‫ﺖ ذَﻳ‬
َ ‫ﺖ َﻛْﻴ‬
ُ ‫ﻓَـ َﻌ ْﻠ‬ or ‫ﺖ‬
َ ْ‫ﺖ َو ذَﻳ‬
َ ‫ﺖ َﻛْﻴ‬
ُ ‫ﻓَـ َﻌ ْﻠ‬ I did such and such.

Section 2.4.8
‫ﺐ اﻟْﺒِﻨَﺎﺋِ ﱡﻲ‬
ُ ‫ – اَﻟ ُْﻤ َﺮﱠﻛ‬Numerical Phrase
This has been discussed earlier. Please, refer to section 1.3.3.

47
Section 2.5
ُ‫ – اَْﻷَ ْﺳ َﻤﺎءُ اﻟْ ُﻤ ْﻌ َﺮﺑَﺔ‬Types of Declinable Nouns
These are of two types:

ٌ ‫ﺼ ِﺮ‬
1. ‫ف‬ َ ‫ُﻣ ْﻨ‬
Definition: It is that noun which does not have two causes from amongst the nine causes
that prevent declension (‫ف‬ِ ‫ﺼﺮ‬
ْ ‫ﺎب َﻣْﻨ ِﻊ اﻟ ﱠ‬
ُ َ‫ )أَ ْﺳﺒ‬or one such cause, which is equivalent to two.
 It accepts all harakaat as well as a tanween.

ٍ ‫ﻏَﻴـﺮ ﻣ ْﻨﺼ ِﺮ‬

2. ‫ف‬ َ ُ ُْ
Definition: It is that noun which has two causes from amongst the nine causes that prevent
declension (‫ف‬ِ ‫ﺼﺮ‬
ْ ‫ﺎب َﻣْﻨ ِﻊ اﻟ ﱠ‬
ُ َ‫ )أَ ْﺳﺒ‬or one such cause, which is equivalent to two.
 Such a noun does not accept a kasrah and never gets a tanween. Thus in ‫اﳉَﱢﺮ‬
ْ ُ‫ َﺣﺎﻟَﺔ‬, it gets
a fathah in place of a kasrah.

ِ ‫ﺼﺮ‬
‫ف‬ ْ ‫ﺎب َﻣ ْﻨ ِﻊ اﻟ ﱠ‬
ُ َ‫أَ ْﺳﺒ‬
The nine reasons/causes which prevent i‘raab changes are as follows:
1. ‫َﻋ ْﺪ ٌل‬ 2. ‫ﻒ‬ٌ‫ﺻ‬
ْ ‫َو‬ 3. ‫َﻋﻠَ ٌﻢ‬ 4. ‫ﺚ‬ٌ ‫ﺗَﺄْﻧِْﻴ‬ 5. ٌ‫ﺠ َﻤﺔ‬
ْ ‫ُﻋ‬
6. ‫ﺐ‬ ِ ِ َ‫ﻒ و ﻧـُﻮ ٌن َزاﺋِ َﺪﺗ‬ِ 8. ‫َوْز ُن ﻓِ ْﻌ ٍﻞ‬
ٌ ‫ﺗَـ ْﺮﻛْﻴ‬ 7. ‫ﺎن‬ ْ َ ٌ ‫أَﻟ‬ 9. ‫اﳉُ ُﻤ ْﻮِع‬
ْ ‫ﲨَْ ُﻊ ُﻣْﻨﺘَـ َﻬﻰ‬

1. ‫ﻋ ْﺪ ٌل‬:
َ It refers to the case when a noun gives up its original form to assume a new form.
‫ َﻋ ْﺪ ٌل‬is of two types:
i. ‫ﻲ‬ ِِ
‫ﻋ ْﺪ ٌل َْﲢﻘﻴﻘ ﱞ‬:
َ It refers to the case when a noun has an original.
e.g. In the case of ‫ث‬ُ ‫( ﺛَُﻼ‬three and three together), the original is ٌ‫ﺛََﻼﺛَﺔٌ ﺛََﻼﺛَﺔ‬.

‫ﻋ ْﺪ ٌل ﺗَـ ْﻘ ِﺪﻳ ِﺮ ﱞ‬:

ii. ‫ي‬ َ It refers to the case when it is assumed that a noun had an original because it
ٍ ‫ َﻏﻴـﺮ ﻣْﻨﺼ ِﺮ‬by the Arabs.
is used as ‫ف‬ َ ُ ُْ
The Arabs use ‫ ﻋُ َﻤ ُﺮ‬as ‫ف‬ ٍ ‫ َﻏﻴـﺮ ﻣْﻨﺼ ِﺮ‬. However, there is only one apparent cause, ‫ﻋﻠَﻢ‬.
e.g. َ ُ ُْ ٌَ
Therefore, in order to keep the grammar rule intact, it is assumed that the
ِ ‫ﻋ‬.
second reason is ‫ َﻋ ْﺪ ٌل‬, and the original for ‫ ُﻋ َﻤ ُﺮ‬is ‫ﺎﻣٌﺮ‬ َ

48
2. ‫ﻒ‬
ٌ‫ﺻ‬ ِ
ْ ‫و‬:َ It refers to the case when a word is such an ٌ‫ﺻ َﻔﺔ‬, which was originally devised to give
a descriptive (‫ﻲ‬ ِ ‫ )و‬meaning. If such a ٌ‫ ِﺻ َﻔﺔ‬is on the wazn of (‫)أَﻓْـﻌﻞ‬, and does not accept taa
‫ﺻﻔ ﱞ‬
َْ َ
for its ‫ﱠﺚ‬
ٌ ‫ ُﻣ َﺆﻧ‬, it will be ghayr munsarif.3
e.g. ‫أَ ْﲪَُﺮ‬ red ‫ﻀُﺮ‬
َ ‫َﺧ‬
ْ ‫ أ‬green

3. ‫ َﻋﻠَ ٌﻢ‬: It refers to the case when a noun is a proper noun (name of a person, place or thing).
e.g. ِ َ‫ﻓ‬
ُ‫ﺎﻃ َﻤﺔ‬ female name
‫ت‬
ُ ‫ﻀَﺮَﻣ ْﻮ‬
َ ‫َﺣ‬ name of a region in Yemen

ٌ ‫ﺗَﺄْﻧِْﻴ‬: It refers to the case when a noun is such a feminine proper noun, which has one of
4. ‫ﺚ‬
the following characteristics:
ُ‫َﻣ ﱠﻜﺔ‬
4
i. It ends with a round ‫ة‬. For example, ُ‫ﻃَْﻠ َﺤﺔ‬
ii. It does not end with a round ‫ ة‬and has more then three letters. For example, ‫ﺐ‬
ُ َ‫ َزﻳْـﻨ‬.
iii. It is a non-Arabic three letter word and the middle letter is ‫ﺳﺎﻛِ ٌﻦ‬
َ . For example, ‫ﺼُﺮ‬
ِ
ْ ‫ﻣ‬.

Note:
All nouns ending in ُ‫ﺼﻮَرة‬ ِ ِ
 ُ ‫ﻒ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻘ‬
ُ ‫ ) ٰى( اَْﻷَﻟ‬or ُ‫ودة‬
َ ‫ﻒ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻤ ُﺪ‬
ُ ‫ )اء( اَْﻷَﻟ‬are feminine.
e.g. ‫ُﺣْﺒـ ٰﻠﻰ‬ pregnant

ُ‫ﲪََْﺮاء‬ red
Those feminine nouns which end in ُ‫ﻮرة‬ ِ ِ
 َ‫ﺼ‬ ُ ‫ﻒ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻘ‬
ُ ‫ ) ٰى( اَْﻷَﻟ‬or ُ‫ودة‬
َ ‫ﻒ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻤ ُﺪ‬
ُ ‫ )اء( اَْﻷَﻟ‬are
equivalent to two reasons.

5. ٌ‫ﺠ َﻤﺔ‬
ْ ‫ﻋ‬:
ُ It refers to the case when a word, which is a proper noun in a non-Arabic language,
has either
 more than three letters ِ ‫إِﺑـﺮ‬
e.g. ‫اﻫْﻴ ُﻢ‬َْ
or
 has three letters and the middle letters is ‫ﺤﱢﺮٌك‬
َ َ‫ ُﻣﺘ‬. e.g. ‫( َﺷﺘَـُﺮ‬name of a fort)
˗ Thus, ‫ح‬ ٌ ‫ ﻧـُ ْﻮ‬is munsarif because its middle letter is not ‫ ُﻣﺘَ َﺤﱢﺮٌك‬.
Note: The difference between ‫ح‬ ِ ِ
ٌ ‫ ﻧـُ ْﻮ‬and ‫ﺼُﺮ‬ ْ ‫ ﻣ‬is that ‫ﺼُﺮ‬
ْ ‫ ﻣ‬is a feminine noun because of
it being the name of a country, while ‫ح‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ ﻧـُ ْﻮ‬is not a feminine noun. Thus, ‫ﺼُﺮ‬ ْ ‫ ﻣ‬is ghayr
3
Al-Nahw al-Wadih li al-Madaris al-Ibtida’iyyah, 3:122 and ‘Abdullah ibn ‘Aqeel, Sharh  ibn  ‘Aqeel  ‘ala  Alfiyyat  
ibn Maalik, (Karachi: Qadeemi Kutubkhana, n.d.), 4: 5.
4
Even though ُ‫ ﻃَﻠْ َﺤﺔ‬is a masculine proper noun, it is considered a feminine noun because of the presence of a
round ‫ة‬. For more discussion on the subject, see Section 3.4.

49
 munsarif because of ‫ﺚ‬ٌ ‫ ﺗَﺄْﻧِْﻴ‬and ‫ َﻋﻠَ ٌﻢ‬, while ‫ح‬
ٌ ‫ ﻧـُ ْﻮ‬is munsarif because it only has ‫ َﻋﻠَ ٌﻢ‬. ٌ‫ُﻋ ْﺠ َﻤﺔ‬
does not apply to either.

6. ‫ﺐ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ﺗَـ ْﺮﻛْﻴ‬: It refers to the case when a word is a combination of two words. This word must be
an ‫ َﻋﻠَ ٌﻢ‬.
e.g. ‫ﻚ‬
‫ﺑـَ ْﻌﻠَﺒَ ﱡ‬ name of a city in Lebanon
‫ت‬
ُ ‫ﻀَﺮَﻣ ْﻮ‬ َ ‫َﺣ‬ name of a region in Yemen

ِ َ‫ﻒ و ﻧـُﻮ ٌن َزاﺋِ َﺪﺗ‬

‫ﺎن‬ ِ ِ ِ ) and one of
7. ْ َ ٌ ‫أَﻟ‬: It refers to the case when a noun ends with an ‫ﻒ‬
ٌ ‫ أَﻟ‬and ‫ﹷان( ﻧـُ ْﻮ ٌن‬
the following is true:
 The ‫ﻒ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ أَﻟ‬and ‫ ﻧـُ ْﻮ ٌن‬appear at the end of such a noun which is an ‫( َﻋﻠَ ٌﻢ‬proper noun).
e.g. ‫ُﻋﺜْ َﻤﺎ ُن‬ ‫ِﻋ ْﻤَﺮا ُن‬
Note: Thus, the word ‫ﺳ ْﻌ َﺪا ٌن‬ َ (grass) is not ghayr munsarif because it is not a proper
noun.
ِ
 The ‫ﻒ‬ٌ ‫ أَﻟ‬and ‫ ﻧـُ ْﻮ ٌن‬appear at the end of such a ٌ‫ ِﺻ َﻔﺔ‬whose feminine is not on the ‫ َوْز ٌن‬of
ٌ‫ﻓَـ ْﻌ َﻼﻧَﺔ‬.
e.g. ‫ْﺮا ُن‬
َ‫( َﺳﻜ‬intoxicated) ‫( َﻋﻄْ َﺸﺎ ُن‬thirsty)
Their feminines are not on the ‫ َوْز ٌن‬of ٌ‫ﻓَـ ْﻌ َﻼﻧَﺔ‬.
Note: Thus, the word ‫ ﻧَ ْﺪ َﻣﺎ ٌن‬is not ghayr munsarif because its feminine (ٌ‫ )ﻧَ ْﺪ َﻣﺎﻧَﺔ‬is on
the ‫ َوْز ٌن‬of ٌ‫ﻓَـ ْﻌ َﻼﻧَﺔ‬.
 If the ‫ﻒ‬ ِ ِ َ‫ ) َزاﺋِ َﺪﺗ‬but are part of the original
ٌ ‫ أَﻟ‬and ‫ ﻧـُ ْﻮ ٌن‬are not extra or added (i.e. not ‫ﺎن‬
letters of the words, then it will not be ghayr munsarif. For example, ‫ﺷْﻴﻄَﺎ ٌن‬. َ

8. ‫ َوْز ُن ﻓِ ْﻌ ٍﻞ‬: It refers to the case when a proper noun (‫ ) َﻋﻠَ ٌﻢ‬is on the ‫ َوْز ٌن‬of a verb.
e.g. ‫أَ ْﲪَ ُﺪ‬ It is on the ‫ َوْز ٌن‬of the verb ‫ﻞ‬
ُ ‫أَﻓْـ َﻌ‬
ِ , as mentioned above.
Note: Only one wazn amongst the wazn wi’l, (‫ )أَﻓْـ َﻌﻞ‬applies to ٌ‫ﺻ َﻔﺔ‬

9. ‫اﳉُ ُﻤ ْﻮِع‬
ْ ‫ﲨَْ ُﻊ ُﻣْﻨﺘَـ َﻬﻰ‬: It is that plural, which has after the ‫اﳉَ ْﻤ ِﻊ‬
ْ ‫ﻒ‬ ِ
ُ ‫( أَﻟ‬alif of plural) one of the
following:
two ‫ﺤﱢﺮٌك‬ ِ ‫ ﻣﺴ‬mosques
i. َ َ‫ ُﻣﺘ‬letters. e.g. ‫ﺎﺟ ُﺪ‬ ََ
ii. one ‫ﺸ ﱠﺪ ٌد‬
َ ‫ ُﻣ‬letter. e.g. ‫اب‬
‫ َد َو ﱡ‬animals
iii. three letters, the middle letter being ‫ﺳﺎﻛِ ٌﻦ‬
َ. e.g. ‫ َﻣ َﻔﺎﺗِْﻴ ُﺢ‬keys

50
 Note:
 If any of the above words ends with a round ‫ة‬, it will not be ghayr munsarif.
e.g. ٌ‫ﺻﻴَﺎﻗِﻠَﺔ‬
َ polishers
 ‫اﳉُ ُﻤ ْﻮِع‬
ْ ‫ ﲨَْ ُﻊ ُﻣْﻨﺘَـ َﻬﻰ‬is equivalent to two reasons/causes.

Note: A ghayr munsarif noun will get a kasrah in ‫اﳉَﱢﺮ‬

ْ ُ‫ َﺣﺎﻟَﺔ‬in the following cases:
 when it is ‫ﺎف‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ ُﻣ‬. e.g. ‫ﺎﺟ ِﺪ ِﻫ ْﻢ‬ِ ‫ﺻﻠﱠﻴﺖ ِﰲ ﻣﺴ‬
ََ ْ ُ َْ I prayed in their mosque.
 when it has ‫ ال‬before it. e.g. ِ‫ﺖ إِ َﱃ اﻟْﻤ َﻘﺎﺑ ِﺮ‬
ُ ‫َذ َﻫْﺒ‬ I went to the graves.
َ

EXERCISE
1. Mention with reason why the following words are munsarif or ghayr munsarif.

i. ‫زﻓﺮ‬ v. ‫ﺻﺤﺮاء‬
ii. ‫ﺷﻴﻄﺎن‬ vi. ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ‬
iii. ‫أﺳﻮد‬ vii. ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ‬
iv. ‫أﺳﺎﺗﺬة‬ viii. ‫ﻏﻀﺒﺎن‬

2. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out with reason the words which are ghayr munsarif.
i. ‫ﻣﺮرت ﺑﻌﻤﺮ‬
ii. ‫ﺣﻀﺮ أﲪﺪ ﻣﻊ زﻳﻨﺐ إﱃ ﻣﻜﺔ‬
iii. ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺌﻠﻮا ﻋﻦ أﺷﻴﺎء‬
iv. ‫ﺳﻘﻴﺖ وﻟﺪا ﻋﻄﺸﺎن‬
v. ‫ﻳﺎ أﻫﻞ ﻳﺜﺮب‬
vi. ‫ﻣﺮرت ﲟﺴﺎﺟﺪ‬
vii. ‫ﺷﻬﺮ رﻣﻀﺎن اﻟﺬى أﻧﺰل ﻓﻴﻪ اﻟﻘﺮان‬
viii. ‫إن اﷲ اﺻﻄﻔﻰ ادم و ﻧﻮﺣﺎ و ال إ ٰﺑﺮﻫﻴﻢ و ال ﻋﻤﺮان ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻌﻠﻤﲔ‬

51
Section 2.6
ِ ‫ – إِ ْﻋﺮاب أَﻗْﺴ ِﺎم ْاﻷَﺳﻤ ِﺎء اﻟْﻤ ْﻌﺮﺑ‬I‘raab of the Various Types of Mu‘rab Nouns
‫ﺎت‬ََ ُ َ ْ َ ُ َ
We begin this section by defining some terms. Then, we will outline the i‘raab of each of the
various types of mu‘rab nouns.

‫ﺢ‬ ِ ‫اَﻟ ﱠ‬: It is that noun, which does not end with any of the ‫ف اﻟْﻌِﻠﱠ ِﺔ‬
ُ ‫ﺼﺤ ْﻴ‬ ُ ‫)ي – ا – و( ُﺣُﺮْو‬.
e.g. ‫ﻞ‬ ٌ ‫َر ُﺟ‬
‫ﺼ ِﺤ ْﻴ ِﺢ‬
‫ﺎم اﻟ ﱠ‬ ِ
َ ‫اَﻟْ َﻘﺎﺋ ُﻢ َﻣ َﻘ‬: It is that noun, which ends with a ‫ و‬or ‫ ي‬preceded by a ‫ ُﺳ ُﻜ ْﻮ ٌن‬.
e.g. ‫َدﻟْ ٌﻮ‬ bucket
‫ﱯ‬
ٌ ْ َ‫ ﻇ‬deer
‫اَْﻷَ ْﺳ َﻤﺎءُ اﻟ ﱢ‬: These are six nouns, which are not in their diminutive form (‫ﺼﻐﱠٌﺮ‬
ُ‫ﺴﺘﱠﺔُ اَﻟ ُْﻤ َﻜﺒﱠـ َﺮة‬ َ ‫) ُﻣ‬. These
are as follows:
‫َب‬
ٌ‫أ‬ father ‫ﻓَ ٌﻢ‬ mouth
‫َخ‬
ٌ‫أ‬ brother ‫َﻫ ٌﻦ‬ something insignificant
‫َﺣ ٌﻢ‬ brother-in-law ‫ذُ ْو‬ someone who possesses something

‫ﺼ ْﻮُر‬ ِ ِ
ُ ‫اَْﻻ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟ َْﻤ ْﻘ‬: It is that noun, which ends with an ُ‫ﺼ َﻮرة‬
ُ ‫ﻒ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻘ‬
ُ ‫) ٰى( اَْﻷَﻟ‬.
e.g. ‫ﺳﻰ‬ ٰ ‫ُﻣ ْﻮ‬
‫ص‬ ِ
ُ ‫اَْﻻ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟ َْﻤ ْﻨـ ُﻘ ْﻮ‬: It is that noun which ends with a ‫ ي‬preceded by a kasrah.
e.g. ‫ﺎﺿﻰ‬ ِ ‫اَﻟْ َﻘ‬

Before we list the i‘raab of each of the various types of mu‘rab nouns in a table, it would
be useful to remember that a simple method of illustrating different i‘raab is to make three
sentences on the following pattern:

‫َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟ ﱠﺮﻓْ ِﻊ‬ ِ‫ﺼ‬

‫ﺐ‬ ْ ‫َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﻨﱠ‬ ‫َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟْ َﺠ ﱢﺮ‬
‫َﺟﺎءَ زﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ ‫ﺖ َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬
ُ ْ‫َرأَﻳ‬ ‫ت ﺑَِﺰﻳْ ٍﺪ‬
ُ ‫َﻣَﺮْر‬
Zayd came. I saw Zayd. I passed by Zayd.

In these three sentences, the word ‫ زﻳ ٌﺪ‬is displaying the different i‘raab according to the
changing state (ٌ‫ﺣﺎﻟَﺔ‬ ِ‫ﺼ‬
َ ). Thus, it is has a dammah in ‫ َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﱠﺮﻓْ ِﻊ‬, and a fathah in ‫ﺐ‬ ْ ‫ َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﻨﱠ‬, and a
kasrah in ‫اﳉَﱢﺮ‬
ْ ُ‫ َﺣﺎﻟَﺔ‬.

52
 ‫‪Table 2.11‬‬
‫إِ ْﻋﺮاب أَﻗْﺴ ِﺎم ْاﻷَﺳﻤ ِﺎء اﻟْﻤ ْﻌﺮﺑ ِ‬
‫ﺎت‬‫ْ َ ُ ََ‬ ‫َ ُ َ‬

‫‪Noun Type‬‬ ‫َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟ ﱠﺮﻓْ ِﻊ‬ ‫ﺼِ‬

‫ﺐ‬ ‫َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﻨﱠ ْ‬ ‫َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟْ َﺠ ﱢﺮ‬ ‫‪Examples for Each State‬‬
‫ﺼ ِﺤْﻴ ُﺢ‬
‫ف اﻟ ﱠ‬ ‫ﺼ ِﺮ ُ‬
‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ ْﻔَﺮُد اﻟْ ُﻤْﻨ َ‬ ‫ﺿ ﱠﻤﺔٌ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ﻓَـْﺘ َﺤﺔٌ‬ ‫َﻛ ْﺴَﺮةٌ‬ ‫َﺟﺎءَ زﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ ‫َرأَﻳْ ُ‬
‫ﺖ َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬ ‫ت ﺑَِﺰﻳْ ٍﺪ‬
‫َﻣَﺮْر ُ‬
‫ﺼ ِﺤْﻴ ِﺢ‬
‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ ْﻔَﺮُد اﻟْ َﻘﺎﺋِ ُﻢ َﻣ َﻘ َﺎم اﻟ ﱠ‬ ‫ﺿ ﱠﻤﺔٌ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ﻓَـْﺘ َﺤﺔٌ‬ ‫َﻛ ْﺴَﺮةٌ‬ ‫ﱯ‬
‫ٰﻫ َﺬا ﻇَ ْ ٌ‬ ‫ﺖ ﻇَْﺒـﻴًﺎ‬‫َرأَﻳْ ُ‬ ‫ت ﺑِﻈَ ٍْﱯ‬ ‫َﻣَﺮْر ُ‬
‫ِ ٍ‪5‬‬
‫ف‬‫ﺼ ِﺮ ُ‬‫اَ ْﳉَ ْﻤ ُﻊ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﻜ ﱠﺴُﺮ اﻟْ ُﻤْﻨ َ‬ ‫ﺿ ﱠﻤﺔٌ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ﻓَـْﺘ َﺤﺔٌ‬ ‫َﻛ ْﺴَﺮةٌ‬ ‫رﺟﺎل‬
‫ُﻫ ْﻢ ٌ‬ ‫ﺖ ِر َﺟ ًﺎﻻ‬‫َرأَﻳْ ُ‬ ‫ﺖ ﻟ ِﺮ َﺟﺎل‬ ‫ﻗُـ ْﻠ ُ‬
‫َﻏﲑ اﻟْﻤْﻨﺼ ِﺮ ِ‬ ‫ت ﺑِ ُﻌ َﻤَﺮ‬
‫ف‬ ‫ُ ُ َ‬ ‫ﺿ ﱠﻤﺔٌ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ﻓَـْﺘ َﺤﺔٌ‬ ‫ﻓَـْﺘ َﺤﺔٌ‬ ‫َﺟﺎءَ ﻋُ َﻤُﺮ‬ ‫َرأَﻳْ ُ‬
‫ﺖ ﻋُ َﻤَﺮ‬ ‫َﻣَﺮْر ُ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺘﱠﺔُ اَﻟْ ُﻤ َﻜﺒﱠـَﺮةُ‬
‫اَْﻷَ ْﲰَﺎءُ ﱢ‬
‫‪a. When mudaaf to‬‬
‫‪any noun besides the‬‬ ‫و‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ ‫َﺟﺎءَ أَﺑـُ ْﻮ َك‬ ‫ﺖ أَﺑَ َ‬
‫ﺎك‬ ‫َرأَﻳْ ُ‬ ‫ت ﺑِﺄَﺑِْﻴ َ‬
‫ﻚ‬ ‫َﻣَﺮْر ُ‬
‫‪ dameer.‬ي‬ ‫‪6‬‬

‫‪b. When mudaaf to‬‬

‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫َﺟﺎءَ أَِ ْﰊ‬ ‫ﺖ أَِ ْﰊ‬
‫َرأَﻳْ ُ‬ ‫ت ﺑِﺄَِ ْﰊ‬
‫َﻣَﺮْر ُ‬
‫‪ dameer.‬ي ‪the‬‬

‫‪c. when not‬‬ ‫ت ﺑِﺄَ ٍ‬

‫‪mudaaf‬‬ ‫ﺿ ﱠﻤﺔٌ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ﻓَـْﺘ َﺤﺔٌ‬ ‫َﻛ ْﺴَﺮةٌ‬ ‫أب‬
‫َﺟﺎءَ ٌ‬ ‫َرأَﻳْ ُ‬
‫ﺖ أﺑًﺎ‬ ‫ب‬ ‫َﻣَﺮْر ُ‬

‫ﺎف إِ َﱃ ﻳَ ِﺎء اﻟْ ُﻤﺘَ ﱠﻜﻠِ ِﻢ‬

‫ﻀ ُ‬‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ َ‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫َﺟﺎءَ َزِﻣﻴﻠِﻲ‬ ‫ﺖ َزِﻣﻴﻠِﻲ‬
‫َرأَﻳْ ُ‬ ‫ت ﺑَِﺰِﻣﻴﻠِﻲ‬
‫َﻣَﺮْر ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ﻣﺮر ِ‬
‫ﺼ ْﻮُر‬
‫اَْﻻ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻘ ُ‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫ﻮﺳﻰ‬
‫َﺟﺎءَ ُﻣ ٰ‬ ‫ﻮﺳﻰ‬
‫ﺖ ُﻣ ٰ‬ ‫ﻮﺳﻰ َرأَﻳْ ُ‬
‫ت ﲟُ ٰ‬ ‫ََْ ُ‬
‫ص‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺟﺎء اﻟْ َﻘ ِ‬ ‫ﺎﺿﻰ رأَﻳﺖ اﻟْ َﻘ ِ‬ ‫ﻣﺮرت ﺑِﺎﻟْ َﻘ ِ‬
‫اَْﻻ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ َﻤْﻨـ ُﻘ ْﻮ ُ‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫ﻓَـْﺘ َﺤﺔٌ‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫ﺎﺿﻰ‬ ‫ََ‬ ‫ﺎﺿ َﻲ‬ ‫َْ ُ‬ ‫ََْ ُ‬
‫اَﻟْ ُﻤﺜَـ ّٰﲎ‬ ‫ﹷ ِان‬ ‫ﹷﻳْ ِﻦ‬ ‫ﹷﻳْ ِﻦ‬ ‫َﺟﺎءَ َر ُﺟ َﻼ ِن‬ ‫ﺖ ر ُﺟﻠَ ْ ِ‬
‫ﲔ‬ ‫َﻣﺮْر ُ ِ ِ‬
‫ت ﺑَﺮ ُﺟﻠَ ْﲔ َرأَﻳْ ُ َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫)‪ (masculine‬اِﺛْـﻨَ ِ‬
‫ﺎن‬
‫ﹷ ِان‬ ‫ﹷﻳْ ِﻦ‬ ‫ﹷﻳْ ِﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﺎء اِﺛْـﻨَ ِ‬ ‫ﺖ اِﺛْـﻨَـ ْ ِ‬ ‫ت ﺑِﺎِﺛْـﻨَـ ْ ِ‬
‫)‪ (feminine‬اِﺛْـﻨَﺘَ ِ‬
‫ﺎن‬
‫ﺎن‬ ‫ََ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ‫َرأَﻳْ ُ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ‫َﻣَﺮْر ُ‬

‫)‪ (masculine‬ﻛِ َﻼ‬

‫)‪ (feminine‬ﻛِْﻠﺘَﺎ‬ ‫ﹷا‬ ‫ﹷ ْي‬ ‫ﹷ ْي‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫َﺟﺎءَ ﻛِ َﻼ ُﳘَﺎ‬ ‫ﺖ ﻛِﻠَْﻴ ِﻬ َﻤﺎ‬
‫َرأَﻳْ ُ‬ ‫ت ﺑِ ِﻜﻠَْﻴ ِﻬ َﻤﺎ‬
‫َﻣَﺮْر ُ‬
‫ﻀ ِﻤ ِْﲑ(‬
‫ﺎف إِ َﱃ اﻟ ﱠ‬
‫ﻀ ُ‬‫)اَﻟْ ُﻤ َ‬

‫‪5‬‬
‫‪I said to some men.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ will be dropped when it is mudaaf to any noun besides the‬ﻓَ ٌﻢ ‪ of‬م ‪The‬‬ ‫‪ dameer. For example, it is dropped in‬ي‬
‫ِ ِ‬
‫ﰲ ا ْﻣﺮأَﺗِ َ‬
‫ﻚ‪the followng hadith: ...‬‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫)…‪َ (Whatever you put in the mouth of your wife‬ﻣﺎ َْﲡ َﻌ ُﻞ ِ ْﰲ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪Both of them.‬‬

‫‪53‬‬
 Table 2.11 – Continued

Noun Type ‫َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟ ﱠﺮﻓْ ِﻊ‬ ِ‫ﺼ‬

‫ﺐ‬ ْ ‫َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﻨﱠ‬ ‫َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟْ َﺠ ﱢﺮ‬ Examples for Each State

ِ ِ ٍ ‫ﹷ‬ ٍ ‫ﹷ‬ ِ ُ ْ‫َرأَﻳ‬

‫ﺖ‬ ‫ت‬
ُ ‫َﻣَﺮْر‬
ُ‫ﲨَْ ُﻊ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺆﻧﱠﺚ اﻟ ﱠﺴﺎﱂ‬ ‫ات‬
ٌ ‫ﹷ‬ ‫ات‬ ‫ات‬ ‫ﺎت‬
ٌ ‫ُﻫ ﱠﻦ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠ َﻤ‬ ٍ ‫ﻣﺴﻠِﻤ‬
‫ﺎت‬ ٍ ‫ِﲟُﺴﻠِﻤ‬
‫ﺎت‬
َ ُْ َ ْ
ِ ‫ﲔ َﺟﺎءَ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ ُﻤ ْﻮ َن‬ ِِ ِ ِ ِ ‫ﻣﺮر‬
ُ‫ﲨَْ ُﻊ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺬ ﱠﻛ ِﺮ اﻟ ﱠﺴﺎﱂ‬ ‫ﹹ ْو َن‬ ‫ﹻﻳْ َﻦ‬ ‫ﹻﻳْ َﻦ‬ َ ْ ‫ﺖ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤ‬ ُ ْ‫ﲔ َرأَﻳ‬
َ ْ ‫ت ﲟُ ْﺴﻠﻤ‬ ُ ََْ
– ‫ِﻋ ْﺸُﺮْو َن إِ َﱃ ﺗِ ْﺴ ُﻌ ْﻮ َن‬ ‫َﺟﺎءَ ِﻋ ْﺸُﺮْو َن‬ ‫ﺖ ِﻋ ْﺸ ِﺮﻳْ َﻦ‬ ِ ‫ﻣﺮر‬
ُ ْ‫ت ﺑِﻌ ْﺸ ِﺮﻳْ َﻦ َرأَﻳ‬ ُ ََْ
‫ﹹ ْو َن‬ ‫ﹻﻳْ َﻦ‬ ‫ﹻﻳْ َﻦ‬
‫ِﺳﻨُـ ْﻮ َن‬ ً‫َر ُﺟﻼ‬ ً‫َر ُﺟﻼ‬ ً‫َر ُﺟﻼ‬
ِ ُ ‫ﻣﺮر‬
‫أُوﻟُْﻮ‬ ‫ﹹ ْو‬ ‫ﹻ ْي‬ ‫ﹻ ْي‬ ‫َﺟﺎءَ أُوﻟُْﻮ َﻣ ٍﺎل‬ ْ ِ ُ‫ﺖ أ‬
‫وﱄ‬ ُ ْ‫َرأَﻳ‬ ْ ِ ُ‫ت ﺑﺄ‬
‫وﱄ‬ ََْ
‫َﻣ ٍﺎل‬ ‫َﻣ ٍﺎل‬
ِ ‫ٰﻫ ُﺆٰﻻ ِء‬
ُ‫ﲨَْ ُﻊ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺬ ﱠﻛ ِﺮ اﻟ ﱠﺴﺎﱂ‬ ‫ي‬ ‫ي‬
‫ﺖ‬ُ ْ‫َرأَﻳ‬ ‫ت ِﲟُ ْﺴﻠِ ِﻤ ﱠﻲ‬
ِ ‫ﺎف إِ َﱃ ﻳ‬
(‫ﺎء اﻟْ ُﻤﺘَ ﱠﻜﻠِ ِﻢ‬
hidden ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ 8 ِِ 9 ِِ ُ ‫َﻣَﺮْر‬
َ ُ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫)اَﻟْ ُﻤ‬ ‫ُﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤ ﱠﻲ‬ ‫ُﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤ ﱠﻲ‬

8
‫ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ ِﻤ ﱠﻲ‬was originally َ‫ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ ُﻤ ْﻮ َﱐ‬. First, the ‫ ن‬was dropped because of ٌ‫ﺿﺎﻓَﺔ‬ َ ِ‫إ‬. It became ‫ي‬
ِ
َ ‫ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠ ُﻤ ْﻮ‬. Then, the ‫ و‬was
changed to a ‫ ي‬and the two were joined according to the following morphological (‫ﺻ ْﺮِﰲﱞ‬ َ ) rule: “when a ‫ و‬and a ‫ي‬
appear together and the first is ‫ﺳﺎﻛِ ٌﻦ‬ َ , then the‫ و‬is changed to a ‫ي‬, and the two ‫ ي‬are joined (this is called ‫)إ ْد َﻏ ٌﺎم‬,
ِ
and the dammah before the ‫ و‬is changed into a kasrah.” Thus, it became ‫ﺴﻠِ ِﻤ ﱠﻲ‬ ْ ‫ ُﻣ‬.
9 ِِ ِِ ِِ
‫ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤ ﱠﻲ‬was originally ‫ﲏ‬ َ ِ‫إ‬. It became ‫ي‬
ََ ‫ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤْﻴـ‬. First, the ‫ ن‬was dropped because of ٌ‫ﺿﺎﻓَﺔ‬ َ ‫ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤ ْﻲ‬. Then, the two ‫ ي‬were
ِِ
joined (‫ﺎم‬ ٌ ‫)إِ ْد َﻏ‬. Thus, it became ‫ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤ ﱠﻲ‬.

54
 CHAPTER 3
Further Discussion of Nouns

Section 3.1
‫ب‬ ِ
ُ ‫ﺴ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫ – اَْﻻ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻨ‬Relative Adjective
Definition: It is that noun, which shows something or someone to be related to it.
e.g. ‫ى‬ ‫ﺑـَ ْﻐ َﺪ ِاد ﱞ‬ someone or something from Baghdad
‫ﺻ ْﺮِﰲﱞ‬
َ an expert in morphology
‫َْﳓ ِﻮ ﱞ‬
‫ي‬ an expert in Arabic grammar
‫ِﻫْﻨ ِﺪ ﱞ‬
‫ي‬ someone or something from India

Rules of Forming ‫ب‬ ِ

ُ ‫ﺴ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫اَْﻻ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻨ‬:
ِ
To show this relation, a ‫ي‬ ّ (ُ‫ )ﻳَﺎءُ اﻟﻨﱢ ْﺴﺒَﺔ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺸ ﱠﺪ َدة‬preceded by a kasrah is added at the end of the
noun after effecting the following changes, if needed:

1. If a three letter or a four letter noun ends with an ُ‫ﺼ ْﻮَرة‬ ِ ِ

ُ ‫ﻒ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻘ‬
ُ ‫) ٰى( اَْﻷَﻟ‬, then ُ‫ﺼ ْﻮَرة‬
ُ ‫ﻒ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻘ‬
ُ ‫) ٰى( اَْﻷَﻟ‬
should be changed to a ‫و‬.
e.g. ‫ِﻋْﻴ ٰﺴﻰ‬ becomes ‫ِﻋْﻴ َﺴ ِﻮ ﱞ‬
‫ى‬
Note: In the case of a five letter noun, the ُ‫ﺼ ْﻮَرة‬ ِ
ُ ‫ﻒ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻘ‬
ُ ‫ ) ٰى( اَْﻷَﻟ‬should be dropped.
e.g. ‫ﺼﻄَﻔٰﻰ‬
ْ ‫ ُﻣ‬becomes ‫ﺼﻄَِﻔ ﱞﻲ‬ ْ ‫ُﻣ‬
2. If a noun ends with an ُ‫ﻒ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻤ ُﺪ ْوَدة‬ ِ
ُ ‫)اء( اَْﻷَﻟ‬, then the ‫ ء‬should be changed to a ‫و‬.
e.g. ٌ‫َﲰَﺎء‬ becomes ‫ي‬‫َﲰَﺎ ِو ﱞ‬
3. That noun which already ends with a ‫ ي‬does not require ‫ﺴﺒَ ِﺔ‬ ْ ‫ﻳَﺎءُ اﻟﻨﱢ‬.
e.g. ‫ﻲ‬ ِِ
‫َﺷﺎﻓﻌ ﱞ‬ would remain as is.

4. The round ‫ ة‬at the end of a noun should be dropped.

e.g. ُ‫َﻣ ﱠﻜﺔ‬ becomes ‫َﻣ ﱢﻜ ﱞﻲ‬ ِ َ‫ﻓ‬
ُ‫ﺎﻃ َﻤﺔ‬ becomes ِ َ‫ﻓ‬
‫ﺎﻃ ِﻤ ﱞﻲ‬
5. The round ‫ ة‬and ‫ ي‬of a noun, which appears on the ‫ َوْز ٌن‬of ٌ‫ ﻓَﻌِْﻴـﻠَﺔ‬and ٌ‫ ﻓُـ َﻌْﻴـﻠَﺔ‬should be
dropped.
e.g. ٌ‫َﻣ ِﺪﻳْـﻨَﺔ‬ becomes ‫َﻣ َﺪِﱐﱞ‬ ٌ‫ُﺟ َﻬْﻴـﻨَﺔ‬ becomes ‫ُﺟ َﻬ ِ ﱞ‬
‫ﲏ‬

55
6. In case of the noun, which appears on the ‫ َوْز ٌن‬of ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ ﻓَﻌْﻴ‬and ends with a ‫ي‬, the first ‫ ي‬should
be changed to a ‫ و‬preceded by a fathah, and the second ‫ ي‬should be dropped.
e.g. ‫) َﻋﻠِْﻴ ٌﻲ( َﻋﻠِ ﱞﻲ‬ becomes ‫َﻋﻠَ ِﻮ ﱞ‬
‫ي‬

7. If the fourth letter of a noun is a ‫ ي‬preceded by a kasrah, then the ‫ ي‬can be dropped or it
can be changed to a ‫و‬.
e.g. ‫ِد ْﻫﻠِ ْﻲ‬ becomes ‫ِد ْﻫﻠِ ﱞﻲ‬ or ‫ِد ْﻫﻠَ ِﻮ ﱞ‬
‫ي‬

8. If an original letter from the end of noun was dropped, it should first be brought back, and
then, the relative adjective should be made.
e.g. ‫ب‬ ٌ َ‫( أ‬originally ‫)أَﺑـَ ٌﻮ‬ becomes ‫أَﺑَ ِﻮ ﱞ‬
‫ي‬
‫خ‬ٌ َ‫( أ‬originally ‫)أَ َﺧ ٌﻮ‬ becomes ‫أَ َﺧ ِﻮ ﱞ‬
‫ي‬
‫( َد ٌم‬originally ‫) َد َﻣ ٌﻮ‬ becomes ‫َد َﻣ ِﻮ ﱞ‬
‫ي‬

9. Some words do not follow any particular rule. They are based on usage.
e.g. ‫ﻧـُ ْﻮٌر‬ becomes ‫ﻧـُ ْﻮَرِاﱐﱞ‬ ‫َﺣ ﱞﻖ‬ becomes ِ ‫َﺣﻘ‬
‫ﱠﺎﱐﱞ‬

EXERCISE
1. Form the relative adjective from the following words.

i. ‫ﻧﱯ‬ iv. ‫ﻮﺳﻰ‬

ٰ ‫ﻣ‬
ii. ‫ﻣﺼﺮ‬ v. ‫ﻛﻮﻓﺔ‬

iii. ‫ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‬

56
Section 3.2
‫ﺼ ِﻐ ُﻴﺮ‬
ْ َ‫ – اَِْﻻ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْﺘ‬Diminutive Noun
Definition: It is that noun, which is used to express the diminutive form of a noun.
Sometimes, the purpose is to show affection or contempt.

Rules:
1. A three-lettered noun would come on the wazn of ‫ﻞ‬
ٌ ‫( ﻓُـ َﻌْﻴ‬or ٌ‫ ﻓُـ َﻌْﻴـﻠَﺔ‬for feminine).
e.g. ‫َر ُﺟ ٌﻞ‬ becomes ‫( ُر َﺟْﻴ ٌﻞ‬a little man)
‫َﻋْﺒ ٌﺪ‬ becomes ‫( ُﻋﺒَﻴ ٌﺪ‬a little slave)

2. A four-lettered noun would come on the wazn of ‫ﻞ‬ ِ

ٌ ‫ﻓُـ َﻌْﻴﻌ‬.
e.g. ‫َﺟ ْﻌ َﻔٌﺮ‬ becomes ‫ُﺟ َﻌْﻴ ِﻔٌﺮ‬

3. A five-lettered noun, without a ‫و‬, ‫ ا‬or ‫ ي‬as the fourth, would also come on the wazn of
‫ﻓُـ َﻌْﻴﻌِ ٌﻞ‬. The fifth letter would be dropped.
e.g. ‫ﻞ‬ ٌ ‫( َﺳ َﻔ ْﺮ َﺟ‬name of a plant) becomes ٌ ‫ُﺳ َﻔ ِْﲑ‬
‫ج‬

A five-lettered noun, having a ‫و‬, ‫ ا‬or ‫ ي‬as the fourth letter, would come on the scale of
‫ﻓُـ َﻌْﻴﻌِْﻴ ٌﻞ‬.
‫ﺎس‬ ِ ِ
e.g. ٌ َ‫( ﻗ ْﺮﻃ‬paper) becomes ‫ﺲ‬
ٌ ‫ﻗُـَﺮﻳْﻄْﻴ‬
Notes:
1. In the diminutive form, the hidden ‫ ة‬of a ‫ﻲ‬ ِ ِ ٌ ‫ ﻣﺆﻧﱠ‬becomes apparent.
‫ﺚ ﲰَﺎﻋ ﱞ‬ َُ
e.g. ‫ﺲ‬
ٌ ْ‫َﴰ‬ becomes ٌ‫ُﴰَْﻴ َﺴﺔ‬
2. In the diminutive form, the last letter of a noun which has been dropped becomes
apparent.
e.g. ‫اِﺑْ ٌﻦ‬ (originally ‫)ﺑـَْﻨـ ٌﻮ‬ becomes ‫ﺑـُ َﲏﱞ‬
(‫ ﺑـُ َﲎﱞ‬was originally ‫ﺑـُﻨَـْﻴـ ٌﻮ‬, and underwent a morphological process to become ‫)ﺑـُ َﲎﱞ‬

EXERCISE
1. Form the diminutive noun from the following words.

i. ‫ﻋﻘﺮب‬ iv. ‫ﻛﻠﺐ‬

ii. ‫ﺳﻠﻄﺎن‬ v. ‫أرض‬
iii. ‫ﻋﺼﻔﻮر‬ vi. ‫ﻗﻤﺮ‬

57
Section 3.3
ِ ‫ – اَﻟْﻤﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔُ و اﻟﻨ‬Definite and Common Nouns
ُ‫ﱠﻜ َﺮة‬ َ َْ
ِ ‫ اَﻟﻨ‬: It is that noun, which denotes an unspecified thing; i.e. a common noun.
ُ‫ﱠﻜ َﺮة‬
e.g. ‫ﻞ‬ ٌ ‫ َر ُﺟ‬a man
ُ‫اَﻟ َْﻤ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬: It is that noun which denotes a specific thing. There are seven types of ٌ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬.
1. ‫ﺿ ِﻤْﻴـٌﺮ‬
َ : It is a personal pronoun. It has been discussed earlier in Section 2.4.1.
2. ‫ َﻋﻠَ ٌﻢ‬: It is a proper noun, i.e., the name of a specific person, place or thing.
e.g. ‫َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ ُ‫َﻣ ﱠﻜﺔ‬ ‫َزْﻣَﺰُم‬

3. ِ‫ﺎرة‬ ِْ ‫اِ ْﺳﻢ‬: It is the demonstrative pronoun. It has been discussed earlier in section 2.4.3.
َ ‫اﻹ َﺷ‬ ُ
4. ‫ﺻ ْﻮ ُل‬ ِ
ُ ‫اَْﻻ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻮ‬: It is the relative pronoun. It has been discussed earlier in Section 2.4.2.
ِ ‫ف‬
5. ‫ب اَ ْل‬ ُ ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ َﻌﱠﺮ‬: It is that noun, which has ‫( ال‬definite particle) at the beginning.
e.g. ‫اَﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ‬ the man

6. That common noun (ٌ‫ )ﻧَﻜَِﺮة‬which is mudaaf to any of the above five definite nouns.
e.g. ‫ﻚ‬َ ُ‫ﻛِﺘَﺎﺑ‬ ‫ﺎب َزﻳْ ٍﺪ‬
ُ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬
ِ
‫ﺎب اﻟﱠ ِﺬ ْي‬ ِ
ُ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬ ‫ﺎب ٰﻫ َﺬا اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ِﻞ‬ ِ
ُ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬
‫ﺎب اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ِﻞ‬ ِ
ُ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬

7. ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤﻨَﺎ ٰدى‬: It is the vocative noun, i.e. that noun, which appears after a ‫ف ﻧِ َﺪا ٍء‬
ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬.
e.g. ‫ﻳَﺎ َر ُﺟ ُﻞ‬

EXERCISE

1. Which of the following words are ma‘rifah (state what type) and which are nakirah.

i. ‫اﻟﻔﺮس‬ v. ‫ﻣﻜﺔ‬
ii. ‫ﳓﻦ‬ vi. ‫ذﻟﻚ‬
iii. ‫ﺳﻴﺎرة اﻟﺬي‬ vii. ‫ﲰﻚ‬
iv. ‫ﻳﺎ وﻟﺪ‬ viii. ‫ﺳﻴﻒ اﻟﺮﺟﻞ‬

58
Section 3.4
ُ ‫ – اَِْﻻ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟ ُْﻤ َﺬ ﱠﻛ ُﺮ َو اﻟ ُْﻤ َﺆﻧﱠ‬Masculine and Feminine Nouns
‫ﺚ‬

‫ اَِْﻻ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟ ُْﻤ َﺬ ﱠﻛ ُﺮ‬- Masculine Noun: It is that noun, which does not have any sign from amongst the
signs of femininity (‫ﺚ‬ ِ ‫)ﻋ َﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﱠﺄْﻧِﻴ‬.
ْ ُ َ َ
‫ﺚ‬ُ ‫ اَِْﻻ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟ ُْﻤ َﺆﻧﱠ‬- Feminine Noun: It is that noun, which has a sign from amongst the signs of
femininity. This sign could be apparent or hidden.

ِ ‫ﺎت اﻟﺘﱠﺄْﻧِْﻴ‬
‫ﺚ‬ ُ ‫ َﻋ َﻼ َﻣ‬: The signs of being feminine are of two types:
1. ‫ﻲ‬ ِ
‫( ﻟَ ْﻔﻈ ﱞ‬in words): It is that sign, which is visible in words. These signs are of the
following three types:
 ‫ة‬: This renders the word ‫ﱠﺚ‬ ُ ‫ اَِْﻻ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺆﻧ‬even if the ‫ ة‬appears in a masculine proper
noun. e.g. ٌ‫ﺎرة‬ َ ‫َﺳﻴﱠ‬ ُ‫( ﻃَْﻠ َﺤﺔ‬a masucline proper noun)
 ُ‫ﺼ ْﻮَرة‬ ِ ‫ُﺣْﺒـ ٰﻠﻰ‬
ُ ‫ﻒ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻘ‬
ُ ‫) ٰى( اَْﻷَﻟ‬ e.g. ‫ﺻ ْﻐ ٰﺮى‬ ُ
 ُ‫ﻒ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻤ ُﺪ ْوَدة‬ ِ
ُ ‫)اء( اَْﻷَﻟ‬ e.g. ُ‫ﲪََْﺮاء‬ ُ‫ﻀﺎء‬َ ‫ﺑـَْﻴ‬
If a word has any of these three signs it will be ‫ﱠﺚ‬ ُ ‫اَِْﻻ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺆﻧ‬.
‫( ﺗَـ ْﻘ ِﺪﻳ ِﺮ ﱞ‬assumed): It is that sign, which is not visible in words and is assumed to exist.
2. ‫ي‬
This is determined by looking at the diminutive form (‫ﺼﻐِْﻴـٌﺮ‬ ْ َ‫ )ﺗ‬of a particular word. This
reveals the original letters of the word.
e.g. ‫ض‬ٌ ‫ أ َْر‬The diminutive form is ٌ‫ﻀﺔ‬ ُ ‫اَِْﻻ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺆﻧ‬.
َ ْ‫أ َُرﻳ‬. Therefore, it is ‫ﱠﺚ‬
‫ﺲ‬
ٌ ْ‫َﴰ‬ The diminutive form is ٌ‫ﺴﺔ‬ ُ ‫اَِْﻻ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺆﻧ‬.
َ ‫ ُﴰَْﻴ‬. Therefore, it is ‫ﱠﺚ‬

Based on the signs of femininity being ‫ﻲ‬ ِ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻘ ِﺪﻳ ِﺮ ﱞ‬, ‫ﱠﺚ‬
‫ ﻟَ ْﻔﻈ ﱞ‬or ‫ي‬ ُ ‫ اَِْﻻ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺆﻧ‬is of two types:
ِ ‫ﱠﺚ اﻟْ ِﻘﻴ‬
‫ﺎﺳ ﱡﻲ‬ ِ
1. َ ُ ‫( اَﻟْ ُﻤ َﺆﻧ‬according to rule): It is that feminine noun, which has a ‫ ﻟَ ْﻔﻈ ﱞﻲ‬sign of
femininity.

2. ِ ‫ﱠﺚ اﻟ ﱢﺴﻤ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ﱡﻲ‬ ‫ ﺗَـ ْﻘ ِﺪﻳ ِﺮ ﱞ‬sign of
َ ُ ‫( اَﻟْ ُﻤ َﺆﻧ‬according to usage): It is that feminine noun, which has a ‫ي‬
femininity.

In terms of ‫ات‬ ُ ‫ اَِْﻻ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺆﻧ‬is of two types:

ٌ ‫( َذ‬essence), ‫ﱠﺚ‬
1. ‫ﻲ‬ ِ ِ ٌ ‫ﻣﺆﻧ‬: It is that feminine noun, which has an opposite masculine.
‫ﱠﺚ َﺣﻘْﻴﻘ ﱞ‬ َُ
e.g. ٌ‫( اِ ْﻣَﺮأَة‬woman). Its masculine is ‫ﻞ‬
ٌ ‫( َر ُﺟ‬man).
2. ‫ﻲ‬ ِ ٌ ‫ﻣﺆﻧ‬: It is that feminine noun, which does not have an opposite masculine.
‫ﱠﺚ ﻟَْﻔﻈ ﱞ‬ َُ
e.g. ٌ‫( ﻇُْﻠ َﻤﺔ‬darkness) ‫ﲔ‬
ٌ ‫( َﻋ‬spring)

59
Notes:
1. The following are used as feminine (‫ﱠﺚ‬
ٌ ‫) ُﻣ َﺆﻧ‬:
a. Name of females.
e.g. ُ‫َﻣ ْﺮَﱘ‬ ‫ﺐ‬
ُ َ‫َزﻳْـﻨ‬
b. Words denoting the feminine gender.
e.g. ‫أُمﱞ‬ ‫ﺖ‬
ٌ ‫ُﺧ‬ْ‫أ‬
c. Names of countries, cities, towns and tribes.
e.g. ‫ﺼ ُﺮ‬ ِ
ْ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺶ‬ٌ ْ‫ﻗُـَﺮﻳ‬
d. Parts of the body found in pairs.
e.g. ‫أُذُ ٌن‬ ‫ﻳَ ٌﺪ‬
Note: There are exceptions to the rule. ‫ﺧ ﱞﺪ‬ ِ
َ (cheek), ‫ﺐ‬
ٌ ‫( َﺣﺎﺟ‬eyebrow) etc. are
masculine.
e. Names of various types of winds.
ٌ ْ‫ِرﻳ‬
e.g. ‫ﺢ‬ ‫ﺻٌﺮ‬
َ ‫ﺻ ْﺮ‬
َ
f. Various names of Jahannam (hell).
e.g. ‫ﱠﻢ‬
ُ ‫َﺟ َﻬﻨ‬ ‫َﺳ َﻘُﺮ‬
Letters of the alphabet (ُ‫ﺠﺎﺋِﻴﱠﺔ‬ ِ ُ ‫ )اَ ْﳊﺮو‬are generally used as ‫ﱠﺚ‬
g. َ ‫ف ا ْﳍ‬ ْ ُُ ٌ ‫ ُﻣ َﺆﻧ‬. They can also be used
as masculine.
e.g. ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬ ‫…… ت‬..

2. There are some words that Arabs use as feminine without regard to the presence or absence
of signs of femininity. Examples include the following:
‫َدﻟْ ٌﻮ‬ (bucket) ‫ث‬
ٌ ‫( َﺣ ْﺮ‬tillage/field) ‫ﺑِْﺌـٌﺮ‬ (well)
‫ﺲ‬
ٌ ‫ﻧـَ ْﻔ‬ (self) ‫ﻧَ ٌﺎر‬ (fire) ‫َد ٌار‬ (house)

60
Section 3.5
ِ ‫ – و‬Singular, Dual and Plural
‫اﺣ ٌﺪ َو ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔٌ َو َﺟ ْﻤ ٌﻊ‬ َ
ِ ‫ – و‬Singular: It is that noun, which denotes one.
‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ
e.g. ‫ﻞ‬ٌ ‫َر ُﺟ‬ one man

ٌ‫ – ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬Dual: It is that noun, which denotes two. It is formed by placing at the end of a singular
(‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ِ ‫ )و‬one of the following:
َ
 An ‫ﻒ‬ ِ ِ
ٌ ‫ أَﻟ‬preceded by a fathah and a ‫ ﻧـُ ْﻮ ٌن‬with a kasrah (ٌ‫ﻮح َو ﻧـُ ْﻮ ٌن َﻣ ْﻜ ُﺴ َﻮرة‬
ٌ ُ‫ﻒ َﻣﺎ ﻗَـْﺒـﻠَ َﻬﺎ َﻣ ْﻔﺘ‬
ٌ ‫ )أَﻟ‬i.e.
ِ ‫ ]ﹷ‬for ‫ﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﱠﺮﻓْ ِﻊ‬.
[‫ان‬ َ
e.g. ‫ﺟ َﻼ ِن‬ُ ‫َر‬ two men

 A ٌ‫ ﻳَﺎء‬preceded by a fathah and a ‫ ﻧـُ ْﻮ ٌن‬with a kasrah (ٌ‫ﻮرة‬ ٌ ُ‫ )ﻳَﺎءٌ َﻣﺎ ﻗَـْﺒـﻠَ َﻬﺎ َﻣ ْﻔﺘ‬i.e. [‫]ﹷﻳْ ِﻦ‬
َ ‫ﻮح َو ﻧـُ ْﻮ ٌن َﻣ ْﻜ ُﺴ‬
for ‫اﳉَﱢﺮ‬ ِ‫ﺼ‬
ْ ‫ﺐ َو‬ ْ ‫ َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﻨﱠ‬.
ِ ْ َ‫ر ُﺟﻠ‬
‫ﲔ‬
e.g. َ two men

‫ – َﺟ ْﻤ ٌﻊ‬Plural: It is that noun, which denotes more than two.

e.g. ‫ﺎل‬ ٌ ‫ِر َﺟ‬ men

Note: The ‫ ﻧـُ ْﻮ ٌن‬of ٌ‫ ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬and ‫ ﲨَْ ٌﻊ‬is dropped in case of ٌ‫ﺿﺎﻓَﺔ‬
َ ِ‫إ‬.
e.g. ‫ﻗَـﻠَ َﻤﺎ َزﻳْ ٍﺪ‬ (Originally, ‫ﺎن َزﻳْ ٍﺪ‬
ِ ‫ ﻗَـﻠَﻤ‬but the ‫ ﻧـُﻮ ٌن‬was dropped due to ٌ‫ﺿﺎﻓَﺔ‬
َ ْ َ ِ‫إ‬.)
‫ﻓَـَﺮ َﺳﺎ َر ُﺟ ٍﻞ‬ (Originally, ‫ﺟ ٍﻞ‬ ِ َ ِ‫إ‬.)
ُ ‫ ﻓَـَﺮ َﺳﺎن َر‬but the ‫ ﻧـُ ْﻮ ٌن‬was dropped due to ٌ‫ﺿﺎﻓَﺔ‬
ِ ِ ِ ِ
‫ﺼَﺮ‬ْ ‫ُﻣ ْﺴﻠ ُﻤ ْﻮ ﻣ‬ (Originally, ‫ﺼَﺮ‬ َ ِ‫إ‬.)
ْ ‫ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠ ُﻤ ْﻮ َن ﻣ‬but the ‫ ﻧـُ ْﻮ ٌن‬was dropped due to ٌ‫ﺿﺎﻓَﺔ‬
‫ﻃَﺎﻟِﺒُـ ْﻮ ِﻋ ْﻠ ٍﻢ‬ (Originally, ‫ ﻃَﺎﻟِﺒُـ ْﻮ َن ِﻋ ْﻠ ٍﻢ‬but the ‫ ﻧـُ ْﻮ ٌن‬was dropped due to ٌ‫ﺿﺎﻓَﺔ‬
َ ِ‫إ‬.)

EXERCISE
1. Translate the following into Arabic.
i. The boy’s two bicycles.
ii. The farmer’s two servants.
iii. Your parents came.
iv. I saw your parents.
v. The servants of deen.
vi. The teachers of the school.

61
Section 3.6
‫ْﺠ ْﻤ ِﻊ‬
َ ‫ﺎم اﻟ‬ َ ‫ – أَﻗ‬Types of Plural
ُ ‫ْﺴ‬
‫ﺴﺎﻟِ ُﻢ‬‫ْﺠ ْﻤ ُﻊ اﻟ ﱠ‬ ِ
َ ‫ – اَﻟ‬Sound Plural: It is that plural whose ٌ‫( ﺻﻴﻐَﺔ‬the singular letter sequence/form) of
‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ِ ‫ و‬does not change, when its plural is made. In other words, the singular letter sequence does
َ
not break.
e.g. ‫ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ ُﻤ ْﻮ َن‬ (singular – ‫ﺴﻠِ ٌﻢ‬
ْ ‫) ُﻣ‬
ِ ‫ا ْﳉﻤﻊ اﻟﺴ‬:
There are two types of ُ‫ﺎﱂ‬ ‫َ َْ ُ ﱠ‬
ِ ‫ – ﲨﻊ ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛ ٍﺮ ﺳ‬Masculine Sound Plural: It is formed by adding at the end of a singular
1. ٌ‫ﺎﱂ‬ َ ُ ُ َْ
ِ ‫ )و‬one of the following:
(‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ
 A ‫ َو ٌاو‬preceded by a dammah and a ‫ ﻧـُ ْﻮ ٌن‬with a fathah (ٌ‫ﺣﺔ‬
َ ‫ﻀ ُﻤ ْﻮٌم َو ﻧـُ ْﻮ ٌن َﻣ ْﻔﺘُـ ْﻮ‬
ْ ‫ ) َو ٌاو َﻣﺎ ﻗَـْﺒـﻠَ َﻬﺎ َﻣ‬i.e.
[‫ ]ﹹ ْو َن‬for ‫ﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟ ﱠﺮﻓْ ِﻊ‬
َ.
e.g. ‫ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ ُﻤ ْﻮ َن‬
 A ٌ‫ ﻳَﺎء‬preceded by a kasrah and a ‫ ﻧـُ ْﻮ ٌن‬with a fathah (ٌ‫ﺣﺔ‬
َ ‫ )ﻳَﺎءٌ َﻣﺎ ﻗَـْﺒـﻠَ َﻬﺎ َﻣ ْﻜ ُﺴ ْﻮٌر َو ﻧـُ ْﻮ ٌن َﻣ ْﻔﺘُـ ْﻮ‬i.e.
[‫ ]ﹻﻳْ َﻦ‬for ‫اﳉَﱢﺮ‬ ِ‫ﺼ‬
ْ ‫ﺐ َو‬ ْ ‫ َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﻨﱠ‬.
‫ﲔ‬ ِِ
e.g. َ ْ ‫ُﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤ‬
ِ ‫ﱠﺚ ﺳ‬
2. ٌ‫ﺎﱂ‬ ٍ
َ ‫ – ﲨَْ ُﻊ ُﻣ َﺆﻧ‬Feminine Sound Plural: It is formed by discarding the round ‫ ة‬and adding
at the end of a singular, one of the following:
 An ‫ﻒ‬ ِ ِ
ٌ ‫ أَﻟ‬preceded by a fathah and a madmoom long ‫ﻀ ُﻤ ْﻮَﻣﺔٌ( ت‬
ْ ‫ح َو ﺗَﺎءٌ َﻣ‬
ٌ ‫ﻒ َﻣﺎ ﻗَـْﺒـﻠَ َﻬﺎ َﻣ ْﻔﺘُـ ْﻮ‬
ٌ ‫)أَﻟ‬
i.e. [‫ات‬
ٌ ‫ ]ﹷ‬for ‫ َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﱠﺮﻓْ ِﻊ‬.
‫ﺎت‬ ِ
e.g. ٌ ‫ُﻣ ْﺴﻠ َﻤ‬
An ‫ﻒ‬ ِ ِ
 ٌ ‫ أَﻟ‬preceded by a fathah and a maksoor long ‫ْﺴﻮَرةٌ( ت‬
ُ ‫ﻒ َﻣﺎ ﻗَـْﺒـﻠَ َﻬﺎ َﻣ ْﻔﺘُـ ْﻮ ٌح َو ﺗَﺎءٌ َﻣﻜ‬
ٌ ‫ )أَﻟ‬i.e.
ٍ ‫ ]ﹷ‬for ‫اﳉﱢﺮ‬
[‫ات‬ ِ‫ﺼ‬
َْ ‫ﺐ َو‬ ْ ‫ َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﻨﱠ‬.
ٍ ‫ﻣﺴﻠِﻤ‬
‫ﺎت‬
e.g. َ ُْ

‫ﺴ ُﺮ‬
‫ْﺠ ْﻤ ُﻊ اﻟ ُْﻤ َﻜ ﱠ‬ ِ
َ ‫ – اَﻟ‬Broken Plural: It is that plural whose ٌ‫( ﺻﻴﻐَﺔ‬the singular letter sequence/form) of
ِ ‫ و‬changes, when its plural is made. In other words, the singular letter sequence breaks.
‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ
ٌ ‫ِر َﺟ‬
e.g. ‫ﺎل‬ (singular – ‫ﻞ‬ٌ ‫) َر ُﺟ‬

‫ – َﺟ ْﻤ ُﻊ ﻗِﻠﱠ ٍﺔ‬Restricted Plural: It is that plural, which denotes a number from three to ten. It has
four common ‫أ َْوَزا ٌن‬.

62
 Table 3.1
‫أ َْوَزا ُن َﺟ ْﻤ ِﻊ ﻗِﻠﱠ ٍﺔ‬

Wazn Singular Meaning Plural

‫أَﻓْـ ُﻌ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﺲ‬ٌ ‫ﻧـَ ْﻔ‬ self ‫ﺲ‬ٌ ‫أَﻧْـ ُﻔ‬
‫ﺎل‬ٌ ‫أَﻓْـ َﻌ‬ ‫ﻗَـ ْﻮٌل‬ statement ‫أَﻗْـ َﻮ ٌال‬
ٌ‫أَﻓْﻌِﻠَﺔ‬ ‫ﻃَ َﻌ ٌﺎم‬ food ٌ‫أَﻃْﻌِ َﻤﺔ‬
ٌ‫ﻓِ ْﻌﻠَﺔ‬ ‫ﻏُ َﻼ ٌم‬ boy ٌ‫ِﻏ ْﻠ َﻤﺔ‬

Note: The masculine and feminine sound plural, which is not preceded by an ‫ ال‬is also
considered ‫ﲨَْ ُﻊ ﻗِﻠﱠ ٍﺔ‬.
‫ت‬ ِ
e.g. ٌ ‫َﻋﺎﻗ َﻼ‬ intelligent females
‫َﻋﺎﻗِﻠُ ْﻮ َن‬ intelligent males

ٍ‫ – ﺟﻤـﻊ َﻛﺜْــﺮة‬Unrestricted Plural: It is that plural, which denotes a number from ten upwards.
َ ُ َْ
Some of the common ‫ أ َْوَزا ٌن‬are given below.

Table 3.2
ٍ‫أَوَزا ُن ﺟﻤ ِﻊ َﻛﺜْـﺮة‬
َ َْ ْ

Wazn Singular Meaning Plural

ٌ ‫ﻓِ َﻌ‬
‫ﺎل‬ ‫َﻋْﺒ ٌﺪ‬ slave ٌ َ‫ِﻋﺒ‬
‫ﺎد‬
ُ‫ﻓُـ َﻌ َﻼء‬ ‫َﻋﻠِْﻴ ٌﻢ‬ knowledgeable ُ‫ُﻋﻠَ َﻤﺎء‬
ِ ِ
ُ‫أَﻓْﻌ َﻼء‬ ‫ﻧَِﱯﱞ‬ prophet ُ‫أَﻧْﺒﻴَﺎء‬
‫ﻓُـ ُﻌ ٌﻞ‬ ‫َر ُﺳ ْﻮٌل‬ messenger ‫ُر ُﺳ ٌﻞ‬
‫ﻓُـ ُﻌ ْﻮٌل‬ ‫َْﳒ ٌﻢ‬ star ‫ُﳒُ ْﻮٌم‬
‫ﺎل‬ٌ ‫ﻓُـﻌﱠ‬ ‫َﺧ ِﺎد ٌم‬ servant ‫ﱠام‬
ٌ ‫ُﺧﺪ‬
‫ﻓَـ ْﻌ ٰﻠﻰ‬ ٌ ْ‫َﻣ ِﺮﻳ‬
‫ﺾ‬ patient ‫َﻣ ْﺮﺿٰﻰ‬
ٌ‫ﻓَـ َﻌﻠَﺔ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ﻃَﺎﻟ‬ student ٌ‫ﻃَﻠَﺒَﺔ‬
‫ﻓِ َﻌ ٌﻞ‬ ٌ‫ﻓِْﺮﻗَﺔ‬ group/sect ‫ﻓَِﺮ ٌق‬
‫ﻓِ ْﻌ َﻼ ٌن‬ ‫ُﻏ َﻼ ٌم‬ boy ‫ِﻏ ْﻠ َﻤﺎ ٌن‬

63
 Note: The masculine and feminine sound plural which is preceded by an ‫ ال‬is also
considered as ٍ‫ﲨَْ ُﻊ َﻛﺜْـَﺮة‬.
‫ﺎت‬ ِ ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ ْﺴﻠِ ُﻤ ْﻮ َن‬
e.g. ُ ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ ْﺴﻠ َﻤ‬

‫ْﺠ ْﻤ ِﻊ‬
َ ‫ – َﺟ ْﻤ ُﻊ اﻟ‬Plural of a Plural: It is the plural of a plural. Sometimes, it appears on the wazn of
‫اﳉُ ُﻤ ْﻮِع‬
ْ ‫ ُﻣْﻨﺘَـ َﻬﻰ‬and sometimes on the wazn of ُ‫ﺎﱂ‬ ِ ‫ا ْﳉﻤﻊ اﻟﺴ‬. Every plural does not have a plural. Some
‫َ َْ ُ ﱠ‬
examples of plurals, which have a plural are given below.

Table 3.3
‫ْﺠ ْﻤ ِﻊ‬
َ ‫ﺎل َﺟ ْﻤ ِﻊ اﻟ‬
ُ َ‫أ َْﻣﺜ‬

Singular Meaning Plural Plural of Plural

ٌ‫ﻧِ ْﻌ َﻤﺔ‬ blessing ‫أَﻧْـ َﻌ ٌﻢ‬ ِ َ‫أَﻧ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ُﻢ‬
‫ﻇُْﻔٌﺮ‬ nail ‫أَﻇَﺎﻓُِﺮ‬ ‫أَﻇَﺎﻓِْﻴـُﺮ‬
‫ﺖ‬
ٌ ‫ﺑـَْﻴ‬ house ‫ت‬ ٌ ‫ﺑـُﻴُـ ْﻮ‬ ‫ﺎت‬
ٌ َ‫ﺑـُﻴُـ ْﻮﺗ‬
ِ َ‫ﻓ‬
‫ﺎﺿ ٌﻞ‬ well-qualified ‫ﺎﺿ ُﻞ‬ِ َ‫أَﻓ‬ ِ َ‫أَﻓ‬
‫ﺎﺿﻠُ ْﻮ َن‬

‫ْﺠ ُﻤ ْﻮ ِع‬ ِ
ُ ‫ ُﻣ ْﻨﺘَـ َﻬﻰ اﻟ‬: It is that plural, which has after the ‫اﳉَ ْﻤ ِﻊ‬
ْ ‫ﻒ‬ُ ‫( أَﻟ‬alif of plural), one of the following:
 two ‫ﺤﱢﺮٌك‬ ِ ‫ﻣﺴ‬
َ َ‫ ُﻣﺘ‬letters. e.g. ‫ﺎﺟ ُﺪ‬ ََ
 one ‫ﺸ ﱠﺪ ٌد‬ َ ‫ ُﻣ‬letter. e.g. ‫اب‬ ‫( َد َو ﱡ‬the original being ‫ﺐ‬ ِ
ُ ‫) َد َواﺑ‬
 three letters, the middle one being ‫ﺳﺎﻛِ ٌﻦ‬ َ . e.g. ‫َﻣ َﻔﺎﺗْﻴ ُﺢ‬
ِ

Some of the common wazns of ‫اﳉُ ُﻤ ْﻮِع‬

ْ ‫ ُﻣْﻨﺘَـ َﻬﻰ‬are given below:

Table 3.4
‫ْﺠ ُﻤﻮ ِع‬
ُ ‫أ َْوَزا ُن ُﻣ ْﻨﺘَـ َﻬﻰ اﻟ‬

Wazn Singular Meaning Plural

‫ﺎﻋ ُﻞ‬ ِ ‫ﻣ َﻔ‬
َ ‫َﻣ ْﺴ ِﺠ ٌﺪ‬ mosque ‫ﺎﺟ ُﺪ‬ ِ ‫ﻣﺴ‬
ََ
‫ﺎﻋْﻴ ُﻞ‬ ِ ‫ﻣ َﻔ‬ ‫ﺎح‬ ِ ‫َﻣ َﻔﺎﺗِْﻴ ُﺢ‬
َ ٌ َ‫ﻣ ْﻔﺘ‬ key
ِ
‫ﻓَـ َﻌﺎﺋ ُﻞ‬ ِ َ‫ﻗ‬
ٌ‫ﺎﻋ َﺪة‬ rule/maxim ِ ‫ﻗَـﻮ‬
‫اﻋ ُﺪ‬ َ
ٌ‫ﻓِ ْﻌﻠَﺔ‬ ٌ‫ِر َﺳﺎﻟَﺔ‬ message/letter ِ
‫َر َﺳﺎﺋ ُﻞ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ُﻞ‬ِ َ‫أَﻓ‬ ‫أَ ْﻛﺒَـٌﺮ‬ elder ‫أَ َﻛﺎﺑُِﺮ‬

64
‫ْﺠ ْﻤ ِﻊ‬ ِ
َ ‫ – ا ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟ‬Collective Noun: It is a singular noun, which gives a plural meaning.
e.g. ‫ ﻗَـ ْﻮٌم‬nation
‫ﻂ‬ٌ ‫ َرْﻫ‬group
Note:
1. These words have plurals. (‫ام‬ٌ ‫ أَﻗْـ َﻮ‬،٬‫)أ َْرَﻫﺎ ٌط‬
2. In usage, if the word is considered, it will be used as a singular noun.
e.g. ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ ِ ‫اَﻟْ َﻘﻮم ﺣ‬
َ ُْ The people are present.
If its meaning is considered (as is commonly done), it will be used as a plural noun.
ِ ‫ﻗَـﻮم ﺻ‬
e.g. ‫ﺎﳊُْﻮ َن‬ َ ٌْ righteous people

Notes:
1. Some plurals do not have the same root letters as their singulars.
e.g. ٌ‫اِ ْﻣَﺮأَة‬ (woman) ِ
ٌ‫ﻧ َﺴﺎء‬
‫ذُ ْو‬ (the one who possesses something) ‫أ ُْوﻟُْﻮ‬

ِ َ‫ف اﻟْ ِﻘﻴ‬

2. Some plurals are not according to rule (‫ﺎس‬ ُ ‫) ِﺧ َﻼ‬.
e.g. ‫أُمﱞ‬ (mother) ‫ﺎت‬
ٌ ‫أُﱠﻣ َﻬ‬
‫ﻓَ ٌﻢ‬ (mouth) ٌ‫أَﻓْـ َﻮاﻩ‬
ِ
ٌ‫َﻣﺎء‬ (water) ٌ‫ﻣﻴَﺎﻩ‬
‫إِﻧْ َﺴﺎ ٌن‬ (human being) ‫ﺎس‬
ٌ َ‫أُﻧ‬
ٌ‫َﺷﺎة‬ ِ
(goat/sheep) ٌ‫ﺷﻴَﺎﻩ‬

ِ ‫ – اِﺳﻢ اﻟ‬Generic Noun: It is that noun, which refers to an entire genus (category).
ِ ‫ْﺠ ْﻨ‬
‫ﺲ‬ ُْ
e.g. ‫ َﺷ َﺠٌﺮ‬refers to anything which falls under the concept of a tree.

EXERCISE
1. What type of plurals are the following?

i. ‫ﺻﺎﺋﻤﺎت‬ ii. ‫ﺟﻴﺶ‬

iii. ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ‬ iv. ‫ﺑﻼد‬
v. ‫ﻛﺘﺐ‬ vi. ‫ﺻﺎﺋﻤﻮن‬
vii. ‫أﻛﻠﺐ‬

65
Section 3.7
‫ﺎت‬
ٌ ‫ﻮﻋ‬
َ ُ‫ َﻣ ْﺮﻓ‬- Words Which Are Always Marfoo‘
There are eight words that are always in the state of raf‘. These are as follows:
ِ َ‫ﻓ‬
1. ‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ ِ ‫ﻧَﺎﺋِﺐ اﻟْ َﻔ‬
2. ‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ‬ ُ 3. ٌ‫ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬ 4. ‫َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬ 5. ‫َﺧ َﻮا َِﺎ‬
َ ‫َﺧﺒَـُﺮ إِ ﱠن َو أ‬
6. ‫َﺧ َﻮا َِﺎ‬ ِ ِِ ِ ْ ‫َﺧﺒَـُﺮ َﻻ اَﻟﱠِ ْﱵ ﻟِﻨَـ ْﻔ ِﻰ‬
ِ ‫اﳉِْﻨ‬
َ ‫ا ْﺳ ُﻢ َﻛﺎ َن َو أ‬ 7. ‫ﺲ‬ َ ‫ا ْﺳ ُﻢ َﻣﺎ َو َﻻ اَﻟْ ُﻤ َﺸﺒﱠـ َﻬﺘَـ ْﲔ ﺑﻠَْﻴ‬ 8. ‫ﺲ‬
Some of these have been discussed before. ٌ‫( ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬subject) and ‫ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬ َ (predicate) were
discussed in Section 1.3.1, ‫َﺧ َﻮا َِﺎ‬ ِ ‫ اِﺳﻢ َﻛﺎ َن و أ‬was
َ ‫ َﺧﺒَـُﺮ إِ ﱠن َو أ‬was discussed in Section 1.7, and ‫َﺧ َﻮا َﺎ‬ َ َ ُْ
discussed in Section 1.8. We discuss the rest below.

Section 3.7.1
ِ َ‫ – ﻓ‬Subject/Doer
‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬
Definition: It is the doer of the action or of the meaning contained in the verb.
 The ‫ﻞ‬ ِ ِ ِ
ٌ ‫ ﻓَﺎﻋ‬can either be a personal pronoun or an ‫( ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ ﻇَﺎﻫٌﺮ‬i.e. visible in words after the
ِ َ‫ ﻓ‬is ‫اِﺳﻢ‬
‫)ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬. We discussed personal pronouns in Section 2.4.1. As for the case, when ‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ ٌْ
ِ ِ
‫ﻇَﺎﻫٌﺮ‬, the verb (‫ )ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬usage will be as given below.

Table 3.5
ِ ‫ﺎل اﻟ ِْﻔﻌ ِﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟْ َﻔ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ‬ ِ ِ
َ ْ َ ْ ُ ‫ا ْﺳﺘ ْﻌ َﻤ‬
ِ َ‫ﻓ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬ Example
1. ‫ﺚ ﺣ ِﻘﻴ ِﻘﻲ‬ ِ ِ‫و‬ ُ‫ﺖ َﻋﺎﺋِ َﺸﺔ‬
‫ ﻇَﺎﻫٌﺮ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ َ ْ ﱞ‬and no ‫ﺚ‬
ٌ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬ َ ْ ‫ﻗَ َﺎﻣ‬
word appears between the
‫ ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬and ‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬
ِ َ‫ﻓ‬.
ٌ ‫ﺿ ِﻤْﻴـٌﺮ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬
2. ‫ﺚ‬
َ ٌ ‫ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬according to
‫ﺚ‬ ‫ﺼَﺮﺗَﺎ‬ ِ
َ َ‫ اَﻟْ ُﻤ َﻌﻠﱢ َﻤﺘَﺎن ﻧ‬- ‫ﺼ ْﺮ َن‬ ُ ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ َﻌﻠﱢ َﻤ‬
َ َ‫ﺎت ﻧ‬
‫ت‬ْ ‫ﺼَﺮ‬ َ َ‫ اَﻟْ ُﻤ َﻌﻠﱢ َﻤﺔُ ﻧ‬-
preceding noun
3. ‫ﺚ ﺣ ِﻘﻴ ِﻘﻲ‬ ِ ِ ِ‫و‬ ُ‫ﻗَـَﺮأَ اﻟْﻴَـ ْﻮَم َﻋﺎﺋِ َﺸﺔ‬
‫ ﻇَﺎﻫٌﺮ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ َ ْ ﱞ‬and a word ‫ َواﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ‬or ‫ﺚ‬
ٌ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬ َ
appears between the ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ ﻓ ْﻌ‬and
or
ِ َ‫ﻓ‬. ِ ‫ﻗَـﺮأ‬
ُ‫َت اﻟْﻴَـ ْﻮَم َﻋﺎﺋِ َﺸﺔ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ َ
4. ‫ﺚ َﻏﲑ ﺣ ِﻘﻴ ِﻘﻲ‬ ِ ِ ‫ و‬or ‫ﺚ‬
‫اﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ‬ ِ‫و‬ ِ
‫ﻇَﺎﻫٌﺮ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ ُ َ ْ ﱟ‬ َ ٌ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬ َ ‫ﺲ‬ُ ‫ﱠﻤ‬ْ ‫ ﻃَﻠَ َﻊ اﻟﺸ‬or ‫ﺲ‬ ُ ‫ﱠﻤ‬ ْ ‫ﻃَﻠَ َﻌﺖ اﻟﺸ‬
5. ‫ﺴﺮ‬ ِ ِ
‫ َواﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ‬or ‫ﺚ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫َواﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬ ِ َ‫ﻗَﺎﻟ‬
ٌ ‫ﻇَﺎﻫٌﺮ ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﻜ ﱠ‬ ‫ﺎل‬
ُ ‫ﺎل اﻟﱢﺮ َﺟ‬َ َ‫ ﻗ‬or ‫ﺎل‬ ُ ‫ﺖ اﻟﱢﺮ َﺟ‬
6. any ‫ﺎﻫﺮ‬ ِ ِ ِ ‫ و‬corresponding in ‫ب اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ َﻼ ِن‬
ٌ َ‫ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ ﻇ‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ َ ‫ﺿَﺮ‬َ - ‫ﺎل‬ ُ ‫ب اﻟﱢﺮ َﺟ‬
َ ‫ﺿَﺮ‬ َ
gender ‫ب اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ‬َ ‫ﺿَﺮ‬َ -

66
 ‫‪Table 3.5 – Continued‬‬
‫ﻓَ ِ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬ ‫‪Example‬‬
‫ﺿ ِﻤﻴـﺮ ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛﺮ ‪7.‬‬ ‫‪ُ according to‬ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ‬ ‫ﺎن َذ َﻫﺒَﺎ‬‫اَ ْﳋَ ِﺎدﻣﻮ َن َذﻫﺒـﻮا ‪ -‬اَ ْﳋَ ِﺎدﻣ ِ‬
‫َ ٌْ ُ ٌ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ ْ َُ ْ‬
‫ﺐ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ -‬اَ ْﳋَﺎد ُم َذ َﻫ َ‬
‫‪preceding noun‬‬
‫ﺴﺮ ‪8.‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺚ ‪ or‬ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ‬ ‫وِ‬
‫اﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ‬
‫ﺿﻤْﻴـٌﺮ ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﻜ ﱠ ٌ‬‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ﺎل ﻗَ ُﺎﻣ ْﻮا‬
‫ﺖ ‪ or‬اَﻟﱢﺮ َﺟ ُ‬ ‫ﺎل ﻗَ َﺎﻣ ْ‬
‫اَﻟﱢﺮ َﺟ ُ‬

‫‪EXERCISE‬‬

‫ﻞ ‪1. Fill in a suitable‬‬ ‫ِ‬

‫‪ in the spaces below.‬ﻓ ْﻌ ٌ‬
‫‪i.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻟﺪان _______‬ ‫اﻟﻄﻼب ‪ii.‬‬
‫ُ‬ ‫_______‪_______/‬‬
‫_______ اﻟﻨﺴﺎء ‪iii.‬‬ ‫‪iv.‬‬ ‫_______‪ _______/‬اﻟﺴﻔﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫‪v.‬‬ ‫اﻷﻃﻔﺎل _______‪_______/‬‬ ‫_______‪ _______/‬اﻟﻴﻮم اﻣﺮأةٌ ‪vi.‬‬

‫‪67‬‬
‫‪Section 3.7.2‬‬
‫ﺎﻋﻠُﻪ ‪ /‬ﻧَﺎﺋِﺐ اﻟْ َﻔ ِ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬ ‫ﺴ ﱠﻢ ﻓَ ُ‬
‫َﻢ ﻳُ َ‬
‫ﻓَﺎﻋ ٌﻞ ‪ – Substitute of‬ﻓ ْﻌ ُﻞ َﻣﺎ ﻟ ْ‬

‫ﳎ ُﻬ ْﻮٌل ‪Definition: It is that noun, which appears with a‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪ is‬ﻓَ ِ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ ‪ (passive voice). The original‬ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ َْ‬
‫ﺎﻋﻠُﻪُ ‪َ subsitutes it, thus it is also called‬ﻣ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮٌل ﺑِِﻪ ‪dropped and the‬‬‫‪ of such‬ﻣ ْﻔﻌﻮٌل ‪ (the‬ﻣ ْﻔﻌﻮٌل ﻣﺎ َﱂ ﻳﺴ ﱠﻢ ﻓَ ِ‬
‫َ ُْ َ ْ ُ َ‬ ‫َ ُْ‬
‫ﻞ‪a‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ is not mentioned).‬ﻓَﺎﻋ ٌﻞ ‪ whose‬ﻓ ْﻌ ٌ‬
‫‪e.g.‬‬ ‫ﺿ ِﺮ َ‬
‫ب َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫)‪Zayd was hit. (The doer is not known/mentioned.‬‬

‫ﻞ ‪The same‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬

‫‪ usage rules apply as mentioned above in Table 3.5.‬ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ – ﻓَﺎﻋ ٌ‬
‫‪e.g.‬‬ ‫ﺸﺔُ ‪1.‬‬ ‫ت َﻋﺎﺋِ َ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﻧُﺼَﺮ ْ‬
‫ت ‪2.‬‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫َﻋﺎﺋ َﺸﺔُ ﻧُﺼَﺮ ْ‬
‫ﺼﺮ اﻟْﻴـﻮم ﻋﺎﺋِﺸﺔُ ‪ or‬ﻧُ ِ ِ‬
‫ﺸﺔُ ‪3.‬‬‫ﺼَﺮت اﻟْﻴَـ ْﻮَم َﻋﺎﺋِ َ‬ ‫ﻧُ ِ َ َ ْ َ َ َ‬
‫ﱠﻤﺲ ‪4.‬‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﺲ ‪ُ or‬رإﻳَﺖ اﻟﺸ ْ ُ‬ ‫ﱠﻤ ُ‬ ‫ي اﻟﺸ ْ‬ ‫ُرإ َ‬
‫ﺎل ‪ or‬ﺿ ِﺮﺑ ِ‬
‫ﺎل ‪5.‬‬‫ﺖ اﻟﱢﺮ َﺟ ُ‬ ‫َُ‬ ‫ب اﻟﱢﺮ َﺟ ُ‬‫ﺿ ِﺮ َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﺎل ‪6.‬‬‫ب اﻟﱢﺮ َﺟ ُ‬ ‫ﺿ ِﺮ َ‬ ‫ب اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ َﻼن ‪ُ or‬‬ ‫ﺿ ِﺮ َ‬ ‫ﺿ ِﺮ َ‬
‫ب اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ ‪ُ or‬‬ ‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﺎن ﻃُﻠﺒَﺎ ‪ or‬اَ ْﳋَﺎد ُﻣ ْﻮ َن ﻃُﻠﺒُـ ْﻮا ‪7.‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اَ ْﳋَﺎدم ﻃُﻠﺐ ‪ or‬اَ ْﳋَﺎدﻣ ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ُ َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑـُ ْﻮا ‪8.‬‬‫ﺎل ُ‬‫ﺖ ‪ or‬اَﻟﱢﺮ َﺟ ُ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑَ ْ‬‫ﺎل ُ‬ ‫اَﻟﱢﺮ َﺟ ُ‬

‫‪Sentence Analysis:‬‬

‫ﺎب‬
‫اﻟْﺒَ ُ‬ ‫ﻓُﺘِ َﺢ‬ ‫‪The door was opened.‬‬
‫ﺐ اﻟْ َﻔﺎﻋِ ِﻞ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﻧَﺎﺋ ُ‬ ‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ َْﳎ ُﻬ ْﻮٌل‬

‫‪EXERCISE‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪.‬ﻧَﺎﺋِﺐ اﻟْ َﻔ ِ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ ‪ with its‬ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ َْ‬
‫ﳎ ُﻬ ْﻮٌل ‪1. Convert the following to‬‬ ‫ُ‬
‫ﺳﺮق اﻟﻠﺺ اﳌﺎل ‪i.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻌﺒﺪ اﷲ ‪iii.‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ زﻳﺪ اﻷﺑﻮاب ‪ii.‬‬ ‫ذﺑﺢ اﻟﺮﺟﻞ اﻟﺸﺎة ‪iv.‬‬

‫ﻞ ‪2. Convert the following to‬‬ ‫ِ ِ‬

‫‪َ .‬ﻣ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮٌل – ﻓَﺎﻋ ٌﻞ – ﻓ ْﻌ ٌ‬
‫ﺐ اﻟﺒﻘﺮة ‪i.‬‬
‫ُْﲢﻠَ ُ‬ ‫ﺳِﺈ َل اﳌﻌﻠﻢ ‪iii.‬‬
‫ُ‬
‫ﻗُ ِﻄﻌ ِ‬
‫ﺖ اﻟﺰﻫﺮة ‪ii.‬‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُﺷ ِﺮ َ‬
‫ب اﻟﻠﱭ ‪iv.‬‬

‫‪68‬‬
Section 3.7.3
ِ ِ
َ ‫ﺸﺒﱠـ َﻬﺘَـ ْﻴ ِﻦ ﺑﻠَْﻴ‬
‫ﺲ‬ َ ‫ – ا ْﺳ ُﻢ َﻣﺎ َو َﻻ اَﻟ ُْﻤ‬The Noun of ‫ َﻣﺎ‬and ‫ َﻻ‬, Which Is Similar to ‫ﺲ‬
َ ‫ﻟ َْﻴ‬
 It means that ‫ َﻣﺎ‬and ‫ َﻻ‬have the same meaning and effect (‫ﻞ‬
ٌ ‫ ) َﻋ َﻤ‬as ‫ﻟَْﻴﺲ‬. َ
ِ
e.g. ‫َﻣﺎ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﻗَﺎﺋ ًﻤﺎ‬ Zayd is not standing.
‫ﻚ‬َ ‫ﻀ َﻞ ِﻣْﻨ‬َ ْ‫َﻻ َر ُﺟ ٌﻞ أَﻓ‬ No man is more virtuous than you.
ِ َ‫ﻧ‬.
 ‫ َﻣﺎ‬can appear before a ٌ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬or a ٌ‫ﻜَﺮة‬
 ‫ َﻻ‬appears before a ٌ‫ﻧَﻜَِﺮة‬.
ِ
 When the ‫ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬ َ of ‫ َﻣﺎ‬appears before the ‫ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ‬, or the word ‫ إِﱠﻻ‬appears before the ‫ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬,
َ the
effect of ‫ َﻣﺎ‬is cancelled.
e.g. ‫َﻣﺎ ﻗَﺎﺋِ ٌﻢ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ Zayd is not standing.
‫َو َﻣﺎ ُﳏَ ﱠﻤ ٌﺪ إِﱠﻻ َر ُﺳ ْﻮٌل‬ And Muhammad is not but a messenger. /
And Muhammad is only a messenger.
[Allah bless him and give him peace]

Section 3.7.4
ِ ‫ – َﺧﺒـﺮ َﻻ اَﻟﱠﺘِﻰ ﻟِﻨَـ ْﻔ ِﻲ اﻟ‬The ‫ َﺧﺒـﺮ‬of That ‫ َﻻ‬Which Negates an Entire ‫( ِﺟ ْﻨﺲ‬Class)
ِ ‫ْﺠ ْﻨ‬
‫ﺲ‬ ْ َُ ٌَ ٌ
ِ
 ‫ َﻻ‬gives its ‫ ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ‬a fathah and its ‫ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬ ِ ِ
َ a dammah when the ‫ ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ‬and the ‫ َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬are ٌ‫ﻧَﻜَﺮة‬.
e.g. ‫ﻞ ﻗَﺎﺋِ ٌﻢ‬ َ ‫َﻻ َر ُﺟ‬ No man is standing.

Table 3.6
Different Forms of the Noun of ‫ َﻻ‬and Its I‘raab

‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ َﻻ‬ Explanation I‘raab Example

1. ‫ﺎف‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬
1ِ
َ ‫ ُﻣ‬or ‫ﻀﺎف‬
ِ
َ ‫ﺷْﺒﻪُ اﻟْ ُﻤ‬ ‫ب‬
ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫َﻣْﻨ‬ ‫َﻻ َﺧ ِﺎد َم َر ُﺟ ٍﻞ ِﰲ اﻟ ﱠﺪا ِر‬
There is no servant of
a man in the house.
‫ﻮم‬ ِ
ٌ ‫َﻻ َﺳﺎﻋﻴًﺎ َﺧ ًﲑا َﻣ ْﺬ ُﻣ‬
The one who attempts
to do good is not
blameworthy.
2. ٌ‫ﻧَ ِﻜَﺮةٌ ُﻣ ْﻔَﺮَدة‬ ‫َﻣْﺒ ِﲏﱞ َﻋﻠَﻰ اﻟْ َﻔْﺘ ِﺢ‬ ‫َﻻ َر ُﺟ َﻞ ِﰲ اﻟ ﱠﺪا ِر‬
There is no man in the
house.

1
It refers to the case when a word is connected to another word, which completes its meaning, in the same way
that mudaaf and mudaaf ilayhi are connected to one another.

69
 Table 3.6 – Continued

‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ َﻻ‬ Explanation I‘raab Example

3. ٌ‫ﻣﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬
َْ - The ‫ َﻻ‬has to be ٌ‫َﻣ ْﺮﻓُـ ْﻮع‬ ‫َﻻ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ِﰲ اﻟ ﱠﺪا ِر َو َﻻ َﻋ ْﻤٌﺮو‬
repeated with Neither is Zayd in the
another ٌ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬. house nor ‘Amr.

- The effect of ‫ َﻻ‬is

cancelled.
4. ٌ‫ ﻧَ ِﻜَﺮة‬with a word - The ‫ َﻻ‬has to be ٌ‫َﻣ ْﺮﻓُـ ْﻮع‬ ٌ‫َﻻ ﻓِ َﻴﻬﺎ َر ُﺟ ٌﻞ َو َﻻ اِ ْﻣَﺮأَة‬
between it and ‫َﻻ‬ repeated. Neither is there a man
- The effect of ‫ َﻻ‬is in it nor a woman.

cancelled.
5. ‫ َﻻ‬and ٌ‫ ﻧَ ِﻜَﺮة‬repeated - It can be read in ‫ﻓَـْﺘ ُﺤ ُﻬ َﻤﺎ‬ 2
‫ﻮل َو َﻻ ﻗُـ ﱠﻮَة‬َ ‫َﻻ َﺣ‬
five ways.
with no word ‫َرﻓْـ ُﻌ ُﻬ َﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻮل َو َﻻ ﻗُـ ﱠﻮٌة‬ٌ ‫َﻻ َﺣ‬
between them ‫ﺐ اﻟﺜﱠ ِﺎﱐ‬ ِ
ُ‫ﺼ‬ ْ َ‫ﻓَـْﺘ ُﺢ ْاﻷَﱠول َو ﻧ‬ ‫ﻮل َو َﻻ ﻗُـ ﱠﻮًة‬
َ ‫َﻻ َﺣ‬
‫ﻓَـْﺘ ُﺢ ْاﻷَﱠوِل و َرﻓْ ُﻊ اﻟﺜﱠ ِﺎﱐ‬ ٌ‫ﻮل َو َﻻ ﻗُـ ﱠﻮة‬
َ ‫َﻻ َﺣ‬
‫َرﻓْ ُﻊ ْاﻷَﱠوِل و ﻓَـْﺘ ُﺢ اﻟﺜﱠ ِﺎﱐ‬ ‫ﻮل َو َﻻ ﻗُـ ﱠﻮَة‬
ٌ ‫َﻻ َﺣ‬

Note: The ‫ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬

َ of ‫ َﻻ‬may be omitted when the meaning is understood.
e.g. َ ْ‫َﻻ ﺑَﺄ‬
‫س‬ i.e. ‫ﻚ‬ َ ْ‫َﻻ ﺑَﺄ‬
َ ‫س َﻋﻠَْﻴ‬ There is no harm upon you. / No problem.

EXERCISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out the rule which applies.
i. ‫ﻻ ﺧﲑ ﰱ ﻣﺎل اﻟﺒﺨﻴﻞ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻪ‬ iii. ‫ﻻ ﺑﻜﺮ ﰱ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ و ﻻ ﺣﺴﻦ‬
ii. ‫ﻻ ﻃﺎﻟﺐ ﻋﻠﻢ ﰱ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬ iv. ‫ﻻ ﰱ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ و ﻻ ﻃﺎﻟﺐ‬

2
There is no power (to do good) and there is no power (to stay away from evil)…

70
Section 3.8
‫ﺎت‬
ٌ َ‫ﺼ ْﻮﺑ‬
ُ ‫ – َﻣ ْﻨ‬Words Which Are Always Mansoob
3

1. ‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل ﺑِِﻪ‬ 7. ِ ‫ اَﻟﺘ‬/ ‫اَﻟﺘﱠﻤﻴِﻴـﺰ‬

‫ﱠﻤْﻴـُﺰ‬ ُْ ْ
ِ ِ
2. ‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل ُﻣﻄْﻠَ ٌﻖ‬ 8. ‫َﺧ َﻮا َﺎ‬َ ‫ا ْﺳ ُﻢ إِ ﱠن َو أ‬
3. ُ‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل ﻟَﻪ‬ known as ُ‫ﺴﺔ‬ ْ ‫اَﻟْ َﻤ َﻔﺎﻋِْﻴ ُﻞ‬
َ ‫اﳋَ ْﻤ‬ 9. ‫ﺲ‬ ِِ
َ ‫َﺧﺒَـُﺮ َﻣﺎ َو َﻻ اَﻟْ ُﻤ َﺸﺒﱠـ َﻬﺘَـ ْﲔ ﺑﻠَْﻴ‬
4. ُ‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل َﻣ َﻌﻪ‬ 10. ‫ﺲ‬ِ ‫اﳉِْﻨ‬ ْ ‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ َﻻ اَﻟﱠِ ْﱵ ﻟِﻨَـ ْﻔ ِﻲ‬
5. ‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل ﻓِْﻴ ِﻪ‬ 11. ‫َﺧ َﻮا َِﺎ‬
َ ‫َﺧﺒَـُﺮ َﻛﺎ َن َو أ‬
6. ‫ﺎل‬
ُ َ‫اَ ْﳊ‬ 12. ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ ْﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﲎ‬

Of these, 8,9,10 and 11 have been discussed before. Here, we will discuss the remaining.

Section 3.8.1
‫ – َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮ ٌل ﺑِ ِﻪ‬Object
Definition: It is that word on which the action of the ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ ﻓَﺎﻋ‬takes place.
e.g. ً‫َﻣﺎء‬ ‫َﺧﺎﻟِ ٌﺪ‬ َ ‫َﺷ ِﺮ‬
‫ب‬ Khalid drank water.
‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل ﺑِِﻪ‬ ِ َ‫ﻓ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬

 Sometimes, the verb governing the ‫ َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل ﺑِِﻪ‬is dropped as in the following:
a. ‫( ُﻣﻨَﺎدٰى‬the one being called):
e.g. ‫اِﺑْ َﻦ َزﻳْ ٍﺪ‬ ‫ﻳَﺎ‬ O son of Zayd!
(‫ُﻣﻨَﺎدٰى ) َﻣ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮٌل ﺑِِﻪ‬ ‫ف اﻟﻨﱢ َﺪ ِاء‬ ُ ‫َﺣ ْﺮ‬
It was originally (‫)أ َْد ُﻋ ْﻮ اِﺑْ َﻦ َزﻳْ ٍﺪ‬. The verb ‫ أ َْد ُﻋ ْﻮ‬was dropped.

Note:
 The ‫ف اﻟﻨﱢ َﺪ ِاء‬
ُ ‫( َﺣ ْﺮ‬vocative particle) substitutes the omitted verb.
Some of the vocative particles are as follows:
َ‫ أ‬and ‫أَ ْي‬ These are used when the ‫ ُﻣﻨَﺎدٰى‬is near.
‫ أَﻳَﺎ‬and ‫َﻫﻴَﺎ‬ These are used when the ‫ ُﻣﻨَﺎدٰى‬is far.
‫ﻳَﺎ‬ This is used for both (near and far).

3
There are exceptions to the rule. Mustathnaa, for example, is not always mansoob. It is still mentioned under this
category because most of the time, it is mansoob.

71
 Table 3.7
Rules Governing the I‘raab of the ‫ُﻣﻨَﺎدٰى‬

‫ُﻣﻨَﺎدٰى‬ ٌ‫َﺣﺎﻟَﺔ‬ Example

‫ﺎف‬ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ ٍ
1.
َ ‫ُﻣ‬ ‫ب‬
ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫ﻳَﺎ اﺑْ َﻦ َزﻳْﺪ َﻣْﻨ‬
O son of Zayd!
4ِ ِ
2. ‫ﻀﺎف‬ َ ‫َﺷﺒِﻴﻪٌ ﺑِﺎﻟْ ُﻤ‬ ‫ب‬ ُ ‫ﻳَﺎ ﻗﺎ ِرءًا ﻛﺘَﺎﺑًﺎ َﻣْﻨ‬
ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬ O reader of a book!

‫ﻧَ ِﻜَﺮةٌ َﻏ ُﲑ ُﻣ َﻌﻴﱠـﻨَ ٍﺔ‬ ‫ب‬ ِِ

3.
ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫ﻳَﺎ َر ُﺟ ًﻼ ُﺧ ْﺬ ﺑﻴَﺪ ْي َﻣْﻨ‬
O man! Take my hand. (call of
(Unspecified nakirah) a blind man to any person for
assisstance)
4. ٌ‫ﻧَ ِﻜَﺮةٌ ُﻣ َﻌﻴﱠـﻨَﺔ‬ ٌ‫َﻣ ْﺮﻓُـ ْﻮع‬ ‫ﻳَﺎ َر ُﺟ ُﻞ‬ O man!
(Specified nakirah)
5. ٌ‫َﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔٌ ُﻣ ْﻔَﺮَدة‬ ٌ‫َﻣ ْﺮﻓُـ ْﻮع‬ ‫ﻳَﺎ َزﻳْ ُﺪ‬ O Zayd!
(Singular ma‘rifah)
6. ‫ف ﺑِ ال‬
ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﻌﱠﺮ‬ ٌ‫َﻣ ْﺮﻓُـ ْﻮع‬ ‫( أَﻳـﱡ َﻬﺎ‬masculine) or ‫( أَﻳـﱠﺘُـ َﻬﺎ‬feminine) has to be
added between the ‫ف اﻟﻨﱢ َﺪ ِاء‬ ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬and ‫ ُﻣﻨَﺎدٰى‬.
‫ ﻳَﺎ أَﻳـﱡ َﻬﺎ اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ‬O man! ُ‫ ﻳَﺎ أَﻳـﱠﺘُـ َﻬﺎ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺮأَة‬O woman!

 ‫( ﺗَـ ْﺮِﺧْﻴ ٌﻢ‬abbreviation) is allowed in munaadaa.

‫ﻚ‬ ِ ُ ‫ ﻳَﺎ َﻣ‬or ‫ﻳَﺎ َﻣ ِﺎل‬
e.g. ُ ‫ ﻳَﺎ َﻣﺎﻟ‬can become ‫ﺎل‬
‫ﺼ ْﻮُر‬
ُ ‫ ﻳَﺎ َﻣْﻨ‬can become ‫ﺺ‬
ُ ْ‫ﻳَﺎ َﻣﻨ‬
Note: The last letter can be given a dammah or it can retain its original harakah.

b. ‫ﺳ ْﻬ ًﻼ‬
َ ‫أ َْﻫ ًﻼ َو‬: This is said to one’s guest for welcoming him/her.
Its original is ‫ﺳ ْﻬ ًﻼ‬َ ‫ﺖ‬ َ ‫ﺖ أ َْﻫ ًﻼ َو َوﻃَْﻴ‬
َ ‫أَﺗَـْﻴ‬, which means “You have come to your own people
and have trampled comfortable ground.” In other words, “you are welcome.” Here two
verbs, ‫ﺖ‬َ ‫ أَﺗَـْﻴ‬and ‫ﺖ‬
َ ‫ َوﻃَْﻴ‬have been dropped.

c. Sometimes, the verb governing the ‫ َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل ﺑِِﻪ‬is dropped at the time of warning someone,
due to context. Examples include the following:
ِ ‫ اِﺗ‬to give the same meaning, which is
 ‫ اَﻟﻄﱠ ِﺮﻳْ َﻖ اَﻟﻄﱠ ِﺮﻳْ َﻖ‬is used instead of ‫ﱠﻖ اﻟﻄﱠ ِﺮﻳْ َﻖ‬
ِ ‫ اِﺗ‬has been dropped.
“Beware of the road!” Here, the verb ‫ﱠﻖ‬
‫َﺳ َﺪ‬ َ ‫ إِﻳﱠ‬is used instead of ‫َﺳ ِﺪ‬ ِ َ ‫ اِﺗ ِﱠﻖ ﻧـَ ْﻔﺴ‬to give the same meaning, which
 َ ‫ﺎك َو ْاﻷ‬ َ ‫ﻚ ﻣ َﻦ ْاﻷ‬ َ
is “Save yourself from the lion.”

ِ ‫اﻟْﻤﻀ‬
This is another term for ‫ﺎف‬ ِ
َ ُ ُ‫ﺷْﺒﻪ‬. As mentioned earlier, it is similar to mudaaf in meaning.
4

72
Section 3.8.2
‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮ ٌل ُﻣﻄْﻠَ ٌﻖ‬

Definition: It is the masdar of the verb that governs it and is used for the following:
 ‫( ﺗَﺄْﻛِﻴ ٌﺪ‬emphasis) e.g. ‫ﺿ ْﺮﺑًﺎ‬
َ ُ‫ﺿَﺮﺑْـﺘُﻪ‬
َ I beat him severely.
 ‫( ﺑـَﻴَﺎ ُن اﻟﻨﱠـ ْﻮِع‬description of type) e.g. ‫ﺖ ِﺟ ْﻠ َﺴﺔَ اﻟْ َﻘﺎ ِر ِئ‬ُ ‫َﺟﻠَ ْﺴ‬ I sat like a Qari would sit.
 ‫( ﺑـَﻴَﺎ ُن اﻟْ َﻌ َﺪ ِد‬number of times) e.g. ‫ﲔ‬ِ ْ ‫ﺿﺮﺑـَﺘَـ‬
َ َ ُ‫ﺿَﺮﺑْـﺘُﻪ‬
َ I hit him twice.

Note: Sometimes, the verb governing ‫ َﻣ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮٌل ُﻣﻄْﻠَ ٌﻖ‬is dropped because of context.
For example, ‫ﺧْﻴـَﺮ َﻣ ْﻘ َﺪٍم‬ ِ
َ . Originally, it was ‫ﺖ ﻗُ ُﺪ ْوًﻣﺎ َﺧْﻴـَﺮ َﻣ ْﻘ َﺪٍم‬
َ ‫ﻗَﺪ ْﻣ‬, which means “You came a
good coming.” Here, the verb ‫ﺖ‬ ِ
َ ‫ﻗَﺪ ْﻣ‬, and ‫ﻗُ ُﺪ ْوًﻣﺎ‬, which is the ‫ َﻣ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮٌل ُﻣﻄْﻠَ ٌﻖ‬, have been dropped
ِ of the ‫ﻣ ْﻔﻌﻮٌل ﻣﻄْﻠَﻖ‬, which is ‫ﺧﻴـﺮ ﻣ ْﻘ َﺪٍم‬, remains.
because of context. Only the ٌ‫ﺻ َﻔﺔ‬ ٌ ُ ُْ َ َ ََْ

Section 3.8.3
ٌ ُ‫ َﻣ ْﻔﻌ‬/ ‫َﺟﻠِ ِﻪ‬
ُ‫ﻮل ﻟَﻪ‬ ِ ٌ ‫ﻣ ْﻔﻌ‬
ْ ‫ﻮل ﻷ‬ ُ َ
Definition: It is that noun, which explains the reason for the action taking place. Generally, it
is a masdar.
e.g. ‫ﺿَﺮﺑْـﺘُﻪُ ﺗَﺄْ ِدﻳْـﺒًﺎ‬
َ I beat/hit him to teach (him) manners.

Section 3.8.4
ُ‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮ ٌل َﻣ َﻌﻪ‬

Definition: It is that noun, which appears after such a ‫ َو ٌاو‬, which has the meaning of ‫( َﻣ َﻊ‬with).
This ‫ َو ٌاو‬is known as ‫ َو ُاو اﻟْ َﻤﻌِﻴﱠ ِﺔ‬.
‫ﺎب‬ ِ
e.g. َ َ‫َﺟﺎءَ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ َو اﻟْﻜﺘ‬ Zayd came with the book.
‫ﺖ َو َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬ ِ
ُ ‫ﺟْﺌ‬ I came with Zayd.

73
Section 3.8.4
‫ َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮ ٌل ﻓِ ْﻴ ِﻪ‬/ ‫ف‬
ُ ‫اَﻟﻈﱠْﺮ‬

Definition: It is that noun, which denotes the time (‫ ) َزَﻣﺎ ٌن‬or place (‫ ) َﻣ َﻜﺎ ٌن‬in which the action
took place.
e.g. ‫ﺷ ْﻬًﺮا‬
َ ‫ت‬
ُ ‫َﺳﺎﻓَـ ْﺮ‬ I travelled for a month.

 Both types of ‫ف‬ ٌ ‫ﻇُُﺮْو‬, viz., ‫ َزَﻣﺎ ٌن‬and ‫ َﻣ َﻜﺎ ٌن‬are of two types: ‫( َْﳏ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬limited, restricted)
and ‫( ُﻣْﺒـ َﻬ ٌﻢ‬umlimited, unrestricted).
ِ ‫ف اﻟﱠﺰﻣ‬
Types of ‫ﺎن‬
 َ ُ ‫ﻇُُﺮْو‬
i. ‫( َْﳏ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬limited, restricted): for example,
‫ﻳـَ ْﻮٌم‬ day e.g. ‫ﺖ ﻳـَ ْﻮًﻣﺎ‬ُ ‫ﺻ ْﻤ‬ ُ I fasted for one day.
‫ﻟَْﻴ ٌﻞ‬ e.g. ‫ﺖ ﻟَْﻴ ًﻼ‬ ِ
night ُ ‫َﻋﻤ ْﻠ‬ I worked for one night.
‫ﻬﺮ‬
ٌ ‫َﺷ‬ month e.g. ‫ﺷ ْﻬًﺮا‬
َ ‫ﺖ‬ ُ ‫ﺻ ْﻤ‬ ُ I fasted for a month.
ٌ‫َﺳﻨَﺔ‬ year e.g. ً‫ﺳﻨَﺔ‬َ ‫ت‬ ُ ‫َﺳﺎﻓَـ ْﺮ‬ I travelled for a year.

ii. ‫( ُﻣْﺒـ َﻬ ٌﻢ‬umlimited, unrestricted): for example,

‫َد ْﻫٌﺮ‬ long period of time
e.g. ‫ﺖ َد ْﻫًﺮا‬
ُ ‫ﺻ ْﻤ‬
ُ I fasted for a long time.
‫ﲔ‬ ِ
ٌْ ‫ ﺣ‬some time (could be short or long time period of time)
e.g. ‫ﱠﻫ ِﺮ‬ ِ ِ َ‫دﻋﺎ ﻧـُﻮح ﻗ‬
ْ ‫ﻮﻣﻪُ ﺣْﻴـﻨًﺎ ﻣ َﻦ اﻟﺪ‬
َ ٌْ ََ
Nuh called his people for some time.

ِ ‫ف اﻟْﻤ َﻜ‬
Types of ‫ﺎن‬
 َ ُ ‫ﻇُُﺮْو‬
i. ‫( َْﳏ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬limited, restricted):
e.g. ‫ﺴ ِﺠ ِﺪ‬ ِ ُ ‫ﺻﻠﱠْﻴ‬
ْ ‫ﺖ ﰲ اﻟْ َﻤ‬ َ I prayed in the mosque.
ِ
e.g. ‫ﺖ ﰲ اﻟﺪﱠار‬ ِ ُ ‫َﺟﻠَ ْﺴ‬ I sat in the house.

ii. ‫( ُﻣْﺒـ َﻬ ٌﻢ‬umlimited, unrestricted):

‫ﻒ‬
َ ‫ َﺧ ْﻠ‬behind e.g. ُ‫ﺖ َﺧ ْﻠ َﻔﻪ‬ُ ‫َﺟﻠَ ْﺴ‬ I sat behind him.
‫أ ََﻣ َﺎم‬ in front of e.g. ُ‫ﺖ أ ََﻣ َﺎﻣﻪ‬
ُ ‫ﻗُ ْﻤ‬ I stood in front of him.

َْ ), the preposition ‫ ِﰲ‬is mentioned in words; while in

Note: In the case of ‫ﳏ ُﺪ ْوٌد( َﻣ َﻜﺎ ٌن‬
the case of ‫) ُﻣْﺒـ َﻬ ٌﻢ( َﻣ َﻜﺎ ٌن‬, it is assumed (‫ﱠر‬
ٌ‫) ُﻣ َﻘﺪ‬.

74
 ‫‪The above-mentioned fives maf‘ools have been combined in one verse, which is as‬‬
‫‪follows:‬‬

‫ﲪْﻴ ًﺪا‬‫ﲪ ْﺪت ﲪَْ ًﺪا ﺣ ِﺎﻣ ًﺪا و َِ‬ ‫ِ‬

‫َ َ‬ ‫َ ُ‬
‫ِر َﻋﺎﻳَﺔَ ُﺷ ْﻜ ِﺮﻩِ َد ْﻫًﺮا َﻣ ِﺪﻳْ ًﺪا‬
‫‪I praised Haamid and Hameed a lot out of regard for thanking them,‬‬
‫‪for an extended period of time.‬‬

‫‪Sentence Analysis:‬‬

‫ﺎف إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ = ُ‬
‫ﺷ ْﻜ ِﺮﻩِ ‪1.‬‬ ‫ﻀ ٌ‬‫ﺎف ‪ُ +‬ﻣ َ‬
‫ﻀ ٌ‬‫ُﻣ َ‬
‫ﺎف إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ = ِر َﻋﺎﻳَﺔَ ُﺷ ْﻜ ِﺮﻩِ‬
‫ﻀ ٌ‬ ‫ﺎف ‪ُ +‬ﻣ َ‬
‫ﻀ ٌ‬‫ُﻣ َ‬
‫ﺻ َﻔﺔٌ = َﻣ ِﺪﻳْ ًﺪا ‪2.‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ف = َد ْﻫًﺮا‬ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ ٌ‬ ‫َﻣ ْﻮ ُ‬
‫ﲪْﻴ ًﺪا ‪3.‬‬ ‫ف = َِ‬ ‫َﻣ ْﻌﻄُْﻮ ٌ‬
‫ﻒ = َو‬ ‫ف اﻟْﻌﻄَ ِ‬
‫َﺣ ْﺮ ُ َ‬
‫ف َﻋﻠَْﻴ ِﻪ = َﺣ ِﺎﻣ ًﺪا‬ ‫َﻣ ْﻌﻄُْﻮ ٌ‬

‫َد ْﻫ ًﺮا َﻣ ِﺪﻳْ ًﺪا‬ ‫ِرﻋﺎﻳﺔَ ُﺷ ْﻜ ِﺮﻩِ‬

‫ََ‬ ‫َﺣ ِﺎﻣ ًﺪا َو َﺣ ِﻤ ْﻴ ًﺪا‬ ‫َﺣ ْﻤ ًﺪا‬ ‫َﺣ ِﻤ ْﺪ ُ‬
‫ت‬
‫|‬ ‫|‬
‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل ﻓِْﻴ ِﻪ = ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔٌ‬ ‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل ﻟَﻪُ‬ ‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل ﺑِِﻪ‬ ‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل ُﻣﻄْﻠَ ٌﻖ‬ ‫ﻓِﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﻓَ ِ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ٌْ‬

‫‪EXERCISE‬‬

‫‪َ in the following sentences.‬ﻣ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮٌل ‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and identify the type of‬‬

‫‪i.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ أﻛﻠﺘﲔ‬

‫أﻛﻞ ّ‬ ‫‪iv.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻓﺮ زﻳﺪ ﻃﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫رﻛﺐ إﺑﺮاﻫﻴﻢ اﳊﺼﺎن ‪ii.‬‬ ‫وﻗﻒ اﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ وﻗﻮف اﻟﻨﺸﺎط ‪v.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻓﺮت و أﺧﺎك ‪iii.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮأت اﻟﺪرس ﺻﺒﺎﺣﺎ أﻣﺎم اﳌﻌﻠﻢ ‪vi.‬‬

‫‪75‬‬
Section 3.8.5
‫ﺎل‬
ُ ‫ – اَﻟْ َﺤ‬State / Condition

Definition: It is a noun, which describes the condition of either the ‫ﻞ‬ ِ

ٌ ‫ ﻓَﺎﻋ‬or the ‫ َﻣ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮٌل‬or both at
the time the action contained in the verb took place.
e.g. ‫ﺟﺎءَ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ َراﻛِﺒًﺎ‬
َ Zayd came in the condition that he was mounted.
‫ﺖ َزﻳْ ًﺪا ﻧَﺎﺋِ ًﻤﺎ‬ ِ
ُ ‫ﺟْﺌ‬ I came to Zayd in the condition that he was sleeping.
ِ ْ ‫ﺖ َزﻳْ ًﺪا َﺟﺎﻟِﺴ‬
‫ﲔ‬ ُ ‫َﻛﻠﱠ ْﻤ‬ I spoke to Zayd in the condition that both of us were
َ
sitting.

Notes:

1. The condition itself is known as ‫ﺎل‬

ٌ ‫ َﺣ‬, whereas the one whose condition is being
ِ ‫اﳊ‬
described is known as ‫ﺎل‬َْ ‫ذُو‬.
2. The ‫ﺎل‬
ٌ ‫ َﺣ‬gets a nasb, which is generally in the form of two fathahs.
ِ ‫اﳊ‬
3. The ‫ﺎل‬ ٌ ‫ َﺣ‬is generally ٌ‫( ﻧَ ِﻜَﺮة‬when the ‫ﺎل‬
َْ ‫ ذُو‬is generally ٌ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬and the ‫ﺎل‬ ٌ ‫ َﺣ‬is not a
sentence).
e.g. ‫ﺟﺎءَ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ َراﻛِﺒًﺎ‬
َ Zayd came riding/while he was mounted.
ِ ‫اﳊ‬
4. If the ‫ﺎل‬ ِ ٌ ‫ َﺣ‬is brought before the ‫اﳊَ ِﺎل‬
َْ ‫ ذُو‬is ٌ‫ﻧَﻜَﺮة‬, the ‫ﺎل‬ ْ ‫ذُو‬.
e.g. ‫ﱐ َراﻛِﺒًﺎ َر ُﺟ ٌﻞ‬ ِ
ْ َ‫َﺟﺎء‬ A man came to me riding/while he was mounted.
ِ ‫اﳊ‬
5. The ‫ﺎل‬ ِ .
َْ ‫ ذُو‬can be a ‫ﺿﻤْﻴـٌﺮ‬ َ
e.g. ‫ﺴﺎ‬ ِ
ً ‫َزﻳْ ٌﺪ أَ َﻛ َﻞ َﺟﺎﻟ‬ Zayd ate sitting.
Here, the ‫ﺎل‬ ِ ‫اﳊ‬
َْ ‫ ذُو‬is ‫ ُﻫ َﻮ‬, which is the hidden dameer in ‫أَ َﻛ َﻞ‬.
6. The ‫ﺎل‬
ٌ ‫ َﺣ‬can be a sentence.
 ٌ ‫ َﺣ‬is a ٌ‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ اِ ِْﲰﻴﱠﺔ‬, then a ‫( َو ٌاو‬with or without a dameer) is added to give the
If the ‫ﺎل‬
meaning of condition.
e.g. ‫ﺼ ٰﻠﻮةَ َو أَﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ ُﺳ ٰﻜ ٰﺮى‬
‫َﻻ ﺗَـ ْﻘَﺮﺑُﻮا اﻟ ﱠ‬ Don’t come near salaah while you are
intoxicated.

 If the ‫ﺎل‬ ٌ ‫ َﺣ‬is a ٌ‫ ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔ‬and the ‫ ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬is ‫ﺎﺿﻰ‬

ِ ‫اَﻟْ ِﻔﻌﻞ اﻟْﻤ‬, ‫ ﻗَ ْﺪ‬has to appear before the ‫اَﻟْ ِﻔﻌﻞ‬
َ ُْ ُْ
ِ ‫اﻟْﻤ‬.
‫ﺎﺿﻰ‬ َ
ِ
e.g. ُ‫َﺟﺎءَ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ َو ﻗَ ْﺪ َﺧَﺮ َج َﺧﺎد ُﻣﻪ‬ Zayd came while his servant had left.

76
‫‪Sentence Analysis:‬‬

‫ﺟﺎءَ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ َراﻛِﺒًﺎ ‪1.‬‬

‫َ‬ ‫‪Zayd came riding/while he was mounted.‬‬

‫َراﻛِﺒًﺎ‬ ‫َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ ‫ﺎء‬

‫َﺟ َ‬
‫ﺎل‬
‫َﺣ ٌ‬ ‫اﳊ ِ‬
‫ﺎل ‪+‬‬‫ذُو َْ‬

‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔٌ‬ ‫ﻓَ ِ‬

‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬

‫ﺖ َﻋ ْﻤًﺮا ﻧَﺎﺋِ ًﻤﺎ ‪2.‬‬ ‫ِ‬

‫ﺟْﺌ ُ‬ ‫‪I came to ‘Amr while he was asleep.‬‬

‫ﻧَﺎﺋِ ًﻤﺎ‬ ‫َﻋ ْﻤ ًﺮا‬ ‫ِﺟ ْﺌ ُ‬

‫ﺖ‬
‫ﺎل‬
‫َﺣ ٌ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫اﳊَ ِﺎل‬
‫ذُو ْ‬

‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔٌ‬ ‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل ﺑِِﻪ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﻓِﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﻓَ ِ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ٌْ‬

‫ﺲ ‪3.‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬

‫ﺖ ﺑَﻜًْﺮا َو ُﻫ َﻮ َﺟﺎﻟ ٌ‬
‫ﻟَﻘْﻴ ُ‬ ‫‪I met Bakr while he was sitting.‬‬

‫ﺲ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﻟ َِﻘ ْﻴ ُ‬

‫َﺟﺎﻟ ٌ‬ ‫ُﻫ َﻮ‬ ‫َو‬ ‫ﺑَ ْﻜ ًﺮا‬ ‫ﺖ‬
‫َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬ ‫ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪاٌ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫َو ٌاو َﺣﺎﻟِﻴَﺔٌ‬

‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ اِ ِْﲰﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔٌ‬

‫ﺎل‬
‫َﺣ ٌ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫اﳊَ ِﺎل‬
‫ذُو ْ‬

‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔٌ‬ ‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل ﺑِِﻪ‬ ‫ﻞ( ‪+‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫)ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ ‪ +‬ﻓَﺎﻋ ٌ‬

‫ﺴﺎ ‪4.‬‬ ‫ِ‬

‫َزﻳ ٌﺪ أَ َﻛ َﻞ َﺟﺎﻟ ً‬ ‫‪Zayd ate while sitting.‬‬

‫ﺴﺎ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َﺟﺎﻟ ً‬ ‫أَ َﻛ َﻞ‬ ‫َزﻳ ٌﺪ‬
‫ﺿ ِﻤْﻴـٌﺮ ُﻣ ْﺴﺘَﺘَـٌﺮ ) ُﻫ َﻮ(‬ ‫ِِ‬
‫ﻓْﻴﻪ َ‬
‫|‬
‫ﺎل‬
‫َﺣ ٌ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫اﳊَ ِﺎل‬
‫ذُو ْ‬

‫ﻓَ ِ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ )أَ َﻛ َﻞ( ‪+‬‬

‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ اِ ِْﲰﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔٌ‬ ‫َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪاٌ‬

‫‪77‬‬
 ‫‪EXERCISE‬‬

‫اﳊَ ِﺎل ‪َ and‬ﺣ ٌ‬

‫ﺎل ‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out the‬‬ ‫‪ in the following sentences.‬ذُو ْ‬
‫‪i.‬‬ ‫أﺣﺐ اﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺬ ﳎﺘﻬﺪا‬ ‫‪iv.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺄﻛﻠﻮا اﻟﻄﻌﺎم ﺣﺎرا‬
‫ﻟﻘﻴﺖ زﻳﺪا راﻛﺒﲔ ‪ii.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺮت زﻳﺪا ﻣﺸﺪودا ‪v.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺄﻛﻠﻮا اﻟﻔﺎﻛﻬﺔ و ﻫﻲ ﻓﺠﺔ ‪iii.‬‬ ‫ﻏﺎب أﺧﻮك و ﻗﺪ ﺣﻀﺮ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎء ‪vi.‬‬

‫‪78‬‬
Section 3.8.6
ِ ‫ اَﻟﺘ‬/ ‫اَﻟﺘﱠﻤﻴِْﻴـﺰ‬
‫ﱠﻤ ْﻴـ ُﺰ‬ ُ ْ

Definition: It is an ٌ‫ﻜَﺮة‬ِ َ‫اِﺳﻢ ﻧ‬, which removes the ambiguity or vagueness created by the previous
ٌْ
noun. This ambiguity may be in distance, weight, measure, number, etc.
e.g. ‫ﺸَﺮ َﻛ ْﻮَﻛﺒًﺎ‬
َ ‫ﺖ أَ َﺣ َﺪ َﻋ‬
ُ ْ‫َرأَﻳ‬ I saw eleven stars.
Here, the word (‫ ) َﻛ ْﻮَﻛﺒًﺎ‬has clarified what (‫ﺸَﺮ‬
َ ‫ )أَ َﺣ َﺪ َﻋ‬refers to.
Sentence Analysis:

‫َﻛ ْﻮَﻛﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺸ َﺮ‬

َ ‫أَ َﺣ َﺪ َﻋ‬ ‫ﺖ‬
ُ ْ‫َرأَﻳ‬
‫َﲤِْﻴـٌﺰ‬ + ‫ﳑَُﻴﱠـٌﺰ‬

ٌ‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬ ‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل ﺑِِﻪ‬ + ِ َ‫ ﻓ‬+ ‫ﻓِﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ ٌْ
Notes:
 The ambiguous noun is called ‫ ﳑَُﻴﱠـٌﺰ‬and the noun which clarifies it is called ‫ َﲤِْﻴـٌﺰ‬or
‫ﲤَْﻴِْﻴـٌﺰ‬.
 The ‫ َﲤِْﻴـٌﺰ‬is mansoob and gets two fathahs.
 Sometimes, the ‫ َﲤِْﻴـٌﺰ‬is not mentioned in words but is understood from the
meaning of the sentence (‫ظ‬ ٌ ‫) َﻣ ْﻠ ُﺤ ْﻮ‬.
e.g. ‫َﺣ ُﺴ َﻦ اﻟْ َﻮﻟَ ُﺪ َﻛ َﻼ ًﻣﺎ‬ The boy is good in terms of (his) speech.
 If the ‫ ﳑَُﻴﱠـٌﺰ‬is a number, the rules with regards to the usage of numerals (on the
next page) must be kept in mind.

EXERCISE

1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out the ‫ ﳑَُﻴﱠـٌﺰ‬and ‫ َﲤِْﻴـٌﺰ‬in the following sentences.

i. ‫ﰱ اﳊﻘﻞ ﻋﺸﺮون ﺑﻘﺮة‬

ii. ‫ﺑﻌﺘﻪ ذراﻋﺎ ﺣﺮﻳﺮا‬
iii. ‫اﻟﻔﻴﻞ أﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ اﳉﻤﻞ ﺟﺴﻤﺎ‬
iv. ‫ﻃﺎب اﳌﻜﺎن ﻫﻮاء‬
v. ‫ﻻ أﻣﻠﻚ ﺷﱪا أرﺿﺎ‬
vi. ‫ﺷﺮﺑﺖ رﻃﻼ ﻟﺒﻨﺎ‬

79
Rules for ‫( أَ ْﺳ َﻤﺎءُ اﻟْ َﻌ َﺪ ِد‬Numerals)

Before we proceed, it should be pointed out that

‫( َﻋ َﺪ ٌد‬number) is the mumayyaz, and
‫( َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬the counted noun) is the tameez.

One and two (1-2)

 The ‫ َﻋ َﺪ ٌد‬and the ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬must correspond in all aspects.
e.g. ِ ‫وﻟَ ٌﺪ و‬
‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ one boy
َ َ
ِ ‫ﺑِْﻨﺖ و‬
ٌ‫اﺣ َﺪة‬ َ ٌ one girl
 The ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬will appear first and the ‫ َﻋ َﺪ ٌد‬will appear second.
Note: Normally, for one or two men etc., one would simply say ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ َر ُﺟ‬or ‫ َر ُﺟ َﻼن‬. However,
at times, the number is used for emphasis.

Three Through Ten (3-10)

 The ‫ َﻋ َﺪ ٌد‬and the ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬must be of opposite gender.
e.g. ‫ﺛََﻼﺛَﺔُ أَﻗْ َﻼٍم‬ eight pens
ٍ ‫ﲬَْﺲ ﺳﻴﱠﺎر‬
‫ات‬ َ َ ُ five cars
Note: In choosing the correct ‫ َﻋ َﺪ ٌد‬gender, the singular form of the ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬will be taken
into account.
e.g. ‫ﺎل َو َﲦَﺎﻧِﻴَﺔَ أَﻳﱠ ٍﺎم‬
ٍ ‫ﺳﺒﻊ ﻟَﻴ‬
َ َ َْ seven nights and eight days
ٍ ‫ ﻟَﻴ‬is feminine, and ‫( ﻳـﻮم‬day) of ‫ أَﻳﱠ ٍﺎم‬is
Here, the singular ٌ‫( ﻟَْﻴـﻠَﺔ‬night) of ‫ﺎل‬ َ ٌ َْ
masculine.
 From three onwards, the ‫ َﻋ َﺪ ٌد‬will appear first and the ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬second.
 The ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬will be ‫ﳎ ُﺮْوٌر‬
َْ ‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ‬.

Eleven and Twelve (11-12)

 The ‫ َﻋ َﺪ ٌد‬and the ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬must agree in all aspects.
e.g. ‫ أَ َﺣ َﺪ َﻋ َﺸَﺮ َﻛ ْﻮَﻛﺒًﺎ‬eleven stars
‫ اِﺛْـﻨَﺘَﺎ َﻋ ْﺸَﺮَة ﺑِْﻨﺘًﺎ‬twelve girls
From eleven onwards till 99, the ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬will be ‫ب‬ ِ
 ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫ َواﺣ ٌﺪ َﻣْﻨ‬.

80
Thirteen Through Nineteen (13-19)
 The gender of the first part of the ‫ َﻋ َﺪ ٌد‬should be opposite of the gender of the ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬.
e.g. ‫ أَْرﺑـَ َﻌﺔَ َﻋ َﺸَﺮ َر ُﺟ ًﻼ‬fourteen men
‫ ﺗِ ْﺴ َﻊ َﻋ ْﺸَﺮَة ﺑِْﻨﺘًﺎ‬nineteen girls
The ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬will be ‫ب‬ ِ
 ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫ َواﺣ ٌﺪ َﻣْﻨ‬.
 The “ten” ‫( ﻋﺸﺮ‬masc.)/‫( ﻋﺸﺮة‬fem.) will agree with the ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬in terms of gender.
Note: The ‫ ش‬of ‫ﻋﺸﺮ‬/‫ ﻋﺸﺮة‬will get a fathah when used with a masculine and a sukoon
when used with a feminine.

Twenty Till Ninety (20, 30, 40,…,90)

ْ ‫ ِﻋ‬to ‫( ﺗِ ْﺴ ُﻌ ْﻮ َن‬20,30,40,…90) will remain the same, irrespective of
 The gender of ‫ﺸ ُﺮْو َن‬
whether the ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬is masculine or feminine.
e.g. ‫ِﻋ ْﺸُﺮْو َن َر ُﺟ ًﻼ‬ twenty men
‫ﺛََﻼﺛـُ ْﻮ َن ﺑِﻨْﺘًﺎ‬ thirty girls
The ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬will be ‫ب‬ ِ
 ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫ َواﺣ ٌﺪ َﻣْﻨ‬.

Twenty-one and Twenty-two (21-22)

 The first part of the ‫ َﻋ َﺪ ٌد‬and the ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬must agree in all aspects.
e.g. ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ َو ِﻋ ْﺸُﺮْو َن َر ُﺟ ًﻼ‬ِ‫و‬
َ twenty-one men
‫اﺣ َﺪةٌ َو ِﻋ ْﺸُﺮْو َن ﺑِْﻨﺘًﺎ‬
ِ‫و‬
َ twenty-one girls
The ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬will be ‫ب‬ ِ
 ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬ُ ‫ َواﺣ ٌﺪ َﻣْﻨ‬.

Twenty-three Through Twenty-nine (23-29)

 The gender of the first part of the ‫ َﻋ َﺪ ٌد‬should be opposite of the gender of the ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬.
e.g. ‫أَْرﺑـَ َﻌﺔٌ َو ِﻋ ْﺸُﺮْو َن َر ُﺟ ًﻼ‬ twenty-four men
‫ﺖ َو ِﻋ ْﺸُﺮْو َن ﺑِﻨْﺘًﺎ‬
‫ِﺳ ﱞ‬ twenty-six girls
The ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬will be ‫ب‬ ِ
 ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫ َواﺣ ٌﺪ َﻣْﻨ‬.
 The same will apply to 33-39, 43-49…93-99.
 The “tens” will remain the same, irrespective of whether the ‫ود‬
ٌ ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ‬is masculine or
feminine.

81
Hundred (100)
 ٌ‫ ِﻣﺎﺋَﺔ‬will remain the same, irrespective of whether the ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬is masculine or feminine.
e.g. ‫ﺟ ٍﻞ‬ ِ
ُ ‫ﻣﺎﺋَﺔُ َر‬ hundred men
‫ﺖ‬ٍ ‫ِﻣﺎﺋَﺔُ ﺑِْﻨ‬ hundred girls
 For 200, ‫ ِﻣﺎﺋَـﺘَﺎ‬will be used. (‫ ِﻣﺎﺋَـ َﱵ‬in ‫اﳉَﱢﺮ‬ ِ‫ﺼ‬
ْ ‫ﺐ َو‬ ْ ‫) َﺣﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﻨﱠ‬
e.g. ‫ﺖ‬ ٍ ‫ِﻣﺎﺋَـﺘَﺎ ﺑِْﻨ‬ two hundred girls
‫ﺖ‬ٍ ‫ِﻣﺎﺋَـﱵ ﺑِْﻨ‬
َ two hundred girls
 The ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬will be ‫ﳎ ُﺮْوٌر‬ ِ ‫و‬.
َْ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ
 Since ٌ‫ ﻣﺎﺋَﺔ‬is feminine, the number before ٌ‫ ِﻣﺎﺋَﺔ‬will be masculine.
ِ
e.g. ‫ﺟ ٍﻞ‬ ِ ِ
ُ ‫ أَْرﺑـَ ُﻌﻤﺎﺋَﺔ َر‬four hundred men
ٍ‫أَرﺑـﻌ ِﻤﺎﺋَِﺔ اِﻣﺮأَة‬
َْ ُ َْ four hundred women
 If there are units with the 100’s as well, the same gender rule will apply as above till 99.
e.g. ‫ﺐ‬ ٍ ُ‫ِﻣﺎﺋَﺔٌ و َﻋ ْﺸﺮةُ ُﻛﺘ‬ hundred and ten books
َ َ
ً‫اﺳﺔ‬ ِ
َ ‫ﺲ َو أَْرﺑـَ ُﻌ ْﻮ َن ُﻛﱠﺮ‬
ٌ َْ‫ﻣﺎﺋَﺔٌ َو ﲬ‬ hundred and forty-five note-books

Thousand (1,000)
 ‫ﻒ‬ ٌ ْ‫ أَﻟ‬will remain the same, irrespective of whether the ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬is masculine or feminine.
e.g. ‫ﻒ َر ُﺟ ٍﻞ‬
ُ ْ‫أَﻟ‬ thousand men
‫ﺖ‬ٍ ‫أَﻟْﻒ ﺑِْﻨ‬
ُ thousand girls
 The ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬will be ‫ﳎ ُﺮْوٌر‬ ِ ‫و‬.
َْ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ
 Since ‫ﻒ‬ ٌ ْ‫ أَﻟ‬is masculine, the number before ‫ﻒ‬ ٌ ْ‫ أَﻟ‬will be feminine.
e.g. ‫ﺟ ٍﻞ‬ ِ
ُ ‫أَْرﺑـَ َﻌﺔُ اَٰﻻف َر‬ four thousand men
ٍ‫ف اِﻣﺮأَة‬ِ
َ ْ ‫أَْرﺑـَ َﻌﺔُ اَٰﻻ‬ four thousand women

Million (1,000,000)
 ‫ ِﻣ ْﻠﻴُـ ْﻮ ٌن‬will remain the same, irrespective of whether the ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬is masculine or feminine.
e.g. ‫ﺟ ٍﻞ‬ ِ
ُ ‫ﻣ ْﻠﻴُـ ْﻮ ُن َر‬ million men
‫ﺖ‬ٍ ‫ِﻣ ْﻠﻴـﻮ ُن ﺑِْﻨ‬
ُْ million girls
The ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬will be ‫ور‬ ِ
 ٌ ‫ َواﺣ ٌﺪ َْﳎُﺮ‬.
 Since ‫ ِﻣ ْﻠﻴُـ ْﻮ ٌن‬is masculine, the number before ‫ ِﻣ ْﻠﻴُـ ْﻮ ٌن‬will be feminine.
e.g. ‫ﺟ ٍﻞ‬ ُ ‫ﲔ َر‬َ ْ ِ‫أَْرﺑـَ َﻌﺔُ َﻣ َﻼﻳ‬ four million men
ٍ‫أَرﺑـﻌﺔُ ﻣ َﻼﻳِﲔ اِﻣﺮأَة‬
َ ْ َ ْ َ َ َْ four million women

82
 EXERCISE
1. Write the following in Arabic.
i. 2 schools vii. 11 books
ii. 12 women viii. 14 chairs
iii. 17 doors ix. 26 boys
iv. 21 cars x. 111 elephants
v. 150 houses xi. 195 keys
vi. 444 miles xii. 3333 roses

83
Section 3.8.7
‫اَﻟ ُْﻤ ْﺴﺘَﺜْـﻨٰﻰ‬

ِ ِ
ٌ‫ ا ْﺳﺘﺜْـﻨَﺎء‬means to exclude.
‫ ُﻣ ْﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﲎ‬is that noun, which has been excluded and appears after the ‫اﻻ ْﺳﺘِﺜْـﻨَ ِﺎء‬
ِْ ‫ف‬
ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬.
ِ ِ ِ ِ ُ ‫ﺣﺮ‬.
ُ‫ ُﻣ ْﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﲎ ﻣْﻨﻪ‬is that noun from which the ‫ ُﻣ ْﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﲎ‬has been excluded. It appears before ‫ف ْاﻻ ْﺳﺘﺜْـﻨَﺎء‬ َْ
‫اﻻ ْﺳﺘِﺜْـﻨَ ِﺎء‬
ِْ ‫ف‬ُ ‫ ُﺣُﺮْو‬are as follows:
‫َﻣﺎ َﻋ َﺪا‬ ‫َﻣﺎ َﺧ َﻼ‬ ‫َﻋ َﺪا‬ ‫َﺧ َﻼ‬ ‫ﺎﺷﺎ‬َ ‫َﺣ‬ ‫ِﺳ ٰﻮى‬ ‫َﻏْﻴـَﺮ‬ ‫إِﱠﻻ‬
e.g. ‫ﺟﺎءَ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮُم إِﱠﻻ َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬
َ The people came except Zayd.
‫َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬ ‫إِﱠﻻ‬ ‫اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮ ُم‬ ‫ﺎء‬
َ ‫َﺟ‬
‫ ُﻣ ْﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﲎ‬+ ‫اﻻ ْﺳﺘِﺜْـﻨَ ِﺎء‬
ِْ ‫ف‬ ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬+ ُ‫ُﻣ ْﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﲎ ِﻣْﻨﻪ‬

ٌ‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬ ِ َ‫ﻓ‬

‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ + ‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬

Related Terminology
ِ ‫ اَﻟْﻤﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﲎ اَﻟْﻤﺘ‬refers to the case when the ‫ ﻣﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﲎ‬was included in the ‫ ﻣﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﲎ ِﻣْﻨﻪ‬before the ‫اِﺳﺘِﺜْـﻨَﺎء‬.
‫ﱠﺼ ُﻞ‬ ُ ُْ ُْ ُ ُْ ٌ ْ
ِ
e.g. ‫ﺟﺎءَ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮُم إﱠﻻ َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬
َ The people came except Zayd.
(Zayd was one of the people before the exclusion.)

‫ اَﻟْ ُﻤ ْﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﲎ اَﻟْ ُﻤْﻨـ َﻘ ِﻄ ُﻊ‬refers to the case when the ‫ ُﻣ ْﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﲎ‬was not included in the ُ‫ ُﻣ ْﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﲎ ِﻣْﻨﻪ‬before the
ِ ِ
ٌ‫ا ْﺳﺘﺜْـﻨَﺎء‬.
e.g. ‫ﺠ َﺪ اﻟْ َﻤ ٰﻠﺌِ َﻜﺔُ إِﱠﻻ إِﺑْﻠِﻴﺲ‬
َ ‫ َﺳ‬The angels prostrated except Iblees.
َ
(Iblees was never one of the angels.)

‫َﺟﺎءَ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮُم إِﱠﻻ ِﲪَ ًﺎرا‬ The people came except the donkey.
(Donkey was never included among the people.)

ُ‫ اَﻟْ ُﻤ ْﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﲎ اَﻟْ ُﻤ َﻔﱠﺮغ‬refers to that sentence in which the ُ‫ ُﻣ ْﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﲎ ِﻣْﻨﻪ‬is not mentioned.
e.g. ‫ﺟﺎءَ إِﱠﻻ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬َ ‫ َﻣﺎ‬No one came except Zayd.
‫ اَﻟْ ُﻤ ْﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﲎ اَﻟْﻐَْﻴـُﺮ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﻔﱠﺮِغ‬refers to that sentence in which the ُ‫ ُﻣ ْﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﲎ ِﻣْﻨﻪ‬is mentioned.
e.g. ‫ﺟﺎءَ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮُم إِﱠﻻ َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬
َ The people came except Zayd.

84
‫ﺐ‬
ُ ‫( اَﻟْ َﻜ َﻼ ُم اﻟْ ُﻤ ْﻮ َﺟ‬positive statement) refers to that sentence, which does not have a ‫ﻧـَ ْﻔ ٌﻲ‬, ‫ ﻧـَ ْﻬ ٌﻲ‬or
‫اِ ْﺳﺘِ ْﻔ َﻬ ٌﺎم‬.
e.g. ‫ﺟﺎءَ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮُم إِﱠﻻ َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬
َ The people came except Zayd.

‫ﺐ‬ ِ ‫( اَﻟْ َﻜ َﻼ ُم اﻟْﻐَْﻴـﺮ اﻟْﻤﻮ َﺟ‬negative sentence) refers to that sentence, which does have a ‫ﻧـَ ْﻔﻲ‬, ‫ ﻧـَ ْﻬﻲ‬or
ُْ ُ ٌ ٌ
ِ ِ
‫ا ْﺳﺘ ْﻔ َﻬ ٌﺎم‬.
e.g. ‫ﺟﺎءَ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮُم إِﱠﻻ َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬
َ ‫َﻣﺎ‬ The people did not come except Zayd.

The i‘raab of the ‫ﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﲎ‬

ْ ‫ ُﻣ‬will be as given below:

Table 3.8
ُ ‫إِ ْﻋ َﺮ‬
‫اب اﻟ ُْﻤ ْﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﻨﻲ‬

‫اﻻ ْﺳﺘِﺜْـﻨَ ِﺎء‬

ِْ ‫ف‬
ُ ‫ُﺣ ُﺮْو‬ Sentence Type ُ ‫إِ ْﻋ َﺮ‬
‫اب اﻟ ُْﻤ ْﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﻨﻲ‬ Example
1. ‫إِﱠﻻ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ِ ‫َﺟﺎءَِﱐ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮُم إِﱠﻻ َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬
ٌ ‫ُﻣﺘﱠﺼ ٌﻞ – ُﻣ ْﻮ َﺟ‬ ‫ب‬
ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫َﻣْﻨ‬
The people came to
me except zayd.
2. ‫إِﱠﻻ‬ ‫ُﻣْﻨـ َﻘ ِﻄ ٌﻊ‬ ‫ب‬ ِ ِ ‫ٰ ِ ِﱠ‬
ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫َﻣْﻨ‬ ‫ﻴﺲ‬
َ ‫َﺳ َﺠ َﺪ اﻟْ َﻤﻠﺌ َﻜﺔُ إﻻ إﺑْﻠ‬
The angels prostrated
except Iblees.
3. ‫إِﱠﻻ‬ ٍ ‫َﻏْﻴـﺮ ُﻣ َﻔﱠﺮٍغ – َﻏْﻴـﺮ ُﻣﻮ َﺟ‬
‫ﺐ‬ ‫ب‬ ‫َﻣﺎ َﺟﺎءَِﱐ أَ َﺣ ٌﺪ إِﱠﻻ َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬
ْ ُ ُ ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫ – َﻣْﻨ‬or –
same as ُ‫ﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﲎ ِﻣْﻨﻪ‬
ْ ‫ُﻣ‬ ‫َﻣﺎ َﺟﺎءَِﱐ أَ َﺣ ٌﺪ إِﱠﻻ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬
No one came to me
except Zayd.
4. ‫إِﱠﻻ‬ ٍ ‫ُﻣ َﻔﱠﺮغٌ – َﻏْﻴـﺮ ُﻣﻮ َﺟ‬
‫ﺐ‬ according to ‫ﻞ‬ ِ ‫َﻣﺎ َﺟﺎءَ إِﱠﻻ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬
ْ ُ ٌ ‫( َﻋﺎﻣ‬as if
‫ إِﱠﻻ‬does not exist) No one came except
Zayd.
‫ﺖ إِﱠﻻ َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬
ُ ْ‫َﻣﺎ َرأَﻳ‬
I did not see anyone
except Zayd.
‫ت إِﱠﻻ ﺑَِﺰﻳْ ٍﺪ‬
ُ ‫َﻣﺎ َﻣَﺮْر‬
I did not pass by
anyone except Zayd.
5. ‫ﻣﺎ ﺧ َﻼ – ﻣﺎ ﻋ َﺪا‬ ‫ب‬
َ َ َ َ All types
ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫َﻣْﻨ‬ ‫َﺟﺎءَ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮُم َﻣﺎ َﺧ َﻼ َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬
‫َﺟﺎءَ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮُم َﻣﺎ َﻋ َﺪا َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬
The people came
except Zayd.

85
 Table 3.8 – Continued

‫اﻻ ْﺳﺘِﺜْـﻨَ ِﺎء‬

ِْ ‫ف‬
ُ ‫ُﺣ ُﺮْو‬ Sentence Type ُ ‫إِ ْﻋ َﺮ‬
‫اب اﻟ ُْﻤ ْﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﻨﻲ‬ Example
6. ‫ﺎﺷﺎ‬
َ ‫َﺧ َﻼ – َﻋ َﺪا – َﺣ‬ ‫ب‬
All types
ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬ ُ ‫ – َﻣْﻨ‬or – ‫ﺎﺷﺎ َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬
َ ‫ َﺣ‬/‫ َﻋﺪا‬/‫َﺟﺎءَ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮُم َﺧ َﻼ‬
‫( َْﳎ ُﺮْوٌر‬as a preposition) ‫ﺎﺷﺎ َزﻳْ ٍﺪ‬
َ ‫ َﺣ‬/‫ َﻋﺪا‬/‫َﺟﺎءَ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮُم َﺧ َﻼ‬
The people came
except Zayd.
7. ‫َﻏﲑ – ِﺳ ٰﻮى‬
ْ All types ‫َْﳎ ُﺮْوٌر‬ ‫َﺟﺎءَ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮُم َﻏْﻴـَﺮ َزﻳْ ٍﺪ‬
‫َﺟﺎءَ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮُم ِﺳ َﻮى َزﻳْ ٍﺪ‬
The people came
except Zayd.

Note: The i‘raab of the word ‫ َﻏ ْﲑ‬is the same as that of ‫ﺴﺘَﺜْـ ٰﲏ ﺑ إِﱠﻻ‬ ْ ‫ ُﻣ‬. Thus, the simple way to
determine the i‘raab of ghayr is to replace ghayr with illaa. Now, whatever i‘raab mustathnaa
gets, should be given to ghayr.
For example, we have two sentences, 1) ‫ﺟﺎءَ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮُم َﻏ ْﲑ َزﻳْ ٍﺪ‬ ٍ
َ and 2) ‫ َﻣﺎ َﺟﺎءَ َﻏ ْﲑ َزﻳْﺪ‬.
To determine the i‘raab of ghayr, follow the following two steps for each of these
sentences.
a. Replace ‫ ﻏﲑ‬with ‫ إِﱠﻻ‬and see what the i‘raab of the mustathnaa would be.
1) ‫ﺟﺎءَ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮُم إِﱠﻻ َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬
َ 2) ‫ﺟﺎءَ إِﱠﻻ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬
َ ‫َﻣﺎ‬
The first sentence is moojab and ghayr mufarragh, so the mustathnaa will be
mansoob. The second sentence is ghayr moojab and mufarragh, so the
mustathnaa is according to the ‘aamil. Thus, it is marfoo‘.

b. The i‘raab of the mustathnaa (with ‫ )إِﱠﻻ‬will be given to ghayr.

1) ‫ﺟﺎءَ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮُم َﻏْﻴـَﺮ َزﻳْ ٍﺪ‬
َ 2) ‫ﺟﺎءَ َﻏْﻴـ ُﺮ َزﻳْ ٍﺪ‬
َ ‫َﻣﺎ‬

EXERCISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and explain the i‘raab of the mustathnaa.

i. ‫رأﻳﺖ اﳉﻨﻮد إﻻ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﺪ‬ v. ‫دﺧﻠﺖ ﻏﺮف اﻟﺒﻴﺖ ﺧﻼ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﻨﻮم‬

ii. ‫ﺻﺎم اﻟﻐﻼم رﻣﻀﺎن ﻏﲑ ﻳﻮم‬ vi. ‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﺎد اﳌﺮﻳﺾ ﻋﺎﺋﺪ ﻏﲑ اﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‬
iii. ‫زرت ﻣﺴﺎﺟﺪ اﳌﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺧﻼ واﺣﺪا‬ vii. ‫ﻗﺮأت اﻟﻜﺘﺎب إﻻ ﺻﻔﺤﺘﲔ‬
iv. ‫ﺟﺎء اﻟﻘﻮم إﻻ ﲪﺎرا‬ viii. ‫ﻣﺎ ﺟﺎء إﻻ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ‬

86
Section 3.9
‫ات‬
ُ ‫ – اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﺠ ُﺮْوَر‬Words Which Are Always Majroor
There are two types of words that are always majroor. These are as follows:
1. Noun preceded by a ‫ﺟﱟﺮ‬َ ‫ف‬
ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬.
e.g. ِ َ‫ِﰲ اﻟْﻜِﺘ‬
‫ﺎب‬ in the book
2. ‫ﺎف إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ُﻣ‬
e.g. ‫ﺎب َزﻳْ ٍﺪ‬ ِ
ُ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬ book of Zayd.

87
Section 3.10
‫اَﻟﺘﱠـ َﻮاﺑِ ُﻊ‬

Definition: A ‫ ﺗَﺎﺑِ ٌﻊ‬is that noun, which follows the noun before it. The preceding noun is called
the ٌ‫ َﻣْﺘﺒُـ ْﻮع‬.
 The ‘aamil which governs the ٌ‫ َﻣْﺘﺒُـ ْﻮع‬also governs the ‫ﺗَﺎﺑِ ٌﻊ‬.
 There are five ‫ﺗَـ َﻮاﺑِ ُﻊ‬:
1) ُ‫ﺼ َﻔﺔ‬
‫اَﻟ ﱢ‬/‫ﺖ‬
ُ ‫اَﻟﻨـ ْﱠﻌ‬ 2) ‫ﱠﻮﻛِْﻴ ُﺪ‬ ِ
ْ ‫اَﻟﺘـ‬/‫اَﻟﺘﱠﺄْﻛْﻴ ُﺪ‬ 3) ‫اَﻟْﺒَ َﺪ ُل‬
4) ‫ﱠﺴ ِﻖ‬ ٍ ِ ْ‫اَﻟْﻌﻄ‬ ِ ‫ﻋﻄْﻒ اﻟْﺒـﻴ‬
َ ‫ﻒ اﻟﻨ‬
ُ ْ‫ َﻋﻄ‬/‫ﻒ ﲝَْﺮف‬
ُ َ 5) ‫ﺎن‬ََ ُ َ

Section 3.10.1
ُ‫ﺼ َﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺖ أَ ْو اَﻟ ﱢ‬
ُ ‫ﱠﻌ‬
ْ ‫ – اَﻟﻨـ‬Adjective
ُ‫ﺼ َﻔﺔ‬
‫اَﻟ ﱢ‬/‫ﺖ‬ ِِ
ُ ‫ اَﻟﻨـ ْﱠﻌ‬is of two types: 1) ‫ﺖ َﺣﻘْﻴﻘ ﱞﻲ‬ ٌ ‫ ﻧـَ ْﻌ‬2) ‫ﺖ َﺳﺒَﱯﱞ‬
ٌ ‫ﻧـَ ْﻌ‬
1. ‫ﻲ‬ ِِ
‫ﺖ َﺣﻘْﻴﻘ ﱞ‬ ٌ ‫ﻧـَ ْﻌ‬: It is that word, which describes the actual ٌ‫ َﻣْﺘﺒُـ ْﻮع‬.
 As mentioned in section 1.3.3, the ٌ‫ﺻ َﻔﺔ‬ ِ follows the ‫ف‬ ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫ َﻣ ْﻮ‬, which is the ٌ‫ َﻣﺘْﺒُـ ْﻮع‬in this
case, in the following:
a. I‘raab
b. Gender
c. Being ma‘rifah or nakirah
d. Being singular, dual or plural
ِ can be a complete sentence, in which case the ‫ف‬
The ٌ‫ﺻ َﻔﺔ‬ ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬
 ُ ‫ َﻣ ْﻮ‬must be ‫ﻧﻜﺮة‬.
 ِ , which is a sentence must have a ‫ ﺿ ِﻤﻴـﺮ‬which refers to the nakirah mawsoof.
The ٌ‫ﺻ َﻔﺔ‬ ٌْ َ
َ ‫ﺐ اﻟ ﱠﺪ ﱠر‬
e.g. َ‫اﺟﺔ‬ ِ
ُ ‫ﱐ َوﻟَ ٌﺪ ﻳـَْﺮَﻛ‬
ْ َ‫َﺟﺎء‬ A boy who was riding bicycle came to me.

َ ‫اﻟ ﱠﺪ ﱠر‬
َ‫اﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ُ ‫ﻳَـ ْﺮَﻛ‬ ‫َوﻟَ ٌﺪ‬ ‫ﻧِ ْﻲ‬ ‫ﺎء‬
َ ‫َﺟ‬
ِ َ‫ ﻓ‬+ ‫ﻓِﻌﻞ‬
‫ َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل‬+ (‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ ) ُﻫ َﻮ‬ ٌْ

ٌ‫ِﺻ َﻔﺔ‬ ‫ف‬

ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬ ِ
+ ُ ‫ﻧَﻜَﺮةٌ َﻣ ْﻮ‬

ٌ‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬ ِ َ‫ﻓ‬

‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ + ‫ ﻣ ْﻔﻌﻮٌل‬+ ‫ﻓِﻌﻞ‬
ُْ َ ٌْ
Note:
 If a ٌ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬is followed by a sentence, it will be a ‫ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬
َ or ‫ﺎل‬
ٌ ‫ َﺣ‬.
e.g. َ ‫ﺐ اﻟ ﱠﺪ ﱠر‬
َ‫اﺟﺔ‬ ُ ‫اَﻟْ َﻮﻟَ ُﺪ ﻳـَْﺮَﻛ‬ The boy is riding the bicycle.
Here, (‫ )اَﻟْ َﻮﻟَ ُﺪ‬is ٌ‫ ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬, and (َ‫ﺟﺔ‬
َ ‫ﺐ اﻟ ﱠﺪ ﱠرا‬
ُ ‫ )ﻳـَْﺮَﻛ‬is the ‫ َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬.

88
 َ ‫ﺐ اﻟ ﱠﺪ ﱠر‬
َ‫اﺟﺔ‬ ِ
ُ ‫ َﺟﺎءَﱐ اﻟْ َﻮﻟَ ُﺪ ﻳـَْﺮَﻛ‬The boy who was riding the bicycle came
to me.
ِ ‫اﳊ‬
Here, (‫ )اَﻟْ َﻮﻟَ ُﺪ‬is ‫ﺎل‬ َ ‫ﺐ اﻟ ﱠﺪ ﱠر‬
َْ ‫ذُو‬, and (َ‫اﺟﺔ‬ ُ ‫ )ﻳـَْﺮَﻛ‬is the ‫ﺎل‬
ٌ ‫ َﺣ‬.
2. ‫ﺳﺒَﱯﱞ‬
َ ‫ﺖ‬
ٌ ‫ﻧـَ ْﻌ‬: It is that word, which does not describe the ٌ‫ َﻣْﺘﺒُـ ْﻮع‬, but describes that which is
connected to the ٌ‫ َﻣْﺘﺒُـ ْﻮع‬.
ِ ِ
e.g. ُ‫ﱐ َوﻟَ ٌﺪ َﻋﺎﱂٌ أَﺑـُ ْﻮﻩ‬ْ َ‫َﺟﺎء‬ The boy whose father is learned, came to me.
Here, (ٌ‫ﺎﱂ‬ ِ ‫ )ﻋ‬is a ٌ‫ ِﺻﻔﺔ‬of (‫)أَﺑـﻮﻩ‬, which is connected to the matboo‘ (‫)وﻟَﺪ‬.
َ َ ُ ُْ ٌَ
However, it is not a ٌ‫ﺻ َﻔﺔ‬ ِ of the matboo‘ itself.
Notes:
1. In ‫ﺳﺒَﱯﱞ‬ ِ
َ ‫ﺖ‬ٌ ‫ﻧـَ ْﻌ‬, the ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫ َﻣ ْﻮ‬and ٌ‫ ﺻ َﻔﺔ‬must correspond in only two aspects:
a. I‘raab
b. Being ma‘rifah or nakirah
ِ will always be singular, irrespective of whether the ‫ف‬
2. The ٌ‫ﺻ َﻔﺔ‬ ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫ َﻣ ْﻮ‬is singular, dual
or plural.
َِ ‫ﺎن‬
‫ﲨْﻴ ٌﻞ إِﻃَ َﺎر ُاﳘَﺎ‬ ِ َ‫ﺎن ﺻﻮرﺗ‬ِ
e.g. َ ْ ُ َ‫َﻫﺎﺗ‬ These are two pictures whose frames are beautiful.
3. ِ will correspond in gender to the word after it.
The ٌ‫ﺻ َﻔﺔ‬
e.g. ‫ت اﻟ ﱠﺴﻴﱢ َﺪةُ اﻟْ َﻌﺎﻗِ ُﻞ َوﻟَ ُﺪ َﻫﺎ‬
ِ ‫ﺟﺎء‬
ََ The lady, whose son is intelligent, came.

Sentence Analysis
ِ ‫ﺟﺎء رﺟﻞ ﻋ‬
1. ٌ‫ﺎﱂ‬ َ ٌ َُ َ َ A learned man came.

‫َﻋﺎﻟِ ٌﻢ‬ ‫َر ُﺟ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﺎء‬

َ ‫َﺟ‬
(‫ ِﺻ َﻔﺔٌ )ﺗَﺎﺑِ ٌﻊ‬+ (ٌ‫ف ) َﻣْﺘﺒُـ ْﻮع‬ ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫َﻣ ْﻮ‬

ٌ‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬ ِ َ‫ﻓ‬

‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ + ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ﻓ ْﻌ‬
2. ‫ﺎﱂٌ اِﺑْـﻨُـ َﻬﺎ‬
ِ ‫ ﺟﺎءت اِﻣﺮأَةٌ ﻋ‬A woman whose son is learned, came.
َ َْ ْ َ َ
‫اِﺑْـﻨُـ َﻬﺎ‬ ‫َﻋﺎﻟِ ٌﻢ‬ ٌ‫اِ ْﻣ َﺮأَة‬ ‫ت‬
ْ ‫ﺎء‬
َ ‫َﺟ‬
(‫ﺎف إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ﺎف َو ُﻣ‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬
َ ‫) ُﻣ‬ |
ِ َ‫ﻓ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ ِ ‫اِﺳﻢ اﻟْ َﻔ‬
+ ‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ‬
ُْ

(‫ِﺻ َﻔﺔٌ )ﺗَﺎﺑِ ٌﻊ‬ + (ٌ‫ف ) َﻣْﺘﺒُـ ْﻮع‬

ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬
ُ ‫َﻣ ْﻮ‬

ٌ‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬ ِ َ‫ﻓ‬

‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ + ‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬

89
 ‫ﺟﺎء رﺟﻞ أَﺑـﻮﻩ ﻋ ِ‬
‫ﺎﱂٌ ‪3.‬‬ ‫َ َ َ ُ ٌ ُْ ُ َ‬ ‫‪A man whose father is learned, came.‬‬

‫َﻋﺎﻟِ ٌﻢ‬ ‫أَﺑُـ ْﻮﻩُ‬ ‫َر ُﺟ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﺎء‬

‫َﺟ َ‬
‫|‬ ‫ﺎف إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ(‬
‫ﻀ ٌ‬‫ﺎف َو ُﻣ َ‬ ‫ﻀ ٌ‬
‫) ُﻣ َ‬
‫َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪاٌ‬

‫ِﺻ َﻔﺔٌ )ﺗَﺎﺑِ ٌﻊ(‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ف ) َﻣْﺘﺒُـ ْﻮعٌ(‬

‫ﺻ ْﻮ ٌ‬
‫َﻣ ْﻮ ُ‬

‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔٌ‬ ‫ﻓَ ِ‬

‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬

‫‪EXERCISE‬‬

‫ﻲ ‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyse the following sentences pointing out the‬‬ ‫ِِ‬
‫ﺖ َﺣﻘْﻴﻘ ﱞ‬
‫ﻧـَ ْﻌ ٌ‬
‫ﺳﺒَﱯﱞ ‪and the‬‬
‫ﺖ َ‬
‫‪.‬ﻧـَ ْﻌ ٌ‬
‫‪i.‬‬ ‫رﻛﺒﺖ اﳊﺼﺎن اﳉﻤﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪v.‬‬ ‫أوﻗﺪت ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺣﺎ ﻧﻮرﻩ ﻗﻮي‬
‫‪ii.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻮ رﺟﻞ ﻋﺎﳌﺔ اﺑﻨﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪vi.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬا ﻋﻤﻞ ﻳﻨﻔﻊ‬
‫‪iii.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺆﻻء ﺑﻨﺎت ﻋﺎﻗﻼت‬ ‫‪vii.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬا ﻣﻨﺰل ﺿﻴﻖ‬
‫‪iv.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻫﺪﻧﺎ ﻗﻄﺎرا ﺳﲑة ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪viii.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎء اﻟﺮﺟﻞ اﳌﻬﺬب أﺧﻮﻩ‬

‫‪2. Analyse the following sentences and and point out the difference between them.‬‬

‫‪i.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﻟﺪ ﺿﺎﺣﻚ‬

‫‪ii.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬا وﻟﺪ ﺿﺎﺣﻚ‬
‫‪iii.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎء اﻟﻮﻟﺪ ﺿﺎﺣﻜﺎ‬

‫‪90‬‬
Section 3.10.2
‫ اَﻟﺘﱠﺄْﻛِْﻴ ُﺪ‬/ ‫ – اَﻟﺘـ ْﱠﻮﻛِْﻴ ُﺪ‬Emphasis

Definition: It is that ‫ﺗَﺎﺑِ ٌﻊ‬, which gives emphasis to the ٌ‫ َﻣْﺘﺒُـ ْﻮع‬in the matter related to it or
emphasizes the inclusion of all members of the ٌ‫ َﻣْﺘﺒُـ ْﻮع‬in the matter related to it.
 The ‫ ﺗَﺎﺑِ ٌﻊ‬is called ‫ ﺗَﺄْﻛِْﻴ ٌﺪ‬and the ٌ‫ َﻣْﺘﺒُـ ْﻮع‬is called ‫ ُﻣ َﺆﱠﻛ ٌﺪ‬.
‫ﱐ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ ِ
e.g. ْ َ‫َﺟﺎء‬ (The second ‘Zayd’ emphasized Zayd’s coming.)
e.g. ‫َﺟﺎءَ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮُم ُﻛﻠﱡ ُﻬ ْﻢ‬ (‫ ُﻛﻠﱡ ُﻬ ْﻢ‬emphasized that all came, no one remained.)

There are two types of ‫ﺗَﺄْﻛِْﻴ ٌﺪ‬: ‫ﻲ‬ ِ ‫َﻣ ْﻌﻨَ ِﻮ ﱞ‬

‫ ﻟَ ْﻔﻈ ﱞ‬and ‫ي‬
1. ‫ﱠﻮﻛِْﻴ ُﺪ اﻟﻠﱠ ْﻔ ِﻈ ﱡﻲ‬
ْ ‫ – اَﻟﺘـ‬Verbal Emphasis: The emphasis is attained by repeating the ‫ ُﻣ َﺆﱠﻛ ٌﺪ‬, which may
be ‫اِ ْﺳ ٌﻢ‬, ‫ﻞ‬ ِ ٌ ‫ﺣﺮ‬, ‫ﺿ ِﻤﻴـﺮ‬, or sentence.
ٌ ‫ﻓ ْﻌ‬, ‫ف‬ْ َ ٌْ َ
e.g. ‫َﺟﺎءَ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ Zayd, Zayd came.
‫ﺐ‬ ِ
ُ ‫ﻀَﺮ اﻟْﻐَﺎﺋ‬ َ ‫ﻀَﺮ َﺣ‬ َ ‫َﺣ‬ The absent one became present, became present.
‫َﺧ ْﻮ ُن اﻟْ َﻌ ْﻬ َﺪ‬
ُ ‫َﻻ َﻻ أ‬ I will not, will not break the pledge.
َ‫ﺖ اﻟﻨﱠﺎﻓِ َﺬة‬ ِ
َ ْ‫اﻓْـﺘَ ْﺢ أَﻧ‬ You open the window.
‫ﺖ اﻟْ َﻤﻠُ ْﻮُم‬ َ ْ‫ﺖ اﻟْ َﻤﻠُ ْﻮُم أَﻧ‬
َ ْ‫أَﻧ‬ You are the censured one, you are the censured one.

2. ‫ﱠﻮﻛِْﻴ ُﺪ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻌﻨَ ِﻮى‬

ْ ‫ – اَﻟﺘـ‬Emphasis Through Meaning: The emphasis is attained with any of the
following words:
‫ﺲ‬
ٌ ‫ﲔ ﻧـَ ْﻔ‬
ٌْ ‫َﻋ‬ ‫ﻛِ َﻼ‬ ‫ﻛِْﻠﺘَﺎ‬ ‫ُﻛﻞﱞ‬ ‫َﲨَ ُﻊ‬
ْ‫أ‬ ‫أَ ْﻛﺘَ ُﻊ‬ ‫ﺼ ُﻊ‬
َ ْ‫أَﺑ‬ ‫أَﺑْـﺘَ ُﻊ‬
Below, we discuss each of these.

a. ‫ﺲ‬
ٌ ‫ ﻧـَ ْﻔ‬،٬‫ﲔ‬
ٌْ ‫( َﻋ‬himself, herself)
 These are used for singular, dual and plural.
They have to be ‫ﺎف‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ ِ .
 َ ‫ ُﻣ‬to a ‫ﺿﻤْﻴـٌﺮ‬
َ
 Their ‫ﺿ ِﻤْﻴـٌﺮ‬ ِ
َ and form (ٌ‫ )ﺻْﻴـﻐَﺔ‬must correspond with those of the ‫ ُﻣ َﺆﱠﻛ ٌﺪ‬.
 ِ ) of ‫ ﻧـَ ْﻔﺲ‬and ‫ ﻋﲔ‬is used for dual.
The plural form (ٌ‫ﺻْﻴـﻐَﺔ‬ ٌ ٌْ َ
e.g. ُ‫ َﻋْﻴـﻨُﻪ‬/ُ‫ﻗَ َﺎم َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﻧـَ ْﻔ ُﺴﻪ‬ Zayd himself stood.
‫أ َْﻋﻴُـﻨُـ ُﻬ َﻤﺎ‬/‫ﻗَ َﺎم اﻟﱠﺰﻳْ َﺪ ِان أَﻧْـ ُﻔ ُﺴ ُﻬ َﻤﺎ‬ The two Zayds themselves stood.
‫أ َْﻋﻴُـﻨُـ ُﻬ ْﻢ‬/‫ﻗَ َﺎم اﻟﱠﺰﻳْ ُﺪ ْو َن أَﻧْـ ُﻔ ُﺴ ُﻬ ْﻢ‬ The (many) Zayds themselves stood.
‫ﻧـَ ْﻔ ُﺴ َﻬﺎ‬/‫ت اﻟْ ُﻤ َﻌﻠﱢ َﻤﺔُ َﻋْﻴـﻨُـ َﻬﺎ‬ ِ ‫ﺟﺎء‬
ََ The female teacher herself came.
ِ ‫ﱢ‬
‫أَﻧْـ ُﻔ ُﺴ ُﻬ َﻤﺎ‬/‫ت اﻟْ ُﻤ َﻌﻠ َﻤﺘَﺎن أ َْﻋﻴُـﻨُـ ُﻬ َﻤﺎ‬ ِ ‫ﺟﺎء‬
ََ The two female teachers themselves came.
‫أَﻧْـ ُﻔ ُﺴ ُﻬ ﱠﻦ‬/‫ﺎت أ َْﻋﻴُـﻨُـ ُﻬ ﱠﻦ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ِ
ُ ‫َﺟﺎءَت اﻟْ ُﻤ َﻌﻠ َﻤ‬ The (many) female teachers themselves
came.

91
 b. ‫ ﻛِ َﻼ‬،٬‫( ﻛِْﻠﺘَﺎ‬both)
 These are used for dual only.
 ‫ ﻛِ َﻼ‬is masculine and ‫ ﻛِْﻠﺘَﺎ‬is feminine.
It must be ‫ﺎف‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ ِ .
 َ ‫ ُﻣ‬to a dual ‫ﺿﻤْﻴـٌﺮ‬
َ
e.g. ‫ﺟ َﻼ ِن ﻛِ َﻼ ُﳘَﺎ‬
ُ ‫ﻗَ َﺎم اﻟﱠﺮ‬ Both of the men stood up.
ُ َ‫ﺎن ﻛِْﻠﺘ‬
‫ﺎﳘَﺎ‬ ِ
ِ َ‫ﺖ اﻟْﻤﻌﻠﱢﻤﺘ‬
َ َ ُ ‫ﻗَ َﺎﻣ‬ Both of the female teachers stood up.

c. ‫ ُﻛﻞﱞ‬،٬‫َﲨَ ُﻊ‬
ْ ‫( أ‬all)
 They are used for singular and plural.
 ‫ ُﻛﻞﱞ‬is used with a ‫ﺿ ِﻤْﻴـٌﺮ‬ َ , which must correspond to the ‫ ُﻣ َﺆﱠﻛ ٌﺪ‬.
 ْ ‫ أ‬is used with its form (ٌ‫ ) ِﺻْﻴـﻐَﺔ‬changing to correspond to the ‫ ُﻣ َﺆﱠﻛ ٌﺪ‬.
‫َﲨَ ُﻊ‬
e.g. ُ‫ﺎب ُﻛﻠﱠﻪ‬ ِ
َ َ‫ْت اﻟْﻜﺘ‬ ُ ‫ﻗَـَﺮأ‬ I read the whole book.
‫َﺟﺎءَ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮُم ُﻛﻠﱡ ُﻬ ْﻢ‬ All the people came.
ِ
ُ‫َﲨَ َﻌﻪ‬ْ‫سأ‬ َ ‫ﺖ اﻟْ َﻔَﺮ‬ ُ ْ‫ا ْﺷﺘَـَﺮﻳ‬ I bought the whole horse.
‫َﲨَ ُﻌ ْﻮ َن‬
ْ ‫ﱠﺎس أ‬
ُ ‫َﺟﺎءَ اﻟﻨ‬ All the people came.

Note: ‫ ُﻛﻞﱞ‬and ‫َﲨَ ُﻊ‬

ْ ‫ أ‬can only be used for emphasis in those things, which have parts
or can be divided. Thus, ُ‫ﺖ َزﻳْ ًﺪا ُﻛﻠﱠﻪ‬
ُ ‫( أَ ْﻛَﺮْﻣ‬I treated all of Zayd hospitably)
would be incorrect.

d. ‫ أَ ْﻛﺘَ ُﻊ‬،٬‫ﺼ ُﻊ‬

َ ْ‫ أَﺑ‬،٬‫أَﺑْـﺘَ ُﻊ‬
 These are used for greater emphasis.
 They appear after ‫َﲨَ ُﻊ‬
ْ ‫أ‬. They are not used without ‫َﲨَ ُﻊ‬
ْ ‫ أ‬nor can they appear
before ‫َﲨَ ُﻊ‬
ْ ‫أ‬.
e.g. ‫ﺼ ُﻌ ْﻮ َن‬
َ ْ‫أَﺑ‬/‫أَﺑْـﺘَـ ُﻌ ْﻮ َن‬/‫َﲨَ ُﻌ ْﻮ َن أَ ْﻛﺘَـ ُﻌ ْﻮ َن‬
ْ ‫َﺟﺎءَ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮُم أ‬ All of the people came.
‫ﺼ ُﻊ‬
َ ُ‫ﺑ‬/‫ﺑـُﺘَ ُﻊ‬/‫ﱢﺴﺎءُ ُﲨَ ُﻊ ُﻛﺘَ ُﻊ‬
َ ‫ﺖ اﻟﻨ‬
ْ ‫ﻗَ َﺎﻣ‬ All of the women stood up.

Sentence Analysis

ْ ‫َﺟﺎءَ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮُم ُﻛﻠﱡ ُﻬ ْﻢ أ‬

‫َﲨَ ُﻌ ْﻮ َن‬ All the people came.

‫َﺟ َﻤ ُﻌ ْﻮ َن‬
ْ‫أ‬ ‫ُﻛﻠﱡ ُﻬ ْﻢ‬ ‫اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮ ُم‬ ‫ﺎء‬
َ ‫َﺟ‬
| (‫ﺎف إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ﺎف َو ُﻣ‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬
َ ‫) ُﻣ‬ |
2 ‫ اَﻟﺘﱠﺄْﻛِْﻴ ُﺪ‬+ 1 ‫اَﻟﺘﱠﺄْﻛِْﻴ ُﺪ‬ ‫ُﻣ َﺆﱠﻛ ٌﺪ‬

ٌ‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬ ِ َ‫ﻓ‬

‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ + ‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬

92
 ‫‪EXERCISE‬‬
‫‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyse the following sentences.‬‬

‫‪i.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺖ اﻟﻮزﻳﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‬

‫‪ii.‬‬ ‫ذﲝﻨﺎ اﻟﻜﺒﺸﲔ ﻛﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ‬
‫‪iii.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﺪ اﳌﻠﺌﻜﺔ ﻛﻠﻬﻢ أﲨﻌﻮن إﻻ اﺑﻠﻴﺲ‬
‫‪iv.‬‬ ‫رأﻳﺖ اﻟﺘﻤﺴﺎح اﻟﺘﻤﺴﺎح‬
‫‪v.‬‬ ‫اﺣﱰق أﺛﺎث اﻟﺒﻴﺖ ﲨﻴﻌﻪ‬
‫‪vi.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻌﻨﺎ ﳓﻦ أﻧﻔﺴﻨﺎ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﻠﻪ‬

‫‪93‬‬
Section 3.10.3
‫ – اَﻟْﺒَ َﺪ ُل‬Substitute
Definition: A ‫ ﺑَ َﺪ ٌل‬is that ‫ﺗَﺎﺑِ ٌﻊ‬, which is actually intended in the sentence and not its ٌ‫ َﻣْﺘﺒُـ ْﻮع‬. The
matboo‘ merely serves as an introduction to the taabi‘.
 The ‫ ﺗَﺎﺑِ ٌﻊ‬is called ‫( ﺑَ َﺪ ٌل‬substitute) and the ٌ‫ َﻣْﺘﺒُـ ْﻮع‬is called ُ‫ ُﻣْﺒ َﺪ ٌل ِﻣْﻨﻪ‬or ُ‫( ُﻣﺒَ ﱠﺪ ٌل ِﻣْﻨﻪ‬the
substituted).
Example: ‫َﺧ ْﻮ َك‬
ُ ‫َﺟﺎءَ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ أ‬ Zayd, your brother, came.

‫َﺧ ْﻮ َك‬
ُ‫أ‬ ‫َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ ‫ﺎء‬
َ ‫َﺟ‬
(‫ﺎف إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ﺎف َو ُﻣ‬ٌ ‫ﻀ‬
َ ‫) ُﻣ‬ |
‫ﺑَ َﺪ ٌل‬ + ‫ﻣﺒ َﺪ ٌل ِﻣْﻨﻪ‬
ُ ُْ

ٌ‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬ ِ َ‫ﻓ‬

‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ + ‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬

 There are four types of ‫ﺑَ َﺪ ٌل‬:

‫ﺑَ َﺪ ُل ُﻛ ﱟﻞ ِﻣ ْﻦ ُﻛ ﱟ‬
1) ‫ﻞ‬ ‫ﺾ ِﻣ ْﻦ ُﻛ ﱟ‬
2) ‫ﻞ‬ ٍ ‫ﺑَ َﺪ ُل ﺑـَ ْﻌ‬ ِ ‫اﻻ ْﺷﺘِﻤ‬
3) ‫ﺎل‬ ِ
َ ْ ‫ﺑَ َﺪ ُل‬
ِ َ‫ﺑ َﺪ ُل اﻟْﻐَﻠ‬
4) ‫ﻂ‬ َ
‫ﺑَ َﺪ ُل ُﻛ ﱟﻞ ِﻣ ْﻦ ُﻛ ﱟ‬: It is that ‫ﺑَ َﺪ ٌل‬, which refers to the exact same thing as the ُ‫ ُﻣْﺒ َﺪ ٌل ِﻣْﻨﻪ‬.
1. ‫ﻞ‬
e.g. ‫َﺧ ْﻮ َك‬
ُ ‫َﺟﺎءَ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ أ‬ Zayd, your brother, came.

‫ﺾ ِﻣ ْﻦ ُﻛ ﱟ‬
2. ‫ﻞ‬ ٍ ‫ﺑَ َﺪ ُل ﺑـَ ْﻌ‬: It is that ‫ﺑَ َﺪ ٌل‬, which is a part of the ُ‫ ُﻣْﺒ َﺪ ٌل ِﻣْﻨﻪ‬.
 The ‫ ﺑَ َﺪ ٌل‬must have a ‫ﺿ ِﻤْﻴـٌﺮ‬ ِ
َ , which refers to the ُ‫ ُﻣْﺒ َﺪ ٌل ﻣﻨْﻪ‬.
e.g. ُ‫ْﺳﻪ‬
َ ‫ﺖ َزﻳْ ًﺪا َرأ‬
ُ ْ‫ﺿَﺮﺑ‬
َ I hit Zayd’s head.
ِ ‫اﻻ ْﺷﺘِﻤ‬
3. ‫ﺎل‬ ِ ِ
َ ْ ‫ ﺑَ َﺪ ُل‬: It is that ‫ﺑَ َﺪ ٌل‬, which is related to the ُ‫ ُﻣْﺒ َﺪ ٌل ﻣْﻨﻪ‬, but is not part of it.
The ‫ ﺑَ َﺪ ٌل‬must have a ‫ﺿ ِﻤْﻴـٌﺮ‬ ِ
 َ , which refers to the ُ‫ ُﻣْﺒ َﺪ ٌل ﻣْﻨﻪ‬.
e.g. ُ‫ُﺳ ِﺮ َق َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﺛـَ ْﻮﺑُﻪ‬ Zayd’s shirt was stolen.
ِ َ‫ﺑ َﺪ ُل اﻟْﻐَﻠ‬: It is that ‫ﺑ َﺪ ٌل‬, which is mentioned after an error, as a correction.
4. ‫ﻂ‬ َ َ
e.g. ‫ﺎرا‬ ِ ِ
ً َ‫ﺖ ﻓَـَﺮ ًﺳﺎ ﲪ‬
ُ ْ‫ا ْﺷﺘَـَﺮﻳ‬ I bought a horse; no, a donkey.

EXERCISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyse the following sentences.

i. ‫ﻗﻀﻴﺖ اﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﺛﻠﺜﻪ‬ iii. ‫ﻗﺪم اﻷﻣﲑ اﻟﻮزﻳﺮ‬

ii. ‫ﺳﺮﱏ اﳋﺎدم أﻣﺎﻧﺘﻪ‬ iv. ‫ﻋﺎﻣﻠﺖ اﻟﺘﺎﺟﺮ زﻳﺪا‬

94
Section 3.10.4
ٍ
‫ﺴ ِﻖ‬
َ ‫ﻒ اﻟﻨﱠ‬ َ ‫ﻒ ﺑِ َﺤ ْﺮف‬
ُ ْ‫ﻋﻄ‬/ ٌ ْ‫ – َﻋﻄ‬Conjunction

Definition: It is that ‫ﺗَﺎﺑِ ٌﻊ‬, which appears after a ‫ﻒ‬ ٍ ْ‫ف َﻋﻄ‬
ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬. The ‫ﻒ‬ ٍ ْ‫ف َﻋﻄ‬
ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬appears between the
‫ ﺗَﺎﺑِ ٌﻊ‬and the ٌ‫ َﻣْﺘﺒُـ ْﻮع‬. The meaning of the verb directed to the ٌ‫ َﻣْﺘﺒُـ ْﻮع‬is also directed to the ‫ﺗَﺎﺑِ ٌﻊ‬.
 ٌ ‫ َﻣ ْﻌﻄُْﻮ‬and the ٌ‫ َﻣْﺘﺒُـ ْﻮع‬is called ‫ف َﻋﻠَْﻴ ِﻪ‬
The ‫ ﺗَﺎﺑِ ٌﻊ‬is called ‫ف‬ ٌ ‫ َﻣ ْﻌﻄُْﻮ‬.
e.g. ‫َﺟﺎءَ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ َو َﻋ ْﻤٌﺮو‬ Zayd and Amr came.

‫َﻋ ْﻤ ٌﺮو‬ ‫َو‬ ‫َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ ‫ﺎء‬

َ ‫َﺟ‬
‫ف‬ ٍ ْ‫ف َﻋﻄ‬
ٌ ‫ َﻣ ْﻌﻄُْﻮ‬+ ‫ﻒ‬ ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬+ ‫ف َﻋﻠَْﻴ ِﻪ‬ٌ ‫َﻣ ْﻌﻄُْﻮ‬

ٌ‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ ِْﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬ ِ َ‫ﻓ‬

‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ + ‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬

ٍ ْ‫ف َﻋﻄ‬
The various ‫ﻒ‬ ُ ‫ ُﺣُﺮْو‬are as follows:
‫َو‬ ‫ف‬
َ ‫ﰒُﱠ‬ ‫َﺣ ّٰﱴ‬ ‫إِ ﱠﻣﺎ‬ ‫أَْو‬ ‫أَ ْم‬ ‫َﻻ‬ ‫ﺑَ ْﻞ‬ ‫ٰﻟ ِﻜ ْﻦ‬

Notes:
1. If the ‫ف َﻋﻠَْﻴ ِﻪ‬ ِ ‫ع ﻣﺘﱠ‬
ٌ ‫ َﻣ ْﻌﻄُْﻮ‬is a ‫ﺼ ٌﻞ‬ ِ , then its ‫ﺼﻞ‬
ُ ٌ ‫ﺿﻤْﻴـٌﺮ َﻣ ْﺮﻓُـ ْﻮ‬
َ
ِ ِ has to be mentioned after it.
ٌ ‫ﺿﻤْﻴـٌﺮ ُﻣْﻨـ َﻔ‬
َ
e.g. ‫ﺖ أَﻧَﺎ َو َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬
ُ ْ‫ﺿَﺮﺑ‬
َ Zayd and I hit.

2. However, if after the ‫ﻞ‬ ِ ٌ ‫ﺿ ِﻤﻴـﺮ ﻣﺮﻓُـﻮ‬, another word appears before the ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ع ُﻣﺘﱠﺼ‬ْ َْ ٌْ َ ٌ ‫ َﻣ ْﻌﻄُْﻮ‬, then the
ِ ‫ ﺿ ِﻤﻴـﺮ ﻣْﻨـ َﻔ‬need not be brought.
‫ﺼ ٌﻞ‬ ُ ٌْ َ
e.g. ‫ﺖ اﻟْﻴَـ ْﻮَم َو َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬
ُ ْ‫ﺿَﺮﺑ‬َ Zayd and I hit, today.
‫َﻣﺎ أَ ْﺷَﺮْﻛﻨَﺎ َو َﻻ أٰﺑَﺎءُﻧَﺎ‬ Neither us nor our forefathers associated partners.
3. If the ‫ف َﻋﻠَْﻴ ِﻪ‬
ٌ ‫ َﻣ ْﻌﻄُْﻮ‬is a ‫ﺿ ِﻤْﻴـٌﺮ‬ َ preceded by a ‫ف َﺟﱟﺮ‬
ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬, then the ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ َﻣ ْﻌﻄُْﻮ‬should also be preceded by
the same ‫ﺟﱟﺮ‬ َ ‫ف‬ ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬.
e.g. ‫ﻚ َو ﺑَِﺰﻳْ ٍﺪ‬ َ ِ‫ت ﺑ‬ ُ ‫َﻣَﺮْر‬ I passed by you and Zayd.

EXERCISE
ٍ ْ‫ف َﻋﻄ‬
1. Fill in a suitable ‫ﻒ‬ ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬, translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyse the following sentences.
i. ‫أﺗﻔﺎﺣﺎ أﻛﻠﺖ_______ ﻏﻨﻴﺎ‬ iv. ‫ﻣﺎ ﻗﺮأت اﻟﻜﺘﺎب ﻛﻠﻪ _______ ﺑﻌﻀﻪ‬
ii. ‫ﻗﺪﻣﺖ اﻟﻴﻪ اﻟﻄﻌﺎم _______ ﻣﺎ أﻛﻠﻪ‬ v. ‫ﺑﺎع ﻋﻘﺎرﻩ _______ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻪ‬
iii. ‫ﻣﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺘﻪ _______ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺖ و ﻛﻴﻠﻪ‬ vi. ‫ﺻﻠﻰ اﻹﻣﺎم _______ اﳌﺄﻣﻮم‬

95
‫‪Section 3.10.5‬‬
‫ﻒ اﻟْﺒـﻴ ِ‬
‫ﺎن‬‫َﻋﻄْ ُ َ َ‬

‫‪َ .‬ﻣْﺘﺒُـ ْﻮعٌ ‪, which clarifies or specifies its‬ﺗَﺎﺑِ ٌﻊ ‪Definition: It is that‬‬

‫‪ Often, it is a more famous name of two names.‬‬
‫‪Example:‬‬ ‫ﻗَ َﺎم أَﺑُﻮ َﺣ ْﻔ ٍ‬
‫ﺺ ُﻋ َﻤُﺮ‬ ‫‪Abu Hafs ‘Umar stood up.‬‬

‫ُﻋ َﻤ ُﺮ‬ ‫أَﺑُﻮ َﺣ ْﻔ ٍ‬

‫ﺺ‬ ‫ﺎم‬
‫ﻗَ َ‬
‫|‬ ‫ﺎف إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ(‬
‫ﻀ ٌ‬‫ﺎف َو ُﻣ َ‬ ‫ﻀ ٌ‬
‫) ُﻣ َ‬
‫ﺗَﺎﺑِ ٌﻊ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫َﻣْﺘﺒُـ ْﻮعٌ‬

‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔٌ‬ ‫=‬ ‫ﻓَﺎﻋِ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﻞ ‪+‬‬ ‫ِ‬

‫ﻓ ْﻌ ٌ‬

‫‪Example:‬‬ ‫َﺟﺎءَ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ أَﺑُﻮ َﻋ ْﻤ ٍﺮو‬ ‫‪Abu ‘Amr Zayd came.‬‬

‫أَﺑُﻮ َﻋ ْﻤ ٍﺮو‬ ‫َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ ‫ﺎء‬

‫َﺟ َ‬
‫ﺎف إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ(‬
‫ﻀ ٌ‬‫ﺎف َو ُﻣ َ‬‫ﻀ ٌ‬
‫) ُﻣ َ‬ ‫|‬
‫ﺗَﺎﺑِ ٌﻊ‬ ‫َﻣْﺘﺒُـ ْﻮعٌ ‪+‬‬

‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔٌ‬ ‫ﻓَ ِ‬

‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﻞ ‪+‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﻓ ْﻌ ٌ‬

‫‪EXERCISE‬‬
‫‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyse the following sentences.‬‬

‫‪i.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎم ﻋﻠﻰ زﻳﻦ اﻟﻌﺎﺑﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﻌﻞ اﷲ اﻟﻜﻌﺒﺔ اﻟﺒﻴﺖ اﳊﺮام ﻗﻴﺎﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﺎس ‪ii.‬‬

‫‪96‬‬
 CHAPTER 4
‫ – اَﻟْ َﻌ َﻮ ِاﻣ ُﻞ‬Governing Words

Definition: An ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ َﻋﺎﻣ‬is a word that governs/causes i‘raab changes in another word.
There are two types of ‫ﻞ‬ ِ ‫ َﻣ ْﻌﻨَ ِﻮ ﱞ‬2) ‫ﻟَ ْﻔ ِﻈ ﱞﻲ‬
ُ ‫ َﻋ َﻮاﻣ‬: 1) ‫ي‬
‫ َﻋ ِﺎﻣ ٌﻞ َﻣ ْﻌﻨَ ِﻮ ﱞ‬: It is that ‫ َﻋ ِﺎﻣ ٌﻞ‬, which is not in word form i.e. it is abstract.
1. ‫ي‬
There are two types of ‫ي‬ ‫ َﻋ ِﺎﻣ ٌﻞ َﻣ ْﻌﻨَ ِﻮ ﱞ‬.
ِِ ِ ِ
i. ُ‫اَْﻹﺑْﺘ َﺪاء‬: which means that being free of a ‫ َﻋﺎﻣ ٌﻞ ﻟَْﻔﻈ ﱞﻲ‬gives ٌ‫ ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬a ‫ َرﻓْ ٌﻊ‬.
e.g. ‫َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﻗَﺎﺋِ ٌﻢ‬ Zayd is standing.
Here, (‫ ) َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬is the ٌ‫ ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬, which is marfoo‘ because of ibtidaa’. (‫ )ﻗَﺎﺋِ ٌﻢ‬is the khabar and
it is also marfoo‘ because of ibtidaa’.
In the case of ٌ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬ ِ ٍ‫ﺼ‬ ٍ ِ
ii. َ ‫ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ ُﻣ‬, being free of a ‫ﺐ‬ ْ َ‫ف ﻧ‬ ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬gives ٌ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬
ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬or ‫ف َﺟ ْﺰم‬ َ ‫ ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ ُﻣ‬a ‫ َرﻓْ ٌﻊ‬.
e.g. ‫ﻳـَ ْﻌ َﻤ ُﻞ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ Zayd is working.
Here (‫ﻞ‬ ٍ ْ َ‫ف ﻧ‬ ٍ
ُ ‫ )ﻳـَ ْﻌ َﻤ‬is marfoo‘ because it is free of any ‫ﺼﺐ‬ ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬or ‫ف َﺟ ْﺰم‬
ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬.

2. ‫ﻲ‬ ِ ِ ِ
‫ َﻋﺎﻣ ٌﻞ ﻟَ ْﻔﻈ ﱞ‬: It is that ‫ َﻋﺎﻣ ٌﻞ‬, which is in word form.
There are three types of ‫ﻲ‬ ِ ِ
‫ َﻋﺎﻣ ٌﻞ ﻟَ ْﻔﻈ ﱞ‬.
i. ‫ف‬
ُ ‫اَ ْﳊُُﺮْو‬
ii. ‫ﺎل‬
ُ ‫اَْﻷَﻓْـ َﻌ‬
iii. ُ‫َﲰَﺎء‬
ْ ‫اَْﻷ‬

97
Section 4.1
ُ‫ف اﻟْ َﻌ ِﺎﻣﻠَﺔ‬
ُ ‫ – اَﻟْ ُﺤ ُﺮْو‬Governing Particles

A. Particles, Which Govern Nouns

1. ُ‫اﳉَﺎ ﱠرة‬
ْ ‫ف‬ُ ‫اَ ْﳊُُﺮْو‬ refer to section 1.6
2. ‫ﺸﺒﱠـ َﻬﺔُ ﺑِﺎﻟْ ِﻔ ْﻌ ِﻞ‬
َ ‫ف اﻟْ ُﻤ‬
ُ ‫اَ ْﳊُُﺮْو‬ refer to section 1.7
ِ ْ ‫ َﻣﺎ و َﻻ اَﻟْﻤ َﺸﺒﱠـ َﻬﺘَـ‬refer to section 3.7.3
3. ‫ﲔ ﺑِ ﻟَْﻴﺲ‬
َ ُ َ
4. ِ‫واو اﻟْﻤﻌِﻴﱠﺔ‬ refer to section 3.8.4
َ َُ
ِ‫اﻻﺳﺘِﺜـﻨﺎء‬
5. َ ْ ْ ِْ ‫ف‬ ُ ‫إِﱠﻻ َﺣ ْﺮ‬ refer to section 3.8.7
6. ‫ف اﻟﻨﱢ َﺪا ِء‬
ُ ‫ُﺣُﺮْو‬ refer to section 3.8.1
7. ‫ﺲ‬ ِ ‫اﳉِْﻨ‬ْ ‫َﻻ اَﻟﱠِﱵ ﻟِﻨَـ ْﻔ ِﻲ‬ refer to section 3.7.4

َ ‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ ُﻣ‬
B. Particles, Which Govern ٌ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬
1. ِ ‫ف اﻟﻨﱠ‬
ُ‫ﺎﺻﺒَﺔ‬ ُ ‫اَ ْﳊُُﺮْو‬
2. ُ‫اﳉَﺎ ِزَﻣﺔ‬
ْ ‫ف‬ُ ‫اَ ْﳊُُﺮْو‬

98
Section 4.1.1
ِ ‫ف اﻟﻨﱠ‬
ُ‫ﺎﺻﺒَﺔ‬ ُ ‫ – اَﻟْ ُﺤ ُﺮْو‬Particles That Give Nasb

These are as follows: ‫أَ ْن‬ ‫ﻟَ ْﻦ‬ ‫َﻛ ْﻲ‬ ‫إِذَ ْن‬
These appear before ٌ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬ ِ
 َ ‫ ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ ُﻣ‬and cause the following changes at the end:
˗ They give the last letter a fathah if it is not a ‫ﻧـُ ْﻮ ٌن‬.
˗ If the last letter is a ‫ﻧـُ ْﻮ ٌن‬, it is dropped. The exception is the ‫ ﻧـُ ْﻮ ٌن‬of the two ‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ‬
ٌ ‫ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬.
‫ﺚ‬

Table 4.1
ِ ‫ف اﻟﻨﱠ‬
ُ‫ﺎﺻﺒَﺔ‬ ُ ‫اَﻟْ ُﺤ ُﺮْو‬
ٍ‫ﺼ‬
‫ﺐ‬ ْ َ‫ف ﻧ‬
ُ ‫َﺣ ْﺮ‬ Meaning Example
‫أَ ْن‬ that, to َ‫أُ ِرﻳْ ُﺪ أَ ْن أَ ْد ُﺧ َﻞ ا ْﳉَﻨﱠﺔ‬ I want to enter Paradise.

‫ﻟَ ْﻦ‬ will not, never ْ ‫ﻟَ ْﻦ ﻳَ ْﺪ ُﺧ َﻞ اﻟْ َﻜﺎﻓُِﺮ‬

َ‫اﳉَﻨﱠﺔ‬ The disbeliever will never enter Paradise.

‫َﻛ ْﻲ‬ ‫ﺖ َﻛ ْﻲ أَ ْﺳ َِﱰﻳْ َﺢ‬ ِ

so that
ُ ‫ﺟْﺌ‬ I came so I could rest.

‫إِذَ ْن‬ ِ
then, in that ‫ﻚ‬ َ ‫إِذَ ْن ﺗَـ ُﻔ ْﻮَز ِﰲ َﻋ َﻤﻠ‬ In that case, you will be successful in your
case work. [This is said in response to the one
who may have said: ‫َﺟﺘَ ِﻬ ُﺪ‬
ْ ‫( أ‬I will work
hard).]

Notes:
1. Sometimes ‫أَ ْن‬, together with its ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ﻓ ْﻌ‬, gives the meaning of a masdar. In this case, ‫ أَ ْن‬is called
ُ‫ﺼ َﺪ ِرﻳﱠﺔ‬
ْ ‫أَ ْن اَﻟْ َﻤ‬.
e.g. ‫ﺼ ْﻮُﻣ ْﻮا َﺧْﻴـٌﺮ ﻟﱠ ُﻜ ْﻢ‬
ُ َ‫أَ ْن ﺗ‬ i.e. ‫ﺻ ْﻮُﻣ ُﻜ ْﻢ َﺧْﻴـٌﺮ ﻟﱠ ُﻜ ْﻢ‬
َ
Your fasting is better for you.

2. ‫ أَ ْن‬is hidden after the following six huroof and gives the last letter of ٌ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬ ِ
َ ‫ ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ ُﻣ‬a nasb.
a. After ‫ﺣ ّٰﱴ‬:
َ
‫ت َﺣ ّٰﱴ أَ ْد ُﺧ َﻞ اﻟْﺒَـﻠَ َﺪ‬ ِ ٰ
e.g. ُ ‫ﺳ ْﺮ‬ (‫ﻞ‬
َ ‫) َﺣ ّﱴ أَ ْن أَ ْد ُﺧ‬
I travelled until I entered the city.

b. After ‫ﺤ ْﻮِد‬ ْ ‫ َﻻ ُم‬or ‫َﻻ ُم اﻟﻨﱠـ ْﻔ ِﻲ‬: i.e. that ‫َﻻ ٌم‬, which appears after ُ‫ َﻛﺎ َن اَﻟْ َﻤْﻨ ِﻔﻴﱠﺔ‬or any of the
ُ ُ‫اﳉ‬
forms of ‫ َﻛﺎ َن‬.
e.g. ‫َﻣﺎ َﻛﺎ َن اﷲُ ﻟِﻴُـ َﻌ ﱢﺬﺑـَ ُﻬ ْﻢ‬ (‫)ِﻷَ ْن ﻳـُ َﻌ ﱢﺬﺑـَ ُﻬ ْﻢ‬
Allah was not going to punish them.

99
c. ٰ ِ‫( إ‬until) or ‫( إِﱠﻻ أَ ْن‬but that).
After ‫أَْو‬, which has the meaning of ‫ﱃ أَ ْن‬
‫ﱢﻲ‬ ِِ (‫ﱃ أَ ْن ﺗُـ ْﻌ ِﻄﻴَِﲏ‬
ٰ ِ‫)إ‬
e.g.
ْ ‫ﱠﻚ أ َْو ﺗُـ ْﻌﻄﻴَ ْﲏ َﺣﻘ‬
َ ‫َﻷَﻟَْﺰَﻣﻨ‬ ْ
I will stick to you until you give me my right.

‫ﺐ اﻟْ ُﻤ ِﺴ ْﻲءُ أ َْو ﻳـَ ْﻌﺘَ ِﺬ َر‬ ِ ‫ِﱠ‬

ُ َ‫)إﻻ أَ ْن ﻳـَ ْﻌﺘَﺬ َر( ﻳـُ َﻌﺎﻗ‬
The sinner will be punished unless he provides an excuse.

ِ ‫ﺼﺮ‬
After ‫ف‬
d. ْ ‫ َو ُاو اﻟ ﱠ‬: i.e., that ‫ َو ٌاو‬which “turns away” from the word after it the effect,
which the ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ َﻋﺎﻣ‬had on the word before it (before the ‫) َو ٌاو‬.
‫ب‬ ِ ِ ‫)و أَ ْن ﺗَ ْﻜ ِﺬب( َﻻ ﺗَﺄْﻣﺮ ﺑِﺎﻟ ﱢ‬
e.g. َ ‫ﺼ ْﺪق َو ﺗَ ْﻜﺬ‬ ُْ َ َ
Do not command the truth while you lie.
(Here, the ‫ َو ٌاو‬turned away/stopped the effect of ‫ َﻻ‬from ‫ب‬ ِ
َ ‫ﺗَ ْﻜﺬ‬.)
 This ‫ َو ٌاو‬is also known as ‫ َو ُاو اﻟْ َﻤﻌِﻴﱠ ِﺔ‬or ‫ﺎﺣﺒَ ِﺔ‬
َ ‫ﺼ‬َ ‫ َو ُاو اﻟْ ُﻤ‬.
 The sentence must start with a ‫ ﻧـَ ْﻔﻲ‬or ‫ﻧـَ ْﻬﻲ‬.
ٌ ٌ

e. After ‫َﻻ ُم اﻟﺘﱠـ ْﻌﻠِْﻴ ِﻞ‬: i.e., that ‫ َﻻ ٌم‬which has the meaning of ‫( َﻛﻲ‬it is also called ‫)َﻻ ُم َﻛﻲ‬.
ْ ْ
e.g. ‫ﺢ‬ ِ ِ ُ ‫ِﺟْﺌ‬ ِ ِ
َ ْ‫ﺖ ﻷَ ْﺳ َﱰﻳ‬ (‫ﺢ‬
َ ْ‫)ﻷَ ْن أَ ْﺳ َﱰﻳ‬
I came so I could rest.

f. After ُ‫اﳉََﻮاﺑِﻴﱠﺔ‬
ْ /ُ‫اَﻟْ َﻔﺎءُ اﻟ ﱠﺴﺒَﺒِﻴﱠﺔ‬: i.e., that ‫ف‬, which comes in reply to any of the following six:
‫اَْﻷَ ْﻣُﺮ‬ َ ‫ﱐ ﻓَﺄُ ْﻛ ِﺮَﻣ‬
‫ﻚ‬ ِ َ ‫)ﻓَﺄَ ْن أُ ْﻛ ِﺮَﻣ‬
1. e.g. ْ ‫ﻚ( ُزْر‬
Visit me so that I treat you hospitably.

‫اَﻟﻨﱠـ ْﻬ ُﻲ‬ ‫ﻀِ ْﱯ‬ ِ ِِ

2. e.g. َ ‫َﻻ ﺗَﻄْﻐَ ْﻮا ﻓْﻴﻪ ﻓَـﻴَﺤﻞﱠ َﻋﻠَْﻴ ُﻜ ْﻢ َﻏ‬
Do not cross the limit regarding it, lest, My wrath
descends upon you.

3. ‫اَﻟﻨﱠـ ْﻔ ُﻲ‬ e.g. َ ‫َﻣﺎ ﺗَـُﺰْوُرﻧَﺎ ﻓَـﻨُ ْﻜ ِﺮَﻣ‬

‫ﻚ‬
You do not visit us, so that we may treat you hospitably.

4. ‫اَِْﻻ ْﺳﺘِ ْﻔ َﻬ ُﺎم‬ e.g. ‫ﻚ ﻓَﺄَُزْوَرَك‬

َ ُ‫أَﻳْ َﻦ ﺑـَْﻴﺘ‬
Where is your house, so I can visit you.
ِ
5. ‫اَﻟﺘﱠ َﻤ ﱢ ْﲏ‬ e.g. ُ‫ﺖ ِ ْﱄ َﻣ ًﺎﻻ ﻓَﺄُﻧْﻔ َﻘﻪ‬
َ ‫ﻟَْﻴ‬
I wish I had wealth, so I would have spent it.

‫ض‬ ِ ِ ِ
6. ُ ‫اَﻟْ َﻌ ْﺮ‬ e.g. ‫ﺐ َﺧْﻴـًﺮا‬
َ ‫أََﻻ ﺗـَْﻨﺰُل ﺑﻨَﺎ ﻓَـﺘُﺼْﻴ‬
Why don’t you visit us so that you receive good!

100
3. ‫ أَ ْن‬has to be written after a ‫ َﻻ ُم اﻟﺘﱠـ ْﻌﻠِْﻴ ِﻞ‬if the ‫ َﻻ ُم اﻟﺘﱠـ ْﻌﻠِْﻴ ِﻞ‬is joined to a ٌ‫َﻻءٌ ﻧَﺎﻓِﻴَﺔ‬.
e.g. ‫ﻟِﺌَ ﱠﻼ ﻳـَ ْﻌﻠَ َﻢ‬ (‫)ِﻷَ ْن َﻻ‬ So that he does not know.

4. ‫ أَ ْن‬which appears after a verb with the root letters ‫ ع – ل – م‬is not a ‫ﺐ‬ ٍ‫ﺼ‬ ْ َ‫ف ﻧ‬ ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬. Therefore, it
ِ ِ ِ
َ ‫ ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ ُﻣ‬a fathah. Such an ‫ أَ ْن‬is known as ‫ أً ْن اَﻟْ ُﻤ َﺨ ﱠﻔ َﻔﺔُ ﻣ َﻦ اﻟْ ُﻤﺜـَ ﱠﻘﻠَﺔ‬i.e., that ‫أَ ْن‬
does not give ٌ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬
which was ‫أَ ﱠن‬.
‫ﺖ أَ ْن َﺳﻴَـ ُﻘ ْﻮَم‬ ِ
e.g. ُ ‫َﻋﻠ ْﻤ‬ I knew that he will stand up.
e.g. ‫َﻋﻠِ َﻢ أَ ْن َﺳﻴَ ُﻜ ْﻮ َن ِﻣْﻨ ُﻜ ْﻢ َﻣ ْﺮ ٰﺿﻰ‬ He knew that some of you will be sick.

EXERCISE

ٍ‫ﺼ‬
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out the ‫ﺐ‬ ْ َ‫ف ﻧ‬
ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬and its effect in the following
sentences.
i. ‫ﳚﺘﻬﺪ اﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻟﻴﻨﺠﺢ‬
ii. ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻔﻮز اﻟﻜﺴﻼن‬
iii. ‫ﺟﺌﺖ ﻛﻲ أﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬
iv. ‫ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ اﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺮق‬
v. ‫ﻻ ﺗﺄﻛﻞ ﺣﱴ ﲡﻮع‬
vi. ‫إن اﷲ ﻳﺄﻣﺮﻛﻢ أن ﺗﺬﲝﻮا ﺑﻘﺮة‬
vii. ‫اﺻﻨﻊ اﳌﻌﺮوف ﻓﺘﻨﺎل اﻟﺸﻜﺮ‬
viii. ‫ﻓﺄراد رﺑﻚ أن ﻳﺒﻠﻐﺎ أﺷﺪﳘﺎ و ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺮﺟﺎ ﻛﻨﺰﳘﺎ‬

101
Section 4.1.2
ُ‫ف اﻟْ َﺠﺎ ِزَﻣﺔ‬
ُ ‫ – اَﻟْ ُﺤ ُﺮْو‬Particles That Give Jazm
These are as follows: ‫إِ ْن‬ ْ‫َﱂ‬ ‫ﻟَ ﱠﻤﺎ‬ ‫َﻻ ُم ْاﻷ ََﻣﺮ‬ ‫َﻻءُ اﻟﻨـ ْﱠﻬ ِﻲ‬
 These appear before ٌ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬ ِ
َ ‫ ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ ُﻣ‬and cause the following changes at the end:
˗ They give the last letter a sukoon if it is not a ‫ﻧـُ ْﻮ ٌن‬.
˗ If the last letter is a ‫ﻧـُ ْﻮ ٌن‬, it will be dropped. The exception is the ‫ ﻧـُ ْﻮ ٌن‬of the two
ٌ ‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬.
‫ﺚ‬

Table 4.2
ُ‫ف اﻟْ َﺠﺎ ِزَﻣﺔ‬
ُ ‫اَﻟْ ُﺤ ُﺮْو‬

‫ف َﺟ ْﺰٍم‬ ُ ‫َﺣ ْﺮ‬ Meaning Example

‫إِ ْن‬ ‫ﺲ‬ ِ ِ ِ
if ْ ‫ﺲ أَ ْﺟﻠ‬ ْ ‫إ ْن َْﲡﻠ‬ If you sit, I will sit.

ْ‫َﱂ‬ did not ‫ﻀ ِﺮﺑِْ ْﲏ‬

ْ َ‫َﱂْ ﻳ‬ He did not hit me.
‫ﻟَ ﱠﻤﺎ‬ not yet ‫ﺐ اﻟْ َﻮﻟَ ُﺪ َو ﻟَ ﱠﻤﺎ ﻳـَ ُﻌ ْﺪ‬
َ ‫َذ َﻫ‬ The boy went but has not returned yet.
‫ِل‬ ‫ﺲ‬ ِ ِ
should, shall, let ْ ‫ﻟﻴَ ْﺠﻠ‬ He should sit.
‫َﻻ‬ ‫ﺲ‬ ِ
do not ْ ‫َﻻ َْﲡﻠ‬ Do not sit.

Notes:
1. ‫ إِ ْن‬appears before two verbal sentences. The first one is called ‫ط‬
ٌ ‫( َﺷ ْﺮ‬condition) and the
second ٌ‫ﺟَﺰاء‬
َ (answer/result).
2. If ‫ إِ ْن‬appears before ‫إِﱠﻻ‬, it should be translated negatively.
e.g. ٌ َ‫إِ ْن ٰﻫ َﺬا إِﱠﻻ َﻣﻠ‬
ٌ‫ﻚ َﻛ ِﺮْﱘ‬ He is not but an honorable angel. /
He is only an honorable angel.

3. ‫ف‬
َ should be brought before the ٌ‫ َﺟَﺰاء‬of a ‫ط‬
ٌ ‫ َﺷ ْﺮ‬when the ٌ‫ َﺟَﺰاء‬is one of the following:
ِْ ِ‫ﲨﻠَﺔٌ ا‬ ِ
a. ٌ‫ﲰﻴﱠﺔ‬ ُْ e.g. َ ْ‫إِ ْن ﺗَﺄْﺗ ِ ْﲏ ﻓَﺄَﻧ‬
‫ﺖ ُﻣ ْﻜَﺮٌم‬
If you come to me you will be treated hospitably.

b. ‫أَْﻣٌﺮ‬ e.g. َ ْ‫إِ ْن َرأَﻳ‬

ُ‫ﺖ َزﻳْ ًﺪا ﻓَﺄَ ْﻛ ِﺮْﻣﻪ‬
If you see Zayd, treat him hospitably.

c. ‫ﻧـَ ْﻬﻲ‬ ِ َ َ‫إِ ْن أَﺗ‬

ٌ e.g. ُ‫ﺎك َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﻓَ َﻼ ُ ْﻨﻪ‬
If Zayd comes to you, do not humiliate him.

102
 d. ٌ‫ُد َﻋﺎء‬ e.g. ‫إِ ْن أَ ْﻛَﺮْﻣﺘَِ ْﲏ ﻓَ َﺠَﺰ َاك اﷲُ َﺧْﻴـًﺮا‬
If you treat me hospitably, then, may Allah reward you
well.
ِ ‫ اَﻟْ ِﻔﻌﻞ اﻟْﻤ‬will be translated in the future tense when it is…
4. ‫ﺎﺿﻰ‬ َ ُْ
a. used as a ٌ‫ُد َﻋﺎء‬ e.g. ‫ﺧْﻴـًﺮا‬
َ ُ‫َﺟَﺰ َاك اﷲ‬
May Allah reward you well.
b. preceded by ‫ﺷ ْﺮ ٍط‬
َ ‫ف‬
ُ ‫َﺣ ْﺮ‬ e.g. ‫ﺖ‬ َ ‫إِ ْن َﺟﻠَ ْﺴ‬
ُ ‫ﺖ َﺟﻠَ ْﺴ‬
If you sit, I will sit.
c. preceded by ‫ﺻ ْﻮٌل‬ ِ ‫ﺎﳊَ َﺴﻨَ ِﺔ ﻓَـﻠَﻪُ َﻋ ْﺸ ُﺮ أ َْﻣﺜَ ِﺎﳍَﺎ‬
ْ ِ‫َﻣ ْﻦ َﺟﺎءَ ﺑ‬
ُ ‫ ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ َﻣ ْﻮ‬e.g.
Whoever comes with good, there will be ten like it
for him.

EXERCISE

1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out the ‫ﺟ ْﺰٍم‬

َ ‫ف‬
ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬and its effect on the following
sentences.

i. ‫ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﻠﻲ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة‬ iv. ‫ﻛﱪ اﻟﻐﻼم و ﳌﺎ ﻳﺘﻬﺬب‬

ii. ‫ﻻ ﺗﻜﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻀﺤﻚ‬ v. ‫إن ﻳﺴﺎﻓﺮ أﺧﻮك أﺳﺎﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻪ‬
iii. ‫اﺧﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻜﺎن و ﱂ ﻳﺘﻔﻘﺎ‬ vi. ‫إن ﺗﻨﺼﺮوا اﷲ ﻳﻨﺼﺮﻛﻢ‬

103
Section 4.2
ُ‫ﺎل اﻟْ َﻌ ِﺎﻣﻠَﺔ‬
ُ ‫ – اَْﻷَﻓْـ َﻌ‬Governing Verbs

ُ ‫ – اَﻟ ِْﻔ ْﻌ ُﻞ اﻟ َْﻤ ْﻌ ُﺮْو‬Active Verb: It is that verb whose doer is known/mentioned.
‫ف‬
 ‫ف‬ ُ ‫اَﻟْ ِﻔ ْﻌ ُﻞ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻌُﺮْو‬, whether transitive or intransitive, governs the following nouns as and when
applicable:
˗ it gives raf‘ to the ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ﻓَﺎﻋ‬.
˗ it gives nasb to the following, as and when applicable:
i. ‫ اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮ ُل ﺑِِﻪ( اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮ ُل ﺑِِﻪ‬can only be governed by a ‫ﻞ اﻟْ ُﻤﺘَـ َﻌ ﱢﺪى‬ ِ
ُ ‫)اَﻟْﻔ ْﻌ‬
ii. ‫اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮ ُل اﻟْ ُﻤﻄْﻠَ ُﻖ‬
iii. ُ‫اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮ ُل َﻣ َﻌﻪ‬
iv. ُ‫اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮ ُل ﻟَﻪ‬
v. ‫اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮ ُل ﻓِْﻴ ِﻪ‬
vi. ‫ﺎل‬
ُ َ‫اَ ْﳊ‬
vii. ‫اَﻟﺘﱠ ِﻤْﻴـ ُﺰ‬

‫ – اَﻟ ِْﻔ ْﻌ ُﻞ اﻟ َْﻤ ْﺠ ُﻬ ْﻮ ُل‬Passive Verb: It is that verb whose doer is not known/mentioned.
 ‫ﺠ ُﻬ ْﻮ ُل‬ ِ ِ ِ
ْ ‫ اَﻟْﻔ ْﻌ ُﻞ اﻟْ َﻤ‬is also known as ُ‫( ﻓ ْﻌ ُﻞ َﻣﺎ َﱂْ ﻳُ َﺴ ﱠﻢ ﻓَﺎﻋﻠُﻪ‬a verb whose faa‘il is not named).
 It gives raf‘ to the ‫ﺎﻋ ٍﻞ‬ ِ َ‫)اَﻟْﻤ ْﻔﻌﻮ ُل ﺑِِﻪ( ﻧَﺎﺋِﺐ ﻓ‬.
ُ ُْ َ
 It gives nasb to all the remaining mansoobaat.
e.g. ‫ﰲ َدا ِرﻩِ ﺗَﺄْ ِدﻳْـﺒًﺎ‬ِ ِ َ ‫ﺎﺿﻰ‬
ْ ‫ﺿ ْﺮﺑًﺎ َﺷﺪﻳْ ًﺪا‬
ِ ‫اﳉﻤﻌ ِﺔ أَﻣﺎم اﻟْ َﻘ‬
َ ‫ﺿ ِﺮ‬
َ َ َ ُ ُْ ‫ب َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﻳـَ ْﻮَم‬ ُ
Zayd was beaten severely on Friday, in front of the Judge, in his office, to teach
him manners.

‫ – اَﻟْ ِﻔ ْﻌﻞ ﱠ‬Intransitive Verb: It is that verb whose meaning can be understood without a
‫اﻟﻼ ِزُم‬ ُ
ِ‫اَﻟْﻤ ْﻔﻌﻮ ُل ﺑِﻪ‬.
ُْ َ
e.g. ‫ﺟﻠَﺲ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬
َ َ Zayd sat.

ُ‫ﺼﺔ‬ ِ ُ ‫اَْﻷَﻓْـﻌ‬: These were discussed earlier in section 1.8.

َ ‫ﺎل اﻟﻨﱠﺎﻗ‬ َ

104
Section 4.2.1
‫ – اَﻟ ِْﻔ ْﻌ ُﻞ اﻟْ ُﻤﺘَـ َﻌ ﱢﺪى‬Transitive Verb

Definition: It is that verb whose meaning cannot be understood without a ‫اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮ ُل ﺑِِﻪ‬.
e.g. ‫ب َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﺑَﻜًْﺮا‬
َ ‫ﺿَﺮ‬
َ Zayd hit Bakr.

There are four types of ‫ﻞ اﻟْ ُﻤﺘَـ َﻌ ﱢﺪى‬ ِ

ُ ‫اَﻟْﻔ ْﻌ‬. These are as follows:
1. Those verbs, which require one ‫ اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮ ُل ﺑِِﻪ‬as is the case with most verbs.
e.g. ‫ب َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﺑَﻜًْﺮا‬
َ ‫ﺿَﺮ‬
َ
2. Those verbs, which can be given two ‫اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮ ُل ﺑِِﻪ‬. These include the following:
 Any verb, which has the meaning of ٌ‫( اِ ْﻋﻄَﺎء‬to give).
e.g. ‫ﺐ‬ َ ‫َﻣﻨَ َﺢ َوَﻫ‬ ‫ أ َْﻋ ٰﻄﻰ‬etc.
‫ﺖ اﻟ ﱠﺴﺎﺋِ َﻞ ُﺧْﺒـًﺰا‬ ُ ‫أ َْﻋﻄَْﻴ‬ I gave the beggar a bread.
 Some other verbs, which can also have two ‫ اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮ ُل ﺑِِﻪ‬include the following
‫َﺳﺄ ََل‬ ‫أََﻣَﺮ َﻛ َﺴﻰ‬ etc.
e.g. ‫ْﺴﻮ اﻟْﻌِْﻠ ُﻢ أَ ْﻫﻠَﻪُ َوﻗَ ًﺎرا‬
ُ ‫ﻳَﻜ‬ Knowledge clothes its possessor with dignity.

3. Those verbs, which must be given two ‫اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮ ُل ﺑِِﻪ‬.

 ِ ‫ﺎل اﻟْ ُﻘﻠُ ْﻮ‬
These verbs are known as ‫ب‬ ُ ‫( أَﻓْـ َﻌ‬verbs which relate to the heart/feelings).
 They enter upon a ُ‫ ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬and ‫ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬
َ unlike the verbs above (number 2).

Table 4.3
ِ ‫ﺎل اﻟْ ُﻘﻠُ ْﻮ‬
‫ب‬ ُ ‫أَﻓْـ َﻌ‬

Verb Usage Example

‫َرأٰى‬ used for certainty (‫ﲔ‬ ِ ‫ﺖ َﺳﻌِْﻴ ًﺪا ذَ ِاﻫﺒًﺎ‬
ٌْ ‫)ﻳَﻘ‬ ُ ْ‫َرأَﻳ‬ I was sure Sa‘eed was going.
‫َو َﺟ َﺪ‬ used for certainty (‫ﲔ‬ ِ ‫ت َرِﺷْﻴ ًﺪا َﻋﺎﻟِ ًﻤﺎ‬
ٌْ ‫)ﻳَﻘ‬ ُ ‫َو َﺟ ْﺪ‬ I was sure Rasheed was
knowledgeable.
‫َﻋﻠِ َﻢ‬ used for certainty (‫ﲔ‬ ِ
ٌْ ‫)ﻳَﻘ‬ ‫ﺖ َزﻳْ ًﺪا أَِﻣْﻴـﻨًﺎ‬ ِ
ُ ‫َﻋﻠ ْﻤ‬ I was sure Zayd was trustworthy.
used for certainty (‫ﲔ‬ ِ
‫َز َﻋ َﻢ‬ ٌْ ‫)ﻳَﻘ‬ ِ ‫زﻋﻤﺖ زﻳ ًﺪا ﺣ‬
‫ﺎﺿًﺮا‬
I was sure Zayd was present. /
or doubt (‫ﻚ‬
‫) َﺷ ﱞ‬ َ َْ ُ ْ َ َ I thought Zayd was present.

‫ﺐ‬ ِ ِ َ‫ﺣ ِﺴﺒﺖ زﻳ ًﺪا ﻓ‬

َ ‫َﺣﺴ‬ used for doubt (‫ﻚ‬
‫) َﺷ ﱞ‬ ‫ﺎﺿ ًﻼ‬ َْ ُ ْ َ I thought Zayd was well-educated.
‫ﺎل‬
َ ‫َﺧ‬ used for doubt (‫ﻚ‬
‫) َﺷ ﱞ‬ ِ ِ
‫ﺖ َﺧﺎﻟ ًﺪا ﻗَﺎﺋ ًﻤﺎ‬ ِ
ُ ‫ﺧ ْﻠ‬ I thought Khalid was standing.
‫ﻇَ ﱠﻦ‬ used for doubt (‫ﻚ‬
‫) َﺷ ﱞ‬ ‫ﺖ ﺑَ ْﻜًﺮا ﻧَﺎﺋِ ًﻤﺎ‬
ُ ‫ﻇَﻨَـْﻨ‬ I thought Bakr was sleeping.

105
Note: Other verbs, which also require two ‫ اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮ ُل ﺑِِﻪ‬include the following:
‫ﺻﻴﱠـَﺮ‬
َ to make something something else
e.g. ‫اق ﻛِﺘَﺎﺑًﺎ‬
َ ‫ت ْاﻷ َْوَر‬
ُ ‫ﺻﻴﱠـ ْﺮ‬
َ I made the pages a book.

‫اِ ﱠﲣَ َﺬ‬ to take someone/something as someone/something

e.g. ‫َوا ﱠﲣَ َﺬ اﷲُ إِﺑْـ ٰﺮِﻫْﻴ َﻢ َﺧﻠِْﻴ ًﻼ‬ Allah took Ibraheem (peace be upon him) as a friend.

‫َﺟ َﻌ َﻞ‬ to make something something else

‫ﺎب ُﻣَﺮﺗـﱠﺒًﺎ‬ ِ
e.g. َ َ‫ﺖ اﻟْﻜﺘ‬
ُ ‫َﺟ َﻌ ْﻠ‬ I made the book organized.

4. Those verbs which require three ‫اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮ ُل ﺑِِﻪ‬. Each of these has the meaning
“informing/showing.” These are as follows:

Table 4.4

Verb Example
‫أ َٰرى‬ ‫ﺖ َزﻳْ ًﺪا َﺧﺎﻟِ ًﺪا ﻧَﺎﺋِ ًﻤﺎ‬ ُ ْ‫أََرأَﻳ‬ I informed Zayd that Khalid is sleeping.
‫أَ ْﻋﻠَ َﻢ‬ ‫ﺎﺿ ًﻼ‬ِ َ‫أَ ْﻋﻠَﻤﺖ زﻳ ًﺪا ﺑ ْﻜﺮا ﻓ‬
ً َ َْ ُ ْ I informed Zayd that Bakr is well-educated.
َ‫أَﻧْـﺒَﺄ‬ ِ
‫أَﻧْـﺒَﺄَِﱐ اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺳ ْﻮ ُل ْاﻷَِﻣْﻴـَﺮ ﻗَﺎد ًﻣﺎ‬ The messenger informed me that the chief is
coming.
َ‫ﻧـَﺒﱠﺄ‬ ‫ﻧـَﺒﱠﺄَﺗـُ ُﻬ ْﻢ اَﻟْ ِﻜْﺒـَﺮ ﳑَْ ُﻘ ْﻮﺗًﺎ‬ I informed them that arrogance is blameworthy.
‫َﺧﺒَـَﺮ‬
ْ‫أ‬ ‫ﺐ ُﻣ ِﻔْﻴ ًﺪا‬ ‫ﱠ‬
َ ‫ت اﻟْﻐ ْﻠ َﻤﺎ َن اﻟﻠ ْﻌ‬
ِ ‫أَﺧﺒـﺮ‬
ُ َْ ْ I informed the boys that sport is beneficial.
‫َﺧﺒﱠـَﺮ‬ ِ ِ
‫ت اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺴﺎﻓ ِﺮﻳْ َﻦ اﻟْﻘﻄَ َﺎر ُﻣﺘَﺄَ ﱢﺧًﺮا‬ ُ ‫َﺧﺒﱠـ ْﺮ‬ I informed the travellers that the train is late.
‫ﱠث‬
َ ‫َﺣﺪ‬ ً‫ﺎﺣﺔَ ﻧَﺎﻓِ َﻌﺔ‬ َ َ‫ﺖ ْاﻷَْوَﻻ َد اﻟ ﱢﺴﺒ‬ ُ ْ‫َﺣ ﱠﺪﺛ‬ I informed the children that swimming is
beneficial.

EXERCISE

1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyse the following sentences.

i. ‫ﻧﺒﺄت ﺳﻌﻴﺪا أﺧﺎﻩ ﻗﺎدﻣﺎ‬ iv. ‫رأﻳﺖ اﻟﺼﻠﺢ ﺧﲑا‬

ii. ‫أﻋﻄﻴﺖ زﻳﺪا درﳘﺎ‬ v. ‫أﺧﱪﱏ زﻳﺪ أﺑﺎﻩ ﻣﺮﻳﻀﺎ‬
iii. ‫ﻓﻬﻢ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ اﻟﺪرس‬ vi. ‫ﻇﻨﻨﺖ اﳉﻮ ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻻ‬

106
Section 4.2.2
‫ﺎل اﻟ ُْﻤ َﻘ َﺎرﺑَِﺔ َواﻟ ﱠﺮ َﺟ ِﺎء َواﻟ ﱡ‬
‫ﺸ ُﺮْو ِع‬ ُ ‫أَﻓْـ َﻌ‬

Definition: These verbs behave the same way as ‫ َﻛﺎ َن‬.

They are used for the following purposes:
1. ‫ﺎرﺑَِﺔ‬
َ ‫ﺎل اﻟْ ُﻤ َﻘ‬
ُ ‫ أَﻓْـ َﻌ‬show nearness in the attainment (‫ﺼ ْﻮ ُل‬
ُ ُ‫ )اَ ْﳊ‬of the ‫ﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬.
َ
ِ ‫ﺎل اﻟﱠﺮﺟ‬
2. ‫ﺎء‬ َ ُ ‫ أَﻓْـ َﻌ‬show desire for attainment of ‫ َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬.
3. ‫ﱡﺮْوِع‬
ُ‫ﺎل اﻟﺸ‬
ُ ‫ أَﻓْـ َﻌ‬show commencement of action.

Table 4.5
‫ﺎل اﻟ ُْﻤ َﻘ َﺎرﺑَِﺔ َواﻟ ﱠﺮ َﺟ ِﺎء َواﻟ ﱡ‬
‫ﺸ ُﺮْو ِع‬ ُ ‫أَﻓْـ َﻌ‬

‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬ ‫اِ ْﺳ ٌﻢ‬ ‫َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬ Type Example

‫َﻛ َﺎد‬ ‫ﻀﺎ ِرعٌ َرﻓْ ٌﻊ‬

َ ‫ ُﻣ‬preferably without ‫أَ ْن‬ ‫ﺼ ْﻮٌل‬
ُ ‫ﺐ ُﺣ‬
ُ ‫َﻛ َﺎد َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﻳَ ْﺬ َﻫ‬
Zayd was about to
go.
*‫ب‬ ‫ﻀﺎ ِرعٌ َرﻓْ ٌﻊ‬ ِ ِ
َ ‫َﻛَﺮ‬ َ ‫ ُﻣ‬preferably without ‫أَ ْن‬ ‫ﺼ ْﻮٌل‬
ُ ‫ﺲ ُﺣ‬ ُ ‫ب َﺧﺎﻟ ٌﺪ َْﳚﻠ‬ َ ‫َﻛَﺮ‬
Khalid was about to
sit.
ِ
‫ﻚ‬
َ ‫أ َْو َﺷ‬ ‫َرﻓْ ٌﻊ‬ ٌ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬
َ ‫ ُﻣ‬preferably with ‫أَ ْن‬ ‫ﺼ ْﻮٌل‬
ُ ‫ﺲ ُﺣ‬ َ ‫ﻚ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ أَ ْن َْﳚﻠ‬ َ ‫ أ َْو َﺷ‬Zayd was about to sit.
*‫َﻋ ٰﺴﻰ‬ ‫َرﻓْ ٌﻊ‬ ٌ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬
َ ‫ ُﻣ‬preferably with ‫أَ ْن‬ ٌ‫َﻋ ٰﺴﻰ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ أَ ْن َﳜُْﺮ َج َر َﺟﺎء‬
Hopefully Zayd will
come out.
*‫ﻃَِﻔ َﻖ‬ ‫َرﻓْ ٌﻊ‬ ٌ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬
َ ‫ ُﻣ‬without ‫أَ ْن‬ ٌ‫ﺐ ُﺷ ُﺮْوع‬ ُ ُ‫ﻃَﻔ َﻖ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﻳَﻜْﺘ‬
ِ Zayd began writing.
*‫َﺟ َﻌ َﻞ‬ ‫َرﻓْ ٌﻊ‬ ٌ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬
َ ‫ ُﻣ‬without ‫أَ ْن‬ ٌ‫َﺟ َﻌ َﻞ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﻳـَ ْﻘَﺮأُ ُﺷ ُﺮْوع‬ Zayd began reading.
*‫َﺧ َﺬ‬
َ‫أ‬ ‫َرﻓْ ٌﻊ‬ ٌ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬
َ ‫ ُﻣ‬without ‫أَ ْن‬ ٌ‫َﺧ َﺬ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﻳَﺄْ ُﻛ ُﻞ ُﺷ ُﺮْوع‬ َ‫أ‬ Zayd began eating.

* These verbs are used only in past tense.

 The ‫ﱡﺮْوِع‬
ُ‫ﺎل اﻟﺸ‬
ُ ‫ أَﻓْـ َﻌ‬can be used as normal verbs too.
e.g. ُ‫َﺧ َﺬ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﺛـَ ْﻮﺑَﻪ‬
َ‫أ‬ Zayd took his clothes.

Sentence Analysis: ‫َﻋ ٰﺴﻰ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ أَ ْن َﳜُْﺮ َج‬ Hopefully Zayd will come out.

‫ج‬
َ ‫أَ ْن ﻳَ ْﺨ ُﺮ‬ ‫َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ ‫َﻋ ٰﺴﻰ‬
ِ َ‫ ﻓ‬+ ‫ﻓِﻌﻞ‬
(‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ ) ُﻫ َﻮ‬ ٌْ

‫َﺧْﺒـُﺮ َﻋ ٰﺴﻰ‬ ‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ َﻋ ٰﺴﻰ‬ ‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ُﻞ اﻟﱠﺮ َﺟ ِﺎء‬

107
 ‫‪EXERCISE‬‬
‫‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyse the following sentences.‬‬

‫َﻋ ٰﺴﻰ اﷲ أن ﻳﺸﻔﻴﻚ ‪i.‬‬ ‫أوﺷﻚ أن ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺎب اﳌﺪرﺳﺔ ‪iv.‬‬

‫ﺗﻜﺎد اﻟﺴﻤﻮات ﻳﺘﻔﻄﺮن ‪ii.‬‬ ‫أﺧﺬت أﻛﺘﺐ ‪v.‬‬
‫ﻋﺴﺖ اﳌﺮأة أن ﺗﻘﻮم ‪iii.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻌﻞ رﺳﻮل اﷲ ﳝﺴﺢ رأﺳﻪ ‪vi.‬‬

‫‪108‬‬
Section 4.2.3
‫ﺎل اﻟ َْﻤ ْﺪ ِح َو اﻟ ﱠﺬم‬
ُ ‫ – أَﻓْـ َﻌ‬Verbs of Praise and Blame

Verbs of praise: ‫ﻧِ ْﻌ َﻢ‬ e.g. ‫ﻧِ ْﻌ َﻢ اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ What a wonderful man Zayd is!
‫َﺣﺒﱠ َﺬا‬ e.g. ‫َﺣﺒﱠ َﺬا َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ What a wonderful man Zayd is!
‫ﺲ‬ ِ ِ
Verbs of blame:
َ ‫ﺑْﺌ‬ e.g. ‫ﺲ اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬َ ‫ﺑْﺌ‬ What an evil man Zayd is!

َ‫َﺳﺎء‬ e.g. ‫َﺳﺎءَ اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ What an evil man Zayd is!

 That which appears after the ‫ﻞ‬ ِ ِ ٌ ‫ ﳐَْﺼﻮ‬or ‫ص ﺑِﺎﻟ ﱠﺬ ﱢم‬

ٌ ‫ ﻓَﺎﻋ‬is called ‫ص ﺑﺎﻟْ َﻤ ْﺪ ِح‬ ُْ ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬
ُ َْ‫ﳐ‬.
 The ‫ﻞ‬ ِ ِ ِ
ٌ ‫ ﻓَﺎﻋ‬of ‫ﺲ – ﻧ ْﻌ َﻢ‬
َ ‫ َﺳﺎءَ – ﺑْﺌ‬must be one of the following:
i. prefixed with ‫ال‬.
e.g. ‫ﻧِ ْﻌ َﻢ اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ What a wonderful man Zayd is!
ii. ‫ﺎف‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ ُﻣ‬to a noun prefixed with ‫ال‬.
e.g. ‫ﺐ اﻟْﻌِْﻠ ِﻢ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬
ُ ‫ﺻﺎﺣ‬
ِ ‫ﻧِﻌﻢ‬
َ َْ What a wonderful learned man Zayd is!
iii. a hidden ‫ﺿ ِﻤْﻴـٌﺮ‬ ِ ِ
َ followed by a ٌ‫ﺼ ْﻮﺑَﺔ‬ ُ ‫( ﻧَﻜَﺮةٌ َﻣْﻨ‬being ‫)َﲤْﻴـٌﺰ‬.
e.g. ‫ﺟ ًﻼ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ ِ ِ
ُ ‫]ﻧ ْﻌ َﻢ ) ُﻫ َﻮ( َر ُﺟ ًﻼ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ[ ﻧ ْﻌ َﻢ َر‬ What a wonderful man Zayd is!

In ‫ﺣﺒﱠ َﺬا َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬

َ, ‫ﺐ‬‫ َﺣ ﱠ‬is the ‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬.
‫ )اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ إِ َﺷ َﺎرةٍ( ٰذا‬is its ‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬
ِ َ‫ﻓ‬.
‫ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬is the ‫ص ﺑِﺎﻟْ َﻤ ْﺪ ِح‬ ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬ُ َْ‫ﳐ‬.

Notes:
1. These verbs are used in the past tense in their singular form (masculine or feminine).
2. At times the ‫ص ﺑِﺎﻟْ َﻤ ْﺪ ِح‬
ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬
ُ َْ‫ ﳐ‬is dropped.
e.g. ‫ﻧِ ْﻌ َﻢ اﻟْ َﻌْﺒ ُﺪ‬ i.e. ‫ب‬ ِ
ُ ‫ﻧ ْﻌ َﻢ اﻟْ َﻌْﺒ ُﺪ أَﻳـﱡ ْﻮ‬ What a wonderful slave Ayub is!

Sentence Analysis:

‫َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ ‫اﻟ ﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ‬ ‫ﻧِ ْﻌ َﻢ‬

‫ص ﺑِﺎﻟْ َﻤ ْﺪ ِح‬ ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬
ُ َْ‫ ﳐ‬+
ِ َ‫ﻓ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ + ‫ﻓِ ْﻌ ُﻞ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺪ ِح‬

ٌ‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ اِ ِْﲰﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬ ‫ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأٌ ُﻣ َﺆ ﱠﺧٌﺮ‬ ‫ﱠم‬

ٌ ‫َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ ُﻣ َﻘﺪ‬

109
 EXERCISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyse the following sentences.

i. ‫ﻧﻌﻤﺖ اﻻﺑﻨﺔ ﻓﺎﻃﻤﺔ‬

ii. ‫ﺣﺒﺬا اﻻﺗﻔﺎق‬
iii. ‫ﻧﻌﻢ اﳌﻮﱃ‬
iv. ‫ﺑﺌﺲ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﻮا ﻳﻔﻌﻠﻮن‬

110
Section 4.2.4
ِ ‫ﱠﻌ ﱡﺠ‬
‫ﺐ‬ َ ‫ﺎل اﻟﺘـ‬
ُ ‫ – أَﻓْـ َﻌ‬Verbs of Wonder

There are two wazns to express wonder for three letter verbs (‫ﺠ ﱠﺮُد‬ ِ
َ ‫)اَﻟﺜﱡَﻼﺛ ﱡﻲ اﻟْ ُﻤ‬.
1. ُ‫ َﻣﺎ أَﻓْـ َﻌﻠَﻪ‬: ‫ َﻣﺎ‬has the meaning of ‫ﺷﻲ ٍء‬
َْ ‫ى‬
‫أَ ﱡ‬.
e.g. ‫ﺴ َﻦ َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬َ ‫َﺣ‬
ْ ‫ َﻣﺎ أ‬How wonderful Zayd is!
‫َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬ ‫ﺴ َﻦ‬
َ ‫َﺣ‬
ْ‫أ‬ ‫َﻣﺎ‬
‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل ﺑِِﻪ‬ + (‫ﻞ ) ُﻫ َﻮ‬ ِ ِ
ٌ ‫ ﻓَﺎﻋ‬+ ‫ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬

ٌ‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ اِ ِْﲰﻴﱠﺔٌ إِﻧْ َﺸﺎﺋِﻴﱠﺔ‬ (ٌ‫َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ )ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬ + ٌ‫ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬

2. ‫ﻞ ﺑِِﻪ‬ ِ ٍ ِ ِ
َ ‫أَﻓْـ َﻌ‬: ‫ )ﻓ ْﻌ ُﻞ أَْﻣﺮ( أَﻓْﻌ ْﻞ‬has the meaning of past tense and the ‫ ب‬is extra (ٌ‫) َزاﺋ َﺪة‬.
e.g. ‫َﺣ ِﺴ ْﻦ ﺑَِﺰﻳْ ٍﺪ‬ ْ‫أ‬ (‫ﺴ َﻦ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬
َ ‫َﺣ‬
ْ ‫)أ‬ How wonderful Zayd is!
ٌ‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔٌ إِﻧْ َﺸﺎﺋِﻴﱠﺔ‬

 To express wonder for other than three letter verbs (‫ﺠ ﱠﺮِد‬ ِ ِ
َ ‫) َﻏْﻴـُﺮ اﻟﺜﱡَﻼﺛ ﱢﻲ اﻟْ ُﻤ‬, a word such as ِ‫ أَ ْﺷﺪ ْد ﺑ‬/
‫َﺷ ﱠﺪ‬
َ ‫ َﻣﺎ أ‬or ‫َﺣ َﺴ َﻦ‬ ِ ‫ أ‬etc. should be placed before the masdar of the desired verb. The
ْ ‫ َﻣﺎ أ‬/ ِ‫َﺣﺴ َﻦ ﺑ‬
ْ
ِ ِ
masdar will be ‫ َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل ﺑﻪ‬, thus mansoob.
ِ ‫ﱠﺎس ﻟِﻠْﻌﻠَﻤ‬ ِ َ ‫ﻣﺎ أ‬
e.g. ‫ﺎء‬ َ ُ ِ ‫َﺷ ﱠﺪ إ ْﻛَﺮ َام اﻟﻨ‬ َ How very respectful people are towards the learned.

EXERCISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyse the following sentences.

i. ‫أﻃﻮل ﺑﺰﻳﺪ‬
ii. ‫ﻣﺎ أﺷﺪ ﺑﻴﺎض ﺷﻌﺮﻩ‬
iii. ‫ﻣﺎ أﻃﻮل اﻟﺮﺟﻠﲔ‬

111
Section 4.3
ُ‫ – اَْﻷَ ْﺳ َﻤﺎءُ اﻟْ َﻌ ِﺎﻣﻠَﺔ‬Governing Nouns
ِ ‫َﲰَﺎء ْاﻻَﻓْـﻌ‬
Amongst these, ‫ﺎل‬ َ ُ ْ ‫ أ‬were discussed in section 2.4.4. Here, we will discuss the rest.

Section 4.3.1
ُ‫ﺸ ْﺮ ِﻃﻴﱠﺔ‬
‫ – اَْﻷَ ْﺳ َﻤﺎءُ اﻟ ﱠ‬Conditional Nouns
 They govern two ٌ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬ ِ
َ ‫ ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ ُﻣ‬giving both a jazm.
 They appear before two sentences. The first is called ‫ط‬
ٌ ‫( َﺷ ْﺮ‬condition) and the second
ٌ‫( َﺟَﺰاء‬result).

Table 4.6
ُ‫ﺸ ْﺮ ِﻃﻴﱠﺔ‬
‫اَْﻷَ ْﺳ َﻤﺎءُ اﻟ ﱠ‬

Noun Meaning Usage Example

1. ‫َﻣ ْﻦ‬ who, ‫ﻟِْﻠ َﻌﺎﻗِ ِﻞ‬ ُ‫َﻣ ْﻦ ﻳُ ْﻜ ِﺮْﻣ ِ ْﲏ أُ ْﻛ ِﺮْﻣﻪ‬
Whoever treats me hospitably, I
who ever will treat him hospitably.
2. ‫َﻣﺎ‬ what, ‫ﻟِﻐَ ِْﲑ اﻟْ َﻌﺎﻗِ ِﻞ‬ ‫َﻣﺎ ﺗَﺄْ ُﻛ ْﻞ أٰ ُﻛ ْﻞ‬ Whatever you eat, I will eat.
whatever
3. ‫َﻣ ْﻬ َﻤﺎ‬ however ‫ﻟِﻐَ ِْﲑ اﻟْ َﻌﺎﻗِ ِﻞ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ ْ ‫َﻣ ْﻬ َﻤﺎ ﺗـُﻨْ ِﻔ ْﻖ ِﰲ‬
َ ‫اﳋَِْﲑ ﻳـَْﻨـ َﻔ ْﻌ‬
Whatever you spend in the way of
much good, will benefit you.
4. ‫َﻣ ٰﱴ‬ ِ ‫ﻟِﻠﱠﺰﻣ‬
‫ﺎن‬ ‫ﺐ‬ْ ‫ﺐ أَ ْذ َﻫ‬ ْ ‫َﻣ ٰﱴ ﺗَ ْﺬ َﻫ‬
when Whenever you go, I will go.
َ
5. ‫أَﻳﱠﺎ َن‬ when ِ‫ﻟِﻠﱠﺰﻣﺎن‬ ‫أَﻳﱠﺎ َن ﺗُ َﺴﺎﻓِْﺮ أُ َﺳﺎﻓِْﺮ‬ Whenever you travel, I will travel.
َ
6. ‫أَﻳْ َﻦ‬ ِ‫ﻟِْﻠﻤ َﻜﺎن‬ ‫ﺐ‬ْ ‫ﺐ أَ ْذ َﻫ‬ ْ ‫أَﻳْ َﻦ ﺗَ ْﺬ َﻫ‬
where
َ Wherever you go, I will go.
7. ‫َﱏ‬
ّٰ ‫أ‬ where ِ ‫ﻟِْﻠﻤ َﻜ‬
‫ﺎن‬ ‫َﱏ ﺗَـْﻨ ِﺰْل أَﻧْ ِﺰْل‬
ّٰ ‫أ‬ Wherever you stay, I will stay.
َ
8. ‫ﺣْﻴﺜُ َﻤﺎ‬ where ِ‫ﻟِْﻠﻤ َﻜﺎن‬ ‫َﺣْﻴﺜُ َﻤﺎ ﺗُ َﺴﺎﻓِْﺮ أُ َﺳﺎﻓِْﺮ‬ Wherever you travel, I will travel.
َ َ
9. ‫َﻛْﻴـ َﻔ َﻤﺎ‬ how, ِ‫ﻟِْﻠﺤﺎل‬ ‫َﻛْﻴـ َﻔ َﻤﺎ ﺗَـ ْﻘ ُﻌ ْﺪ أَﻗْـ ُﻌ ْﺪ‬ Whichever way you sit, I will sit.
َ
manner
10. ‫ى‬
‫أَ ﱞ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ٍ ‫أَ ﱡ‬
ْ ‫ﺐ أَ ْذ َﻫ‬
ْ ‫ى َﻣ َﻜﺎن ﺗَ ْﺬ َﻫ‬
any of any of the Whichever place you go, I will go.
the above above

Notes:
1. ‫ إِ ْن‬and ‫ إِ ْذ َﻣﺎ‬have the same function as ُ‫ﱠﺮ ِﻃﻴﱠﺔ‬ ِ
ْ ‫اَْﻷَ ْﲰَﺎءُ اﻟﺸ‬, except that they are particles (‫) َﺣ ْﺮﻓَﺎ اﻟ ﱠﺸ ْﺮط‬
and not nouns. Collectively they are called ‫ﱠﺮ ِط‬ ْ ‫ات اﻟﺸ‬ ُ ‫أ ََد َو‬.
‫إِ ْن‬ if e.g. ‫ﺐ‬ ْ ‫ﺐ أَ ْذ َﻫ‬ ْ ‫إ ْن ﺗَ ْﺬ َﻫ‬
ِ If you go, I will go.
‫إِ ْذ َﻣﺎ‬ when e.g. ‫إِ ْذ َﻣﺎ ﺗَـ ْﻔ َﻌ ْﻞ َﺷﺮا ﺗَـْﻨ َﺪ ْم‬ If you do evil, you will be regretful.

112
2. When the following nouns are used for ‫ﺎم‬ ِ ِ
ٌ ‫( ا ْﺳﺘ ْﻔ َﻬ‬interrogative), they appear before one
sentence.
‫ى‬
‫أَ ﱞ‬ ‫َﱏ‬
ّٰ ‫أ‬ ‫أَﻳْ َﻦ‬ ‫َﻣ ٰﱴ أَﻳﱠﺎ َن‬ ‫َﻣﺎ‬ ‫َﻣ ْﻦ‬
e.g. ‫َﻣ ٰﱴ ﺗُ َﺴﺎﻓُِﺮ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ُ ‫أَﻳْ َﻦ ﺗَ ْﺬ َﻫ‬ ‫ﺖ‬َ ْ‫َﻣ ْﻦ أَﻧ‬ ‫َﻣﺎ ٰﻫ َﺬا‬

EXERCISE

1. Complete the following sentences with a suitable ٌ‫ﺟَﺰاء‬

َ.
i. _______ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻳﺼﻨﻊ ﻣﻌﺮوﻓﺎ‬ iii. _______ ‫ﻣﺎ ﲣﻒ ﻣﻦ أﻋﻤﺎﻟﻚ‬
ii. _______ ‫أﱏ ﻳﻨﺰل ذو اﻟﻌﻠﻢ‬ iv. _______ ‫ﻣﱴ ﺗﺴﺎﻓﺮ‬

113
Section 4.3.2
ِ ‫اِﺳﻢ اﻟْ َﻔ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ‬ ُْ

ٌ ‫ )ﻓِ ْﻌ ٌﻞ َﻣ ْﻌُﺮْو‬i.e. it gives raf‘ to the ‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬

Definition: It has the same effect as that of an active verb (‫ف‬ ِ َ‫ﻓ‬
and nasb to the ‫ َﻣ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮٌل ﺑِِﻪ‬.

Notes:
ِ ‫ اِﺳﻢ اﻟْ َﻔ‬is prefixed with ‫ال‬, it could include any of the three tenses.
1. If the ‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ‬ ُْ
e.g. ُ ‫َزﻳْ ٌﺪ اَﻟﻀﱠﺎ ِر‬
‫ب أَﺑـُ ْﻮﻩُ ﺑَﻜًْﺮا‬ Zayd’s father beat/is beating/will beat Bakr.

ِ ‫ اِﺳﻢ اﻟْ َﻔ‬without ‫ ال‬is often used as ‫ﺎف‬ ِ

2. ‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ‬ ُْ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ ُﻣ‬to its ‫ َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل ﺑِﻪ‬, in which case it would generally
give the meaning of past tense.
ُ ‫ﺿﺎ ِر‬
e.g. ‫ب ﺑَ ْﻜ ٍﺮ‬ َ ‫َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ Zayd is the beater/hitter of Bakr.

ِ ‫ اِﺳﻢ اﻟْ َﻔ‬without ‫ ال‬when preceded by any of the following would give the meaning of
3. ‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ‬ ُْ
present or future tense:

a. ٌ‫ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬ e.g.

ٌ ‫ﺿﺎ ِر‬
‫ب أَﺑـُ ْﻮﻩُ ﺑَﻜًْﺮا‬ َ ‫َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ Zayd’s father is beating/will beat Bakr.
b. ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬ ٍ ‫ﺿﺎ ِر‬
َ ‫ت ﺑَِﺮ ُﺟ ٍﻞ‬
ُ ‫َﻣ ْﻮ‬ ‫ب أَﺑـُ ْﻮﻩُ ﺑَﻜًْﺮا‬ ُ ‫ َﻣَﺮْر‬I passed by a man whose father is
e.g.
beating/will beat Bakr.
ِ
c. ‫ﺻ ْﻮٌل‬
ُ ‫ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ َﻣ ْﻮ‬ ُ ‫َﺟﺎءَِﱐ اﻟﻀﱠﺎ ِر‬
‫ب أَﺑـُ ْﻮﻩُ ﺑَﻜًْﺮا‬
e.g. The one whose father is beating/will
beat Bakr came to me.
ِ ‫اﳊ‬
d. ‫ﺎل‬َْ ‫ذُو‬
e.g. ‫ﱏ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ َراﻛِﺒًﺎ اِﺑْـﻨُﻪُ ﻓَـَﺮ ًﺳﺎ‬ِ
ْ َ‫َﺟﺎء‬
Zayd came to me while his son was
riding a horse.

e. ‫اﻻ ْﺳﺘِ ْﻔ َﻬ ِﺎم‬

ِْ ُ‫َﳘْﺰة‬
َ
e.g.
ٌ ‫َﺿﺎ ِر‬
‫ب َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﺑَﻜًْﺮا؟‬ َ‫أ‬ Is Zayd beating Bakr?/Will Zayd beat
Bakr?

f. ‫ف اﻟﻨﱠـ ْﻔ ِﻲ‬
ُ ‫َﺣ ْﺮ‬ e.g. ‫َﻣﺎ ﻗَﺎﺋِ ٌﻢ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ Zayd is not standing/will not stand.

Sentence Analysis:

‫ﺑَ ْﻜ ًﺮا‬ ُ‫أَﺑُـ ْﻮﻩ‬ ٌ ‫ﺿﺎ ِر‬

‫ب‬ َ ‫َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬
| (‫ﺎف إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ﺎف َو ُﻣ‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬
َ ‫) ُﻣ‬ |
ِ ِ ‫اِﺳﻢ اﻟْ َﻔ‬
+ ‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ‬
ُ‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮﻟُﻪ‬ + ُ‫ﻓَﺎﻋﻠُﻪ‬ ُْ

ٌ‫= ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ اِ ِْﲰﻴﱠﺔٌ َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬ ‫َﺧﺒَـٌﺮ‬ + ٌ‫ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬

114
 EXERCISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out the effect and tense of the ‫ اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ َﻔﺎﻋِ ِﻞ‬in the
following sentences.

i. ‫أذاﻫﺐ ﺻﺪﻳﻘﻨﺎ؟‬ iii. ‫اﻟﻀﺎرب زﻳﺪ ﺑﻜﺮا‬

ii. ‫ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎرب زﻳﺪ اﻟﻘﻬﻮة‬ iv. ‫زﻳﺪ ﺷﺎرب اﻟﻘﻬﻮة‬

115
Section 4.3.3
‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟ َْﻤ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮ ِل‬

Definition: It has the same effect as that of a passive verb (‫ﳎ ُﻬ ْﻮٌل‬ ِ
َْ ‫)ﻓ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬, i.e. it gives raf‘ to the
‫ﺐ اﻟْ َﻔﺎﻋِ ِﻞ‬ ِ
ُ ‫ﻧَﺎﺋ‬.
 ِ ‫ اِﺳﻢ اﻟْ َﻔ‬also apply here.
The rules mentioned above regarding the ‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ‬ ُْ
Examples:
a. ٌ‫ُﻣْﺒﺘَ َﺪأ‬ ِ ‫زﻳﺪ ﻣﻀﺮو‬
ُ‫ب اﺑْـﻨُﻪ‬
e.g. Zayd’s son is being beaten/will be
ٌ ْ ُ ْ َ ٌ َْ
beaten.
b. ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬ ِ ٍ ‫ﻣﺮرت ﺑِﺮﺟ ٍﻞ ﻣﻀﺮو‬
ُ ‫َﻣ ْﻮ‬ ُ‫ب اﺑْـﻨُﻪ‬
e.g. I passed by a man whose son is being
ُْ ْ َ ُ َ ُ َْ َ
beaten/will be beaten.

c. ‫ﺻ ْﻮٌل‬ ِ ِ ‫ﺟﺎءِﱏ اﻟْﻤﻀﺮو‬

ُ ‫ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ َﻣ ْﻮ‬ ُ‫ب اﺑْـﻨُﻪ‬
e.g. The one whose son is being
ُ ُْ ْ َ ْ َ َ
beaten/will be beaten, came to me.
ِ ‫اﳊ‬
d. ‫ﺎل‬ ِ ِ
َْ ‫ذُو‬ ُ‫ﻀُﺮْوﺑًﺎ اﺑْـﻨُﻪ‬
ْ ‫ﱏ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ َﻣ‬
ْ َ‫َﺟﺎء‬
e.g. Zayd came to me while his son was
being beaten/will be beaten.

e. ‫اﻻ ْﺳﺘِ ْﻔ َﻬ ِﺎم‬

ِْ ُ‫َﳘْﺰة‬
َ
e.g. ‫ب َزﻳْ ٌﺪ؟‬
ٌ ‫ﻀُﺮْو‬
ْ ‫أ ََﻣ‬ Is Zayd being beaten?/Will Zayd be
beaten?

f. ‫ف اﻟﻨﱠـ ْﻔ ِﻲ‬
ُ ‫َﺣ ْﺮ‬ e.g. ‫ب َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬
ٌ ‫ﻀُﺮْو‬
ْ ‫َﻣﺎ َﻣ‬ Zayd is not being beaten /will not be
beaten.

EXERCISE

1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out the effect and tense of the ‫ اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮِل‬in the
following sentences.

i. ‫زﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﻤﻮع ﺧﱪﻩ‬ ii. ‫ﺧﺎﻟﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ اﺑﻨﻪ اﳊﻴﺎﻛﺔ‬

116
Section 4.3.4
ِ ‫ﺸﺒﱠـﻬﺔُ ﺑِﺎﺳ ِﻢ اﻟْ َﻔ‬
‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ‬ ِ ‫اِﺳﻢ اﻟْ َﻔ‬
‫ – اَﻟ ﱢ‬That Adjective Which Is Similar to ‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ‬
ْ َ َ ‫ﺼ َﻔﺔُ اﻟ ُْﻤ‬ ُْ

Definition: It is a noun, which is created from the masdar of a ‫اﻟﻼ ِزُم‬ ‫( اَﻟﺜ َﱡﻼﺛِ ﱡﻲ ﱠ‬three-letter
intransitive verb) to indicate permanent existence of the meaning in the doer.

Like its ‫ﻞ َﻻ ِزٌم‬ ِ ِ

 ٌ ‫ﻓ ْﻌ‬, it generally gives the ‫ ﻓَﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬a raf‘.
e.g. ُ‫َﺣ َﺴ ٌﻦ َو ْﺟ ُﻬﻪ‬ His face is beautiful.

 It shows the meaning of permanency in the object it relates to e.g. ‫ﺴ ٌﻦ‬

َ ‫( َﺣ‬beautiful) is a
ِ ‫اِﺳﻢ اﻟْ َﻔ‬, which indicates a temporary meaning e.g.
permanent quality, as compared to ‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ‬ ُْ
ٌ ‫ﺿﺎ ِر‬
‫ب‬ َ is a temporary quality, which exists only at the time of the action.
 All such nouns, which are derived from a ‫اﻟﻼ ِزُم‬ ‫( اَﻟﺜ َﱡﻼﺛِ ﱡﻲ ﱠ‬three-letter intransitive verb) and
ِ ‫ اِﺳﻢ اﻟْ َﻔ‬but are not on its wazn, are ٌ‫ ِﺻ َﻔﺔٌ ﻣ َﺸﺒﱠـﻬﺔ‬.
give the meaning of ‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ‬ ُْ َ ُ

‫ﺸﺒﱠـ َﻬ ِﺔ‬
َ ‫ﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ اﻟ ُْﻤ‬
‫أ َْوَزا ُن اﻟ ﱢ‬
َ ‫( ِﺻ َﻔﺔٌ ُﻣ‬based on usage) are as follows:
Some of the common wazns of ٌ‫ﺸﺒﱠـ َﻬﺔ‬
‫ﻓَﻌِ ٌﻞ‬ e.g. ‫ِح‬
ٌ ‫ﻓَﺮ‬ happy
‫ﻓَـ َﻌ ٌﻞ‬ e.g. ‫َﺣ َﺴ ٌﻦ‬ beautiful
‫ﻓَﻌِْﻴ ٌﻞ‬ e.g. ‫ﻒ‬ٌ ْ‫َﺷ ِﺮﻳ‬ noble/honorable
‫ﺎل‬
ٌ ‫ﻓَـ َﻌ‬ e.g. ‫َﺟﺒَﺎ ٌن‬ coward
‫ﺎل‬
ٌ ‫ﻓُـ َﻌ‬ e.g. ٌ‫ُﺷ َﺠﺎع‬ brave

 Colors and bodily defects appear on the following wazns:

‫أَﻓْـ َﻌ ُﻞ‬ (masculine) e.g. ‫َﲪَُﺮ‬
ْ‫أ‬ red
‫أَﺑْ َﻜ ُﻢ‬ mute

ُ‫( ﻓَـ ْﻌ َﻼء‬feminine) e.g. ُ‫ﲪََْﺮاء‬ red

ُ‫ْﻤﺎء‬ َ ‫ﺑَﻜ‬ mute

ِ
 The ٌ‫ﺸﺒﱠـ َﻬﺔ‬ َ ‫ ِﺻ َﻔﺔٌ ُﻣ‬of non-three letter verbs (‫ ) َﻏْﻴـُﺮ اﻟﺜﱡَﻼﺛِ ﱢﻲ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺠﱠﺮد‬is brought on the wazn of its
ِ ‫ اِﺳﻢ اﻟْ َﻔ‬on the condition that permanency of meaning is intended.
‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ‬ ُْ
e.g. ‫ُﻣ ْﺴﺘَ ِﻘْﻴ ٌﻢ‬ straight

117
Section 4.3.5
ِ ‫اِﺳﻢ اﻟﺘﱠـ ْﻔ‬
‫ﻀ ْﻴ ِﻞ‬ ُْ
Definition: It is that noun, which indicates that a quality is found to a greater extent in one
person/thing when compared to another.
e.g. ‫ﺠ ُﻊ ِﻣ ْﻦ َﻋ ْﻤ ٍﺮو‬ ِ
َ ‫َﺧﺎﻟ ٌﺪ أَ ْﺷ‬ Khalid is more courageous than ‘Amr.

Table 4.7
ِ ‫أَوَزا ُن اِﺳ ِﻢ اﻟﺘﱠـ ْﻔ‬
‫ﻀ ْﻴ ِﻞ‬ ْ ْ
Masculine Example Feminine Example Meaning
Singular ‫أَﻓْـ َﻌ ُﻞ‬ ‫أَ ْﻛﺒَـُﺮ‬ ‫ﻠﻰ‬
ٰ ‫ﻓُـ ْﻌ‬ ‫ُﻛ ْﱪ ٰى‬ Bigger/older
Dual ‫أَﻓْـ َﻌ َﻼ ِن‬ ‫أَ ْﻛﺒَـَﺮ ِان‬ ِ ‫ﻓُـﻌﻠَﻴ‬
‫ﺎن‬ َْ
ِ ‫ُﻛﺒـﺮﻳ‬
‫ﺎن‬ ََ ْ
Bigger/older
Plural ‫أَﻓْـ َﻌﻠُ ْﻮ َن‬ ‫أَ ْﻛﺒَـُﺮْو َن‬ ‫ﺎت‬
ٌ َ‫ﻓُـ ْﻌﻠَﻴ‬ ‫ﺎت‬
ٌ َ‫ُﻛْﺒـَﺮﻳ‬ Bigger/older
‫ﺎﻋ ُﻞ‬ِ َ‫أَﻓ‬ ‫أَ َﻛﺎﺑُِﺮ‬ ‫ﻓُـ َﻌ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ُﻛﺒَـٌﺮ‬ Bigger/older

Usage:
ِ ‫ اِﺳﻢ اﻟﺘﱠـ ْﻔ‬is used in three ways.
‫ﻀْﻴ ِﻞ‬ ُْ
1. With ‫ ِﻣ ْﻦ‬: the ‫ﻀْﻴ ِﻞ‬ ِ ‫ اِﺳﻢ اﻟﺘﱠـ ْﻔ‬will always be a singular masculine (‫)ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛﺮ ﻣ ْﻔﺮٌد‬.
ُْ ٌَُ ُ
ِ
e.g. ‫َزﻳْ ٌﺪ أَ ْﻋﻠَ ُﻢ ﻣ ْﻦ ﺑَ ْﻜ ٍﺮ‬ Zayd is more knowledgeable than Bakr.
‫ﺐ‬ ِ ِ
َ َ‫َﻋﺎﺋ َﺸﺔُ أَ ْﻛﺒَـُﺮ ﻣ ْﻦ َزﻳْـﻨ‬ ‘Aishah is older than Zaynab.
ِ ‫ اِﺳﻢ اﻟﺘﱠـ ْﻔ‬must correspond with the word before it in gender and number.
2. With ‫ال‬: the ‫ﻀْﻴ ِﻞ‬ ُْ
ِ ‫ﺎن َﻏﺎﺋِﺒ‬
‫ﺎن‬ ِ ‫َزﻳ َﺪ ِان ْاﻷَ ْﻋﻠَﻤ‬
e.g. َ َ ْ The two more knowledgeable Zayds are absent.
ِ ِ
ٌ‫َﻋﺎﺋ َﺸﺔُ اﻟْ ُﻜْﺒـ ٰﺮى َﺣﺎﺿَﺮة‬ The older ‘Aishah is present.
ِ ِ ِ
َ ِ‫إ‬: the ‫ ا ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟﺘﱠـ ْﻔﻀْﻴ ِﻞ‬may be ‫ َواﺣ ٌﺪ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ‬or it may correspond with the word before it.
3. With ٌ‫ﺿﺎﻓَﺔ‬
e.g. ‫َزﻳْ ُﺪ ْو َن أَ ْﻋﻠَ ُﻢ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮِم‬ ‫َزﻳْ ُﺪ ْو َن أَ ْﻋﻠَ ُﻤ ْﻮا اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮِم‬
The Zayds are the most knowledgeable of people.

‫َزﻳْ َﺪ ِان أَ ْﻋﻠَ ُﻢ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮِم‬ ‫َزﻳْ َﺪ ِان أَ ْﻋﻠَ َﻤﺎ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﻮِم‬
The two Zayds are the most knowledgeable of people.
ِ ‫َﻋﺎﺋِ َﺸﺔُ أَ ْﻛﺒَـُﺮ اﻟﻨ‬
‫ﱠﺎس‬ ِ ‫َﻋﺎﺋِ َﺸﺔُ ُﻛْﺒـ ٰﺮى اﻟﻨ‬
‫ﱠﺎس‬
‘Aishah is the oldest of people.

118
Notes:
ِ ‫ اِﺳﻢ اﻟﺘﱠـ ْﻔ‬of words, which indicate color, physical defects and of ‫ َﻏﻴـﺮ اﻟﺜﱡَﻼﺛِﻲ اﻟْﻤﺠﱠﺮِد‬verbs is
1. ‫ﻀْﻴ ِﻞ‬ ُْ َُ ‫ﱢ‬ ُْ
made by placing the words ‫َﺷ ﱡﺪ‬ َ ‫أ‬, ‫أَ ْﻛﺜَـُﺮ‬, etc. before the masdar of that word. The masdar will
be the tameez, and therefore, will be mansoob.

e.g. ‫َﺷ ﱡﺪ ﲪَُْﺮةً ِﻣ ْﻦ َزﻳْ ٍﺪ‬َ ‫ُﻫ َﻮ أ‬ He is redder than Zayd.

‫َﺷ ﱡﺪ َﻋ ْﺮ ًﺟﺎ ِﻣ ْﻦ َزﻳْ ٍﺪ‬َ ‫ُﻫ َﻮ أ‬ He is lamer than Zayd.
‫ُﻫ َﻮ أَ ْﻛﺜَـُﺮ اِ ْﺟﺘِ َﻬ ًﺎدا ِﻣ ْﻦ َزﻳْ ٍﺪ‬ He is more hard-working than Zayd.
ِ ِ
َ and ‫ َﺷﱞﺮ‬are also used for ‫ا ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟﺘﱠـ ْﻔﻀْﻴ ِﻞ‬.
2. The words ‫ﺧْﻴـٌﺮ‬
ِ ‫اﻟﻈﱠ‬
ِ ‫ﺎﱂُ َﺷﱡﺮ اﻟﻨ‬
‫ﱠﺎس‬
e.g. َ The oppressor is the worst of people.
ِ ‫ اِﺳﻢ اﻟﺘﱠـ ْﻔ‬gives its hidden dameer a raf‘.
3. ‫ﻀْﻴ ِﻞ‬ ُْ
e.g. ‫ﻞ ِﻣ ْﻦ ﺑَ ْﻜ ٍﺮ‬ُ‫ﻀ‬َ ْ‫َزﻳْ ٌﺪ أَﻓ‬ Zayd is more virtuous than Bakr.
The dameer ‫ ُﻫ َﻮ‬in ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ُ‫ﻀ‬َ ْ‫ أَﻓ‬is its ‫ﻓَﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬.

EXERCISE
ِ ‫ اِﺳﻢ اﻟﺘﱠـ ْﻔ‬in the following sentences.
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and explain the usage of ‫ﻀْﻴ ِﻞ‬ ُْ
i. ‫ﺑﻌﺾ اﳊﻴﻮاﻧﺎت أﻗﻮى ﻣﻦ اﻹﻧﺴﺎن‬ v. ‫اﻟﻨﺴﺎء اﻟﻔﻀﻠﻴﺎت‬
ii. ‫اﻷﻧﺒﻴﺎء أﻓﻀﻞ اﻟﻨﺎس‬ vi. ‫اﻷﻧﺒﻴﺎء أﻓﺎﺿﻞ اﻟﻨﺎس‬
iii. ‫ﻣﺮﱘ ﻓﻀﻠﻰ اﻟﻨﺴﺎء‬ vii. ‫اﻟﺮﺟﻼن اﻷﻓﻀﻼن‬
iv. ‫أوﻟﺌﻚ ﻫﻢ ﺧﲑ اﻟﱪﻳﺔ‬ viii. ‫ﺛﻮﺑﻚ أﺷﺪ ﺳﻮادا ﻣﻦ ﺛﻮﰊ‬

119
Section 4.3.6
‫ﺼ َﺪ ُر‬
ْ ‫اَﻟ َْﻤ‬
Definition: It is that noun which refers to the action indicated by the corresponding verb
without any reference to time.

Effect: It has the same effect as that of its verb i.e. it gives raf‘ to the ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ٌ ‫ ﻓَﺎﻋ‬and nasb to the ‫َﻣ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮٌل‬
‫ﺑِِﻪ‬.
e.g. ‫ب اﻟْﻴَـ ْﻮَم َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﺑَﻜًْﺮا‬
َ ‫ﺿ ْﺮ‬
َ ‫ﺖ‬
ُ ْ‫َرأَﻳ‬ Today, I saw Zayd’s beating of Bakr.

Usage:
Masdar is generally used in one of the following ways:
 as a ‫ﺎف‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ ِ
َ ‫ ُﻣ‬to its ‫ﻓَﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬.
e.g. ‫ب َزﻳْ ٍﺪ ﺑَﻜًْﺮا‬
َ ‫ﺿ ْﺮ‬ ُ ‫َﻛ ِﺮْﻫ‬
َ ‫ﺖ‬ i.e. (‫ْﺮا‬ َ ‫ﻀ ِﺮ‬
ً‫ب َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﺑَﻜ‬ ْ َ‫)أَ ْن ﻳ‬ I disliked Zayd’s beating of
Bakr.
ِ
 as a ‫ﺎف‬
ٌ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫ ُﻣ‬to its ‫ َﻣ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮٌل ﺑِﻪ‬.
e.g. ‫ب ﺑَ ْﻜ ٍﺮ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬
َ ‫ﺿ ْﺮ‬ ُ ‫َﻛ ِﺮْﻫ‬
َ ‫ﺖ‬ i.e. (‫ْﺮا َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ َ ‫ﻀ ِﺮ‬
ً‫ب ﺑَﻜ‬ ْ َ‫)أَ ْن ﻳ‬ I disliked Zayd’s beating of
Bakr.
EXERCISE
1. Fill in the i‘raab and explain the usage of the masdar in the following sentences.

i. ‫ﺳﺮﱏ ﻗﺮاءة رﺷﻴﺪ اﻟﻘﺮاٰن‬ iii. ‫إﻛﺮام اﻟﻌﺮب اﻟﻀﻴﻒ ﻣﻌﺮوف‬

ii. ‫ﺣﺒﻚ اﻟﺸﻲء ﻳﻌﻤﻲ و ﻳﺼﻢ‬ iv. ‫و ﷲ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻨﺎس ﺣﺞ اﻟﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻦ اﺳﺘﻄﺎع إﻟﻴﻪ ﺳﺒﻴﻼ‬

Section 4.3.7
‫ﺎف‬
ُ ‫ﻀ‬َ ‫اَﻟ ُْﻤ‬
In the case of mudaaf, it is assumed that one of the following prepositions (‫ﺟﱟﺮ‬
َ ‫ف‬
ُ ‫ ) ُﺣُﺮْو‬is hidden
between the mudaaf and mudaaf ilayhi.
‫ِﻣ ْﻦ‬ when the mudaaf is a part/type (‫ﺲ‬ ِ
 ٌ ‫ )ﺟْﻨ‬of the mudaaf ilayhi.
e.g. ‫َﺧ َﺎﰎُ ﻓِﻀ ٍﱠﺔ‬ i.e. ‫َﺧ َﺎﰎٌ ِﻣ ْﻦ ﻓِﻀ ٍﱠﺔ‬ silver ring

 ‫ِ ْﰲ‬ when the mudaaf ilayhi is a ‫ف‬

ٌ ‫ﻇَْﺮ‬.
e.g. ‫ﺻ َﻼةُ اﻟﻠﱠْﻴ ِﻞ‬
َ i.e. ‫ﺻ َﻼةٌ ِﰲ اﻟﻠﱠْﻴ ِﻞ‬
َ night prayer

 ‫ِل‬ when it is neither of the above two.

e.g. ‫اِﺑْ ُﻦ َزﻳْ ٍﺪ‬ i.e. ‫اِﺑْ ٌﻦ ﻟَِﺰﻳْ ٍﺪ‬ Zayd’s son

120
Section 4.3.8
‫اَِْﻻ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟﺘﱠﺎمﱡ‬

Definition: It is that noun, which would give the noun (‫ )َﲤِْﻴـٌﺰ‬after it a nasb.
 A noun will be considered as ‫ ﺗَﺎمﱞ‬when it has one of the following:
a. tanween.
‫اﺣ ٍﺔ َﺳ َﺤﺎﺑًﺎ‬ ِ (‫اﺣ ٍﺔ‬
e.g. َ ‫َﻣﺎ ِﰲ اﻟ ﱠﺴ َﻤﺎء ﻗَ ْﺪ ُر َر‬ َ ‫) َر‬
There is not even palm’s measure of clouds in the sky.
b. hidden tanween.
‫َﺣ َﺪ َﻋ َﺸَﺮ َر ُﺟ ًﻼ‬ ِ
e.g. َ ‫َﻣﻌ ْﻲ أ‬ (‫ﺸَﺮ‬
َ ‫َﺣ َﺪ َﻋ‬
َ ‫ أ‬was originally ‫َﺣ ٌﺪ َو َﻋ َﺸٌﺮ‬
َ ‫)أ‬
There are eleven men with me.

c. ‫ ن‬of a dual noun.

e.g. ‫ِﻋْﻨ ِﺪ ْي ﻓَِﻘْﻴـَﺰ ِان ﺑـُﺮا‬ ِ ‫)ﻓَ ِﻘﻴـﺰ‬
(‫ان‬َْ
I have two qafeezes1 of wheat.

‫ ن‬which resembles the ‫ ن‬of a sound masculine plural (ٌ‫ﺎﱂ‬ ِ ‫)ﲨﻊ ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛ ٍﺮ ﺳ‬.
d. َ ُ ُ َْ
e.g. ‫ِﻋْﻨ ِﺪ ْي ِﻋ ْﺸُﺮْو َن ِد ْرَﳘًﺎ‬ ْ ‫) ِﻋ‬
(‫ﺸ ُﺮْو َن‬
I have twenty dirhams.

The ‫ اَِْﻻ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟﺘﱠﺎمﱡ‬in the above examples cannot be mudaaf while having a tanween or having a noon
of dual/plural, thus the noun after it gets a nasb because of it being ‫َﲤِْﻴـٌﺰ‬.

1
A qafeez is a classical Islamic measure of weight.

121
Section 4.3.9
‫ْﻜﻨَﺎﻳَِﺔ‬
ِ ‫أَﺳﻤﺎء اﻟ‬
ُ َْ

Definition: It is that noun, which indicates an unspecified quantity.

 It is clarified by the noun following it.
 These are ‫ َﻛ ْﻢ‬and ‫ َﻛ َﺬا‬.

‫ َﻛ ْﻢ‬: can be used in two ways: as an interrogative (‫ )اِ ْﺳﺘِ ْﻔ َﻬ ٌﺎم‬or as an informative exclamation
َِ ‫) َﺧ‬.
(ٌ‫ﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬

ِ ‫( – َﻛﻢ اَِْﻻﺳﺘِ ْﻔﻬ‬how many)

1. ُ‫ﺎﻣﻴﱠﺔ‬ َ ْ ْ
 It gives the noun (‫ )َﲤِْﻴـٌﺰ‬after it a nasb.
 The ‫ َﲤِْﻴـٌﺰ‬is brought singular.
e.g. ‫َﻛ ْﻢ ﻛِﺘَﺎﺑًﺎ ِﻋْﻨ َﺪ َك‬ How many books do you have?
 At times, the preposition ‫ ِﻣ ْﻦ‬appears before the ‫َﲤِْﻴـٌﺰ‬.
e.g. ‫ﺎب ﻋِْﻨ َﺪ َك‬ ٍ َ‫َﻛﻢ ِﻣﻦ ﻛِﺘ‬
ْ ْ How many books do you have?

2. ُ‫ﺨﺒَ ِﺮﻳﱠﺔ‬
َ ْ‫( – َﻛ ْﻢ اَﻟ‬so many)
 It gives the noun (‫ )َﲤِْﻴـٌﺰ‬after it a jarr (because of it being a mudaaf ilayhi).
 The ‫ َﲤِْﻴـٌﺰ‬may be singular or plural.
‫ﺖ‬ ٍ
e.g. َ ‫َﻛ ْﻢ َﻣﺎل أَﻧْـ َﻔ ْﻘ‬ So much of wealth you have spent!
 At times the preposition ‫ ِﻣ ْﻦ‬appears before the ‫َﲤِْﻴـٌﺰ‬.
ِ ‫ﻚ ِﰲ اﻟ ﱠﺴ ٰﻤ ٰﻮ‬
‫ت‬ ٍ َ‫ َﻛﻢ ِﻣﻦ ﻣﻠ‬There are so many angels in the skies/heavens.
e.g. َْ ْ

‫( – َﻛ َﺬا‬so much, such and such)

 It gives the noun (‫ )َﲤِْﻴـٌﺰ‬after it a nasb.
 The ‫ َﲤِْﻴـٌﺰ‬is brought singular.
e.g. ‫ي َﻛ َﺬا ِد ْرَﳘًﺎ‬ ِِ
ْ ‫ﻋْﻨﺪ‬ I have this much dirhams.

EXERCISE

1. What is the difference between the following sentences.

i. ‫ﻛﻢ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺎ ﻗﺮأت‬ ٍ ‫ﻛﻢ‬
ii. ‫ﻛﺘﺎب ﻗﺮأت‬

122
Section 4.3.10
‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟ ُْﻤﺒَﺎﻟَﻐَ ِﺔ‬

Definition: It is that noun, which shows extremity/intensity in meaning.

Some of the wazns of ٌ‫ ُﻣﺒَﺎﻟَﻐَﺔ‬are as follows:

‫ﻓَﻌِْﻴ ٌﻞ‬ ‫َﻋﻠِْﻴ ٌﻢ‬ most learned
‫ﺎﻋ ْﻮٌل‬
ُ َ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﻓَ ُﺎرْو ٌق‬ great distinguisher
‫ﺎل‬ٌ ‫ﻓَـ ﱠﻌ‬ ‫ﺎك‬ٌ ‫ﺿ ﱠﺤ‬ َ excessive jester
‫ﻓَـﻌﱡ ْﻮٌل‬ ‫ﻗَـﻴﱡـ ْﻮٌم‬ careful maintainer/sustainer
‫ِﻣ ْﻔﻌِْﻴ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ِﻣْﻨ ِﻄْﻴ ٌﻖ‬ very eloquent

Notes:

1. The round ‫ ة‬at the end of some wazns is for ٌ‫ ُﻣﺒَﺎﻟَﻐَﺔ‬and not for gender.
e.g. ٌ‫ﻓَـ ﱠﻌﺎﻟَﺔ‬ ٌ‫َﻋ ﱠﻼ َﻣﺔ‬ well-learned

2. The wazn ‫ﺎل‬

ٌ ‫ ﻓَـﻌﱠ‬is also used to denote a profession.
e.g. ‫ﺎخ‬
ٌ ‫ﻃَﺒﱠ‬ cook ‫َﱠﺎر‬
ٌ‫ﳒ‬ carpenter

123
Section 4.4
‫ف اﻟْﻐَْﻴـ ُﺮ اﻟْ َﻌ ِﺎﻣﻠَ ِﺔ‬
ُ ‫ – اَﻟْ ُﺤ ُﺮْو‬Non-Governing Particles

1. ‫ف اﻟﺘﱠـ ْﻨﺒِْﻴ ِﻪ‬

ُ ‫ – ُﺣ ُﺮْو‬Particles of Notification:
These are used to draw the attention of the listener. These are as follows:
‫أََﻻ‬ ‫أ ََﻣﺎ‬ ‫َﻫﺎ‬ meaning Lo! / Behold! / Take heed!
e.g. ‫أ ََﻣﺎ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﻧَﺎﺋِ ٌﻢ‬ Behold! Zayd is sleeping.
‫ٰﻫ َﺬا‬ This
ِ ِ
‫ﺐ‬ٌ ْ‫ﺼَﺮ اﷲ ﻗَ ِﺮﻳ‬ ْ َ‫أََﻻ ا ﱠن ﻧ‬ Behold! Indeed, Allah’s help is near.
‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ِ ‫ﻫﺎ أَﻧَﺎ ﺣ‬
َ َ Lo! I am present.

ِ ‫اﻹﻳْ َﺠ‬
2. ‫ﺎب‬ ِْ ‫ف‬
ُ ‫ – ُﺣ ُﺮْو‬Particles of Affirmation:
These are used for affirmation of a statement made earlier. These are as follows:

‫ﻧـَ َﻌ ْﻢ‬ ‫ﻠﻰ‬

ٰ َ‫ﺑ‬ ‫َﺟ ْﻞ‬
َ‫أ‬ ‫إِ ْي‬ ‫َﺟ ِْﲑ‬ ‫إِ ﱠن‬
‫( – ﻧَـ َﻌ ْﻢ‬yes)
 It is used to verify a statement, be it positive or negative. For example,
˗ If someone says ‫َﺟﺎءَ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬
َ ‫( أ‬Did Zayd come?), the reply will be ‫( ﻧـَ َﻌ ْﻢ‬yes)
meaning ‫ﺟﺎءَ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬
َ (he came).
˗ If someone says ‫ﺟﺎءَ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬
َ ‫( أ ََﻣﺎ‬Has Zayd not come?), the reply will be ‫( ﻧـَ َﻌ ْﻢ‬yes)
meaning ‫ﺟﺎءَ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬
َ ‫( َﻣﺎ‬He did not come.).
‫ﻠﻰ‬
ٰ َ‫( – ﺑ‬yes, why not)
 It is used to convert a negative statement into a positive one.
e.g. If someone says ‫( َﱂْ ﻳـَ ُﻘ ْﻢ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬Zayd did not stand up.), the reply will be ‫ﻠﻰ‬
ٰ َ‫ﺑ‬
(yes, why not) meaning ‫ﺎم َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ َ َ‫( ﻗَ ْﺪ ﻗ‬Zayd has stood up.).
‫( – إِ ْي‬yes)
 It is the same as ‫ﻧـَ َﻌ ْﻢ‬. However it is used with an oath (‫ﺴ ٌﻢ‬
َ َ‫ )ﻗ‬after a question.
ِ
e.g. َ َ‫( أَﻗ‬Did Zayd stand up?), the reply will be ‫إِ ْي َو اﷲ‬
If someone says ‫ﺎم َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬
(yes, by Allah!) meaning ‫ﺎم َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬
َ َ‫( ﻗ‬Zayd stood up.).

124
 َ ‫ أ‬/ ‫ َﺟ ْﻴ ِﺮ‬/ ‫( – إِ ﱠن‬yes)
‫َﺟ ْﻞ‬
 It is the same as ‫ﻧـَ َﻌ ْﻢ‬.
ِ
e.g. If someone says ‫ﺟﺎءَ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬َ (Zayd came.), the reply will be ‫ إ ﱠن‬or ‫ َﺟ ِْﲑ‬or ‫َﺟ ْﻞ‬
َ‫أ‬
(yes) meaning ‫ﺟﺎءَ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬
َ (Zayd came.).
Note: ‫ إِ ﱠن‬is very rarely used for this purpose.

3. ‫ – َﺣ ْﺮﻓَﺎ اﻟﺘﱠـ ْﻔ ِﺴ ْﻴ ِﺮ‬Particles of Clarification:

These are used to clarify a word in a sentence. These are as follows:
‫أَ ْي‬ ‫أَ ْن‬ (that is)
e.g. ‫اﺳﺌَ ِﻞ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﺮﻳَﺔَ أَ ْي أ َْﻫ َﻞ اﻟْ َﻘ ْﺮﻳَِﺔ‬
ْ ‫َو‬ And ask the town, that is, the people of the town.
‫َو ﻧَ َﺎدﻳْـﻨَﺎﻩُ أَ ْن ﻳٰﺈِﺑْـ ٰﺮِﻫْﻴ ُﻢ‬ And We called him, that is, O Ibraheem!

4. ُ‫ﺼ َﺪ ِرﻳﱠﺔ‬
ْ ‫ف اﻟ َْﻤ‬
ُ ‫اَﻟْ ُﺤ ُﺮْو‬: These are used to give a masdary meaning. These are as follows:
‫َﻣﺎ‬ ‫أَ ْن‬ ‫أَ ﱠن‬
 ‫ َﻣﺎ‬and ‫ أَ ْن‬come before a ٌ‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔ‬.
 ‫ أَ ﱠن‬comes before a ٌ‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ اِ ِْﲰﻴﱠﺔ‬.
e.g. ‫ﺖ‬ ِ ‫)ﺑِﺮﺣﺒِﻬﺎ( إِذَا ﺿﺎﻗَﺖ ﻋﻠَﻴ ِﻬﻢ ْاﻷَر‬
ْ َ‫ض ﲟَﺎ َر ُﺣﺒ‬ُ ْ ُ َْ ْ َ َ ُْ
When the earth became straitened for them despite its vastness.

‫ﺼ ْﺪ َق‬ ُ َ‫ﱐ أَ ْن ﺗ‬ ِ
ْ ‫ﻳَ ُﺴﱡﺮ‬ َ ُ‫) ِﺻ ْﺪﻗ‬
(‫ﻚ‬ Your truthfulness pleases me.

‫ﺑـَﻠَﻐَِ ْﲏ أَ ﱠن َزﻳْ ًﺪا ﻧَﺎﺋِ ٌﻢ‬ (ُ‫)ﻧـَ ْﻮُﻣﻪ‬ (News of) his sleeping reached me.

Note: ‫ أَ ْن‬and ‫ أَ ﱠن‬are governing particles.

ِ ‫ف اﻟﺘﱠﺤ‬
ِ ‫ﻀ ْﻴ‬
5. ‫ﺾ‬ ْ ُ ‫ – ُﺣ ُﺮْو‬Particles of Exhortation:
These are used to encourage someone to do something when they appear before ‫ﻞ‬ ِ
ُ ‫اَﻟْﻔ ْﻌ‬
ُ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬
َ ‫اﻟْ ُﻤ‬. These are as follows:
‫أﱠَﻻ‬ ‫َﻫ ﱠﻼ‬ ‫ﻟَ ْﻮَﻻ‬ ‫ﻟَ ْﻮَﻣﺎ‬
e.g. َ ُ‫َﻫ ﱠﻼ ﺗ‬
‫ﺼﻠﱢ ْﻲ؟‬ Do you not pray salah?

 These particles are also used to create regret and sorrow in the listener when they
ِ ‫اَﻟْ ِﻔﻌﻞ اﻟْﻤ‬. Therefore, they are also called ‫ف اﻟﺘﱠـْﻨ ِﺪ ِْﱘ‬
appear before ‫ﺎﺿﻰ‬ ُ ‫ ُﺣُﺮْو‬.
َ ُْ
e.g. ‫ﺼَﺮ؟‬ َ ‫ﺻﻠﱠْﻴ‬
ْ ‫ﺖ اﻟْ َﻌ‬ َ ‫َﻫ ﱠﻼ‬ Have you not prayed ‘Asr salah?

125
6. ‫ﱠﻮﻗﱡ ِﻊ‬
َ ‫ف اﻟﺘـ‬
ُ ‫ – َﺣ ْﺮ‬Particle of Anticipation:
It is ‫ﻗَ ْﺪ‬, which is used for one of the following:
ِ ِ
‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ْ‫ ﺗَـ ْﻘ ِﺮﻳ‬: It gives ‫ اَﻟْﻔ ْﻌ ُﻞ اﻟْ َﻤﺎﺿﻰ‬the meaning of near past.
e.g. ‫ﺟﺎءَ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ َ ‫ﻗَ ْﺪ‬ Zayd has arrived (recently).

‫ ﺗَـ ْﻘﻠِْﻴ ٌﻞ‬: It gives ُ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬ ِ

َ ‫ اَﻟْﻔ ْﻌ ُﻞ اﻟْ ُﻤ‬the meaning of seldomness.
ِ
e.g. ‫ﻞ‬ ُ ‫إ ﱠن ا ْﳉََﻮ َاد ﻗَ ْﺪ ﻳـَْﺒ َﺨ‬ Indeed, sometimes, a generous person is miserly.

‫ َْﲢ ِﻘْﻴ ٌﻖ‬: It gives ‫ﺎﺿﻰ‬ ِ ‫ اَﻟْ ِﻔﻌﻞ اﻟْﻤ‬or ‫ اَﻟْ ِﻔﻌﻞ اﻟْﻤﻀﺎ ِرع‬the meaning of certainty.
َ ُْ ُ َ ُ ُْ
e.g. ‫ﺟﺎءَ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ َ ‫ﻗَ ْﺪ‬ Certainly Zayd came.

ُ‫ﻗَ ْﺪ ﻳـَ ْﻌﻠَ ُﻢ اﷲ‬ Certainly Allah knows.

7. ‫اﻻ ْﺳﺘِ ْﻔ َﻬ ِﺎم‬

ِْ ‫ – ﺣﺮﻓَﺎ‬Particles of Interrogation:
َْ
These are َ‫ أ‬and ‫ﻫ ْﻞ‬. َ
e.g. ‫أ ََزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﻗَﺎﺋِ ٌﻢ‬ Is Zayd standing?
‫َﻫ ْﻞ ﻗَ َﺎم َزﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ Did Zayd stand up?

8. ‫ع‬
ِ ‫ف اﻟ ﱠﺮ ْد‬
ُ ‫ – َﺣ ْﺮ‬Particle of Rebuke:
This is ‫ َﻛ ﱠﻼ‬, which means “Never!”
 It is used to rebuke or reprimand.
‫ َﻛ ﱠﻼ‬is said to some one who says ‫ب َزﻳْ ًﺪا‬ ِ
e.g. ْ ‫ﺿ ِﺮ‬
ْ ‫( ا‬Hit Zayd.).
 It gives the meaning of certainty.
e.g. َ ‫َﻛ ﱠﻼ َﺳ ْﻮ‬
‫ف ﺗَـ ْﻌﻠَ ُﻤ ْﻮ َن‬ Indeed, soon you will know.

9. ‫اَﻟﺘﱠـ ْﻨ ِﻮﻳْ ُﻦ‬: It is used for one of the following:

‫ﲤََ ﱡﻜ ٌﻦ‬ : that tanween, which shows a noun to be mu‘rab.
e.g. ‫زﻳ ٌﺪ‬
‫ ﺗَـْﻨ ِﻜْﻴـٌﺮ‬: that tanween, which shows a noun to be nakirah.
e.g. ‫ﻞ‬ ٌ ‫َر ُﺟ‬
‫ﺾ‬ٌ ْ‫ ﺗَـ ْﻌ ِﻮﻳ‬: that tanween, which subsitutes a mudaaf ilayhi.
e.g. ‫ ﻳـَ ْﻮَﻣﺌِ ٍﺬ‬i.e. ‫ ﻳـَ ْﻮَم إِ َذا َﻛﺎ َن َﻛ َﺬا‬the day when so and so happened

126
10. ‫ﻧُـ ْﻮ ُن اﻟﺘﱠﺄْﻛِ ْﻴ ِﺪ‬: It is used for emphasis in ٌ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬ ِ ِ
َ ‫ ُﻣ‬and ‫أَْﻣٌﺮ‬. It is of two forms: ٌ‫ ﺛَﻘْﻴـﻠَﺔ‬and ٌ‫ َﺧﻔْﻴـ َﻔﺔ‬. Both
have the same meaning.

(‫اَﻟﺜ ِﱠﻘ ْﻴـﻠَﺔُ ) ّن‬ (‫اَﻟْ َﺨ ِﻔ ْﻴـ َﻔﺔُ ) ْن‬

‫ﻀ ِﺮﺑَ ﱠﻦ‬
ْ َ‫ﻟَﻴ‬ ‫ﻀ ِﺮﺑَ ْﻦ‬
ْ َ‫ﻟَﻴ‬ Indeed, he should hit.
‫ﺼَﺮ ﱠن‬
ُ ْ‫أُﻧ‬ ‫ﺼَﺮ ْن‬
ُ ْ‫أُﻧ‬ You must help.

11. ‫ف َل‬
ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬: It is used for the following:
ِِ
ٌ‫ اﺑْﺘ َﺪاء‬: It is used for emphasis.
e.g. ً‫ﺷ ﱡﺪ َرْﻫﺒَﺔ‬
َ َ‫َﻷَﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ أ‬ Indeed, you are more feared

‫اب‬
ٌ ‫ َﺟ َﻮ‬: It comes in the answer to ‫ ﻟَ ْﻮ – ﻟَ ْﻮَﻻ‬and ‫ﻗَ َﺴ ٌﻢ‬.
e.g. ‫ض‬ ِ ٍ ‫ﻀ ُﻬ ْﻢ ﺑِﺒَـ ْﻌ‬ ِ
ُ ‫ﺾ ﻟََﻔ َﺴ َﺪت ْاﻷَْر‬ َ ‫ﱠﺎس ﺑـَ ْﻌ‬
َ ‫َو ﻟَ ْﻮَﻻ َدﻓْ ُﻊ اﷲ اﻟﻨ‬
If Allah did not repel some people by means of others, the earth would
be corrupted.

‫ﺻ ْﻮَﻣ ﱠﻦ َﻏ ًﺪا‬ ِ
ُ َ‫َو اﷲ َﻷ‬ By Allah! I will fast tommorrow.

ٌ‫َزاﺋِ َﺪة‬ : extra.

e.g. ‫إِﻧـﱠ ُﻬ ْﻢ ﻟَﻴَﺄْ ُﻛﻠُ ْﻮ َن اﻟﻄﱠ َﻌ َﺎم‬ Indeed, they eat food.

12. ُ‫ف اﻟ ﱠﺰاﺋِ َﺪة‬

ُ ‫ – اَﻟْ ُﺤ ُﺮْو‬Extra Particles: These are not translated. However, they add beauty and
emphasis to the meaning. These are:
‫َﻣﺎ أَ ْن إِ ْن‬ ‫َﻻ‬ ‫َل‬ ‫ِﻣ ْﻦ‬ ‫َك‬ ِ (‫ ِﻣﻦ‬،٬‫ َك‬،٬‫ب‬
‫ب‬ ْ
ِ are governing particles – ٌ‫) َﻋﺎ ِﻣﻠَﺔ‬
Usage:
‫ إِ ْن‬: It appears after ُ‫ َﻣﺎ اَﻟﻨﱠﺎﻓِﻴَﺔ‬.
e.g. ‫َﻣﺎ إِ ْن َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﻗَﺎﺋِ ٌﻢ‬ Zayd is not standing.

‫ أَ ْن‬: It appears after ‫ﻟَ ﱠﻤﺎ‬.

e.g. ‫ﺟﺎءَ اﻟْﺒَ ِﺸْﻴـ ُﺮ‬
َ ‫ﻓَـﻠَ ﱠﻤﺎ أَ ْن‬ When the bearer of good news came.

‫ َﻣﺎ‬: appears after the following:

‫إِ َذا‬ ِ ْ َ‫ﺖ ﻓ‬ ِ
e.g. ‫ﱪ‬ ْ ‫ﺎﺻ‬ َ ‫إِ َذا َﻣﺎ اﺑْـﺘُﻠْﻴ‬ When you are afflicted, be patient.

‫َﻣ ٰﱴ‬ e.g. ‫َﻣ ٰﱴ َﻣﺎ ﺗُ َﺴﺎﻓِْﺮ اُ َﺳﺎﻓِْﺮ‬ When you travel, I will travel.

‫ى‬
‫أَ ﱞ‬ e.g. ُ‫أَﱡﳝَﺎ اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ َﺟﺎءَ َك ﻓَﺄَ ْﻛ ِﺮْﻣﻪ‬ Whoever comes to you, treat him
hospitably.

127
 ‫أَﻳْ َﻦ‬ ِ‫أَﻳـﻨَﻤﺎ ﺗُـﻮﻟﱡﻮا ﻓَـﺜَ ﱠﻢ وﺟﻪ اﷲ‬
e.g. َُْ َْ َْ Whichever way you turn, there is the face of
Allah.

‫إِ ْن‬ e.g. ‫ﻓَِﺈ ﱠﻣﺎ ﻳَﺄْﺗِﻴَـﻨﱠ ُﻜ ْﻢ ِﻣ ﱢﲎ ُﻫ ًﺪى‬ Then, should some guidance come to you
from Me.
ِِ ٍِ
‫ف َﺟﱟﺮ‬
ُ ‫َﺣ ْﺮ‬ e.g. َ ‫ ﻓَﺒِ َﻤﺎ َر ْﲪَﺔ ﻣ َﻦ اﷲ ﻟْﻨ‬So, it is through mercy from Allah that you
‫ﺖ َﳍُ ْﻢ‬
are gentle to them.

‫َﻻ‬ e.g. ‫َﻻ أُﻗْ ِﺴ ُﻢ ِ ٰ َﺬا اﻟْﺒَـﻠَ ِﺪ‬ I swear by this city.

‫َل‬ e.g. ‫إِﻧـ ُﱠﻬ ْﻢ ﻟَﻴَﺄْ ُﻛﻠُ ْﻮ َن اﻟﻄﱠ َﻌ َﺎم‬ Indeed, they eat food.

‫ِﻣ ْﻦ‬ ِ‫ﻫﻞ ِﻣﻦ ﺧﺎﻟِ ٍﻖ َﻏﻴـﺮ اﷲ‬

e.g. ُْ َ ْ ْ َ Is there a creator besides Allah?

‫َك‬ ِ ِ ِ ‫ﻟَﻴ‬
e.g. ٌ‫ﺲ َﻛﻤﺜْﻠﻪ َﺷ ْﻲء‬ َ ْ There is nothing like Him.

ِ
‫ب‬ e.g. ‫ب‬ ٍ ‫ﻟَْﻴﺲ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﺑِ َﻜ ِﺎذ‬ Zayd is not a liar.
َ
ِ ‫ﺸﺮ‬
13. ‫ط‬ ْ ‫ – َﺣ ْﺮﻓَﺎ اﻟ ﱠ‬Conditional Particles:
‫( أَ ﱠﻣﺎ‬however, as far as…is concerned)
 It is used to explain/clarify something, which was mentioned briefly.
 ‫ ف‬has to be brought in its answer (‫اب‬ ٌ ‫) َﺟ َﻮ‬.
e.g. ‫ﺷ ُﻘ ْﻮا ﻓَِﻔﻲ اﻟﻨﱠﺎ ِر‬ ِ ِ
َ ‫ﻓَ ِﻤْﻨـ ُﻬ ْﻢ َﺷﻘ ﱞﻰ ﱠو َﺳﻌِْﻴ ٌﺪ ﻓَﺄَ ﱠﻣﺎ اﻟﱠﺬﻳْ َﻦ‬
So, some of them will be wretched and (some) blessed. As for the
wretched, they will be in the Fire.
‫( ﻟ َْﻮ‬if)
 It is used to negate the second sentence (‫اب‬
ٌ ‫ ) َﺟ َﻮ‬on account of the first sentence
(‫ط‬
ٌ ‫ ) َﺷ ْﺮ‬not being fulfilled.
e.g. ‫ﻟَ ْﻮ َﻛﺎ َن ﻓِْﻴ ِﻬ َﻤﺎ اٰ ِﳍَﺔٌ إِﱠﻻ اﷲُ ﻟََﻔ َﺴ َﺪﺗَﺎ‬
If there had been gods besides Allah in them (the heavens and the earth),
they would have been corrupted.
(There will not be corruption because there is not more than one god.)

Note: If a ‫ َو‬is added to ‫ ﻟَ ْﻮ‬i.e. ‫ َوﻟَ ْﻮ‬it will give the meaning of “even though” and will be
known as ٌ‫ﺻﻠِﻴﱠﺔ‬
ْ ‫ﻟَ ْﻮ َو‬.
ٍ‫أَوِﱂ وﻟَﻮ ﺑِﺸﺎة‬
e.g. َ َْْْ Celebrate walimah even if it be with one
(slaughtered) goat.

128
14. ‫ﻟ َْﻮَﻻ‬: Apart from being used for ‫ﺾ‬ ِ ِ
ٌ ‫ َْﲢﻀْﻴ‬and ٌ‫ﺗَـْﻨﺪ ْﱘ‬, it is also used to demonstrate that the
second sentence (‫اب‬ ٌ ‫ ) َﺟ َﻮ‬cannot be attained because of the presence of the condition of the
first sentence (‫ط‬
ٌ ‫) َﺷ ْﺮ‬.
e.g. ‫ﻚ ﺑَﻜٌْﺮ‬
َ َ‫ﻟَ ْﻮَﻻ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ َﳍَﻠ‬ Had it not been for Zayd, Bakr would have perished.

15. ‫ام‬
َ ‫ َﻣﺎ – َﻣﺎ َد‬: It is that ‫ﻣﺎ‬,
َ which has the meaning of ‫( َﻣﺎ َد َام‬as long as).
e.g. ‫ﺲ ْاﻷ َِﻣْﻴـُﺮ‬
َ َ‫أَﻗُـ ْﻮُم َﻣﺎ َﺟﻠ‬ i.e. ‫ﺲ‬ ِ
َ َ‫أَﻗُـ ْﻮُم َﻣﺎ َد َام ْاﻷَﻣْﻴـُﺮ َﺟﻠ‬
I will stand as long as the leader is sitting.

ِ ‫ف اﻟ َْﻌﻄ‬
16. ‫ْﻒ‬ ُ ‫ ُﺣ ُﺮْو‬: These are as follows:
‫َو‬ ‫ف‬
َ ‫ﰒُﱠ‬ ‫َﺣ ّٰﱴ‬ ‫إِ ﱠﻣﺎ‬ ‫أَْو‬ ‫أ َْم‬ ‫َﻻ‬ ‫ﺑَ ْﻞ‬ ‫ٰﻟ ِﻜ ْﻦ‬
‫( َو‬and): This is without regard to sequence.
e.g. ‫ْﺮ‬ ٌ‫ َﺟﺎءَ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ َو ﺑَﻜ‬Zayd and Bakr came.
Here, sequence is not considered.

‫ف‬
َ (then, thus):
 It shows sequence with slight delay.
e.g. ‫ْﺮ‬
ٌ‫َﺟﺎءَ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﻓَـﺒَﻜ‬ Zayd came. Then, Bakr (came).

 It can also show cause (‫ﺐ‬

ٌ َ‫) َﺳﺒ‬.
ِ ِ
e.g. ً‫ﻀﱠﺮة‬ ُ ‫ﺼﺒِ ُﺢ ْاﻷ َْر‬
َ ُْ‫ض ﳐ‬ ْ ُ‫أَﻧْـَﺰَل ﻣ َﻦ اﻟ ﱠﺴ َﻤﺎء َﻣﺎءً ﻓَـﺘ‬
He sends down water from the sky, because of which the earth becomes
green.

‫( ﺛُ ﱠﻢ‬then): It shows sequence with delay.

e.g. ‫ْﺮ‬ ٌ‫ َﺟﺎءَ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﰒُﱠ ﺑَﻜ‬Zayd came. Then, (after some time) Bakr (came).
‫( َﺣ ٰﺘّﻰ‬upto, till, even): It shows the end point.
e.g. ُ‫ﺣ ّٰﱴ اٰ ِﺧَﺮﻩ‬ َ ‫ْت اﻟْ ُﻘ ْﺮاٰ َن‬
ُ ‫ﻗَـَﺮأ‬ I read the Qur’an until the end.
ُ‫ﺎج َﺣ ّٰﱴ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺸﺎة‬
ُ ‫اﳊُ ﱠﺠ‬ ْ ‫ﻗَ ِﺪ َم‬ The pilgrims came, even those on foot.

‫( إِ ﱠﻣﺎ‬either…or):
e.g. ‫اَﻟﺜ َﱠﻤُﺮ إِ ﱠﻣﺎ ُﺣ ْﻠ ٌﻮ َو إِ ﱠﻣﺎ ُﻣﱞﺮ‬ The fruit is either sweet or bitter.

‫( أ َْو‬or):
e.g. ‫ﺾ ﻳـَ ْﻮٍم‬
َ ‫ﻟَﺒِﺜْـﻨَﺎ ﻳـَ ْﻮًﻣﺎ أ َْو ﺑـَ ْﻌ‬ We stayed for a day or a part of a day.

129
‫( أ َْم‬or): It is generally used with an interrogative (‫)اِ ْﺳﺘِ ْﻔ َﻬ ٌﺎم‬.
e.g. ‫ْﺮ‬ ِ
ٌ‫أَ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﻋْﻨ َﺪ َك اَْم ﺑَﻜ‬ Is Zayd with you or Bakr?

‫( َﻻ‬not): This negates from the ‫ف‬ ٌ ‫ َﻣ ْﻌﻄُْﻮ‬that which has been established for the ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫َﻣ ْﻌﻄُْﻮ‬
‫ َﻋﻠَْﻴ ِﻪ‬.
e.g. ‫ْﺮ‬ ِ
ٌ‫ﱐ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ َﻻ ﺑَﻜ‬
ْ َ‫َﺟﺎء‬ Zayd came to me and not Bakr.

‫( ﺑَ ْﻞ‬but, instead, rather): It is used for ‫اب‬ ْ ِ‫ إ‬i.e. to give up one notion for another.
ٌ ‫ﺿَﺮ‬
e.g. ‫ْﺮ‬ ِ
ٌ‫ﱐ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ﺑَ ْﻞ ﺑَﻜ‬ْ َ‫َﺟﺎء‬ Zayd came to me. Rather, Bakr (came).

‫( ٰﻟ ِﻜ ْﻦ‬but): It is used with a ‫ ﻧـَ ْﻔ ٌﻲ‬and serves the purpose of ‫ اِ ْﺳﺘِ ْﺪ َر ٌاك‬i.e. to rectify.
ِ
e.g. َ‫ﺟﺎء‬ َ ‫ﱐ َزﻳْ ٌﺪ ٰﻟﻜ ْﻦ ﺑَﻜٌْﺮ‬ ِ
ْ َ‫َﻣﺎ َﺟﺎء‬ Zayd did not come to me but Bakr came.

ِ‫ﺼ َﻼةُ و اﻟ ﱠﺴ َﻼم ﻋ ٰﻠﻰ رﺳﻮِل اﷲ‬ ِ ِ ْ َ‫ﻓ‬

ُْ َ َ ُ َ ‫ﺎﳊَ ْﻤ ُﺪ ﻟﻠﻪ َو اﻟ ﱠ‬

130
 BIBLIOGRAPHY

‘Abd al-Ghaniyy al-Daqr (1993). Mu‘jam al-Qawa‘id al-‘Arabiyyah   fi   al-Nahw wa al-Tasreef.

Damascus: Dar al-Qalam.
‘Abdullah ibn ‘Aqeel (n.d.). Sharh ibn   ‘Aqeel   ‘ala   Alfiyyat   ibn   Malik, vols. 1-4. Karachi:
Qadeemi Kutubkhana.
‘Ali al-Jaarim and Mustafa Ameen (n.d.). Al-Nahw al-Wadih li al-Madaris al-Ibtida’iyyah, vols.
1-3. Cairo: Dar al-Ma‘arif.
‘Ali al-Jaarim and Mustafa Ameen (n.d.). Al-Nahw al-Wadih li al-Madaris al-Thaniwiyyah,
vols. 1-3. Cairo: Dar al-Ma‘arif.
Ibn Hayyan al-Andalusi (2008). Hidayat al-Nahw. Karachi: Maktabat al-Bushra.
Mawlana Hasan Dockrat (2003). Tawdeeh al-Nahw: A Simplified Arabic Grammar. Azaadville,
South Africa: Madrasah Arabiah Islamia.
Mawlana Mushtaq Ahmad Charthawali (n.d.). ‘Ilm  al-Nahw. Karachi: Altaf & Sons.

131